《锯喻经》的注释巴利
1. Kakacūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
222 “髻”是指发髻上的装饰。“虚空”是指在天空中。“以最胜宝石匣”:千眼天帝释用头顶接取那由宝石和石头做成的最胜宝匣。也有文本读作“以殊胜金匣”。(《佛种姓经注》23 远因缘谈;《本生经注》1.2 近因缘谈)巴利
222.Moḷinti kesaracanaṃ. Vehāyasanti ākāse. Ratanacaṅkoṭavarenāti ratanasilāmayavaracaṅkoṭakena sahassanetto sirasā paṭiggahi. ‘‘Suvaṇṇacaṅkoṭakavarenā’’tipi (bu. vaṃ. aṭṭha. 23 dūrenidānakathā; jā. aṭṭha. 1.2 avidūrenidānakathā) pāṭho.
“Sāti”是发髻的意思。有这种发髻的人就叫“Moḷiko”,也就是“Moḷiyo”。而“Phagguna”是他的名字。“Saṅkhā”是大家共同认可的叫法。“Velā”(时分)是按刹那、须臾、日子等来指示的,所以叫时分,因此说“在那时分……这叫做时之分”。“Velā”(界限)是按分际来安立的,所以叫界限。“Velā”(戒)能动摇杂染那一方,所以叫戒。而它不可逾越的含义,就是对杂染法的相状完全不动摇。在没有智者在场的情况下,大约五六句话就算是一个教诫的标准。“Davasahagataṃ katvā”就是带着嬉戏来做。巴利
Sāti moḷi. Moḷi etassa atthīti moḷiko, moḷiko eva moḷiyo. Phaggunoti pana nāmaṃ. Saṅkhāti samaññā. Velīyati khaṇamuhuttādivasena upadisīyatīti velā, kāloti āha ‘‘tāyaṃ velāyaṃ…pe… ayaṃ kālavelā nāmā’’ti. Velayati paricchedavasena tiṭṭhatīti velā, sīmā. Velayati saṃkilesapakkhaṃ cālayatīti velā, sīlaṃ. Anatikkamanaṭṭhopi cassa saṃkilesadhammanimittaṃ acalanameva. Viññupurisābhāve chapañcavācāmattaṃ ovāde pamāṇaṃ nāma.Davasahagataṃ katvāti kīḷāsahitaṃ katvā.
“混杂”是指因为不顺从的交往而混在一起。为了把“说坏话”这句简略的话展开说明,就说了“热恼、烹煮、捣打等”这些内容。“也作诤事”这里,为了显示他是怎样为了诤事而奔忙,就说了“对这些比丘……”这些。“牵扯诤事”是指为了诤事而牵扯那些比丘,或者是在他们中间制造诤事而牵扯他们。“或仅是示要之词”是指按词句只是简略标示。“不是为了求喜爱”是指不是出于希望导师喜爱自己。“不是以破僧之意”是指不是导师与那位比丘一起带有破僧的意图。“以利乐意”是指为了牟利破群那的利益。巴利
Missībhūtoti ananulomikasaṃsaggavasena missībhūto. ‘‘Avaṇṇaṃ bhāsatī’’ti saṅkhepato vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘tāpanapacanakoṭṭanādīnī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Adhikaraṇampi karotīti ettha yathā so adhikaraṇāya parisakkati, taṃdassanaṃ ‘‘imesaṃ bhikkhūna’’ntiādi. Adhikaraṇaṃ ākaḍḍhatīti adhikaraṇaṃ uddissa te bhikkhū ākaḍḍhati, adhikaraṇaṃ vā tesu uppādento ākaḍḍhati. Uddesapadaṃ vāti padaso uddesamattaṃ vā. Neva piyakamyatāyāti neva attani satthuno piyabhāvakāmatāya. Na bhedādhippāyenāti na satthuno tena bhikkhunā bhedādhippāyena. Atthakāmatāyāti moḷiyaphaggunassa hitakāmatāya.
224 “说坏话”是指谈论比丘尼们的过失。因为贪欲等是它们生起的基础,所以五欲功德就像家宅一样,一处又一处;而这些五欲功德是她们所依赖、所执着的,因此称为“依家者”。渴爱之欲和她们对那件事的想做之欲,两者都是渴爱之欲;但嗔恚之欲则只是她们对那件事的想做之欲。就像水晶宝珠本性清净光明,而心的相续也是如此,贪等就像障碍物,是使它发生变化的原因,因此说“有染污的心也是变易的”等等。“以利乐与悲愍”:这是说明以悲悯来现起。正如在“凡于内没有忿怒的人”等(《自说》20)文句中,“内”这个词是心的同义词,因此说“内有嗔者”就是“嗔心者”。巴利
224.Avaṇṇabhāsaneti bhikkhunīnaṃ aguṇakathane. Chandādīnaṃ vatthubhāvato kāmaguṇā gehaṃ viya gehaṃ, te ca te sitā nissitāti gehassitāti vuttā. Taṇhāchandāpi tāsaṃ kattukāmatāpīti ubhayepi taṇhāchandā, paṭighachandā pana tesaṃ kattukāmatā eva. Phalikamaṇi viya pakatipabhassarassa cittasantānassa upasaṅgo viya vipariṇāmakāraṇaṃ rāgādayoti āha ‘‘rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇata’’ntiādi. Hitānukampīti karuṇāya paccupaṭṭhāpanamāha. ‘‘Yassantarato na santi kopā’’tiādīsu (udā. 20) viya antara-saddo cittapariyāyoti āha ‘‘dosantaroti dosacitto’’ti.
225 因为难以受教,他不接受教诫,心里直接对抗,就那样僵持着。他们抓住了他的心,意思是他们采用了能抓住心的办法。意思是他们满足了心愿。有一次,是在刚成道的时候。一坐食,就是只在同一个时段吃东西,而且只在上午吃,所以说“只在上午吃一顿”等等。即使吃了七次,在这部经里也只算作一坐食,并不是说一坐食者只能坐在一个座位上吃。就像在“无蚊蚋……触”等语句里,“少”这个词表示“没有”,所以说“无病、无苦”。依精勤等而轻快、无困难地起居,就是轻快起居。不是一举,是指不是一次、不是在同一时间。依靠精勤,这里说的“二种食”,是依时间而说的“在下午、在夜间”两种进食;这里的“五种功德”,就是少病等的五种功德;这里说的“仅是令念生起所应作之事而已”,意思是仅仅是令念生起一点应作之事罢了,而对于那些应当遮止的事,并没有反复地劝说勉励。巴利
225. Dubbacatāya ovādaṃ asampaṭicchanto citteneva paṭiviruddho aṭṭhāsi. Gaṇhiṃsu cittaṃ, hadayagāhiniṃ paṭipajjiṃsūti attho. Pūrayiṃsu ajjhāsayanti attho. Ekasmiṃ samaye paṭhamabodhiyaṃ. Ekāsanaṃ bhojanassa ekāsanabhojanaṃ, ekavelāyameva bhojanaṃ. Tañca kho pubbaṇhe evāti āha ‘‘ekaṃ purebhattabhojana’’ntiādi. Sattakkhattuṃ bhuttabhojanampi imasmiṃ sutte ekāsanabhojananteva adhippetaṃ, na ekāsanikatāya ekāya eva nisajjāya bhojanaṃ. ‘‘Appaḍaṃsa…pe… samphassa’’ntiādīsu viya appa-saddo abhāvatthoti āha ‘‘nirābādhataṃ, niddukkhata’’nti. Padhānādivasena sallahukaṃ akicchaṃ uṭṭhānaṃ sallahukauṭṭhānaṃ. Na ekappahārenāti na ekavārena, na ekasmiṃyeva kāleti adhippāyo. Dve bhojanānīti ‘‘aparaṇhe rattiya’’nti kālavasena dve bhojanāni. Pañca guṇeti appābādhādike pañca ānisaṃse. Satuppādakaraṇīyamattamevāti satuppādamattakaraṇīyameva, nivāretabbassa punappunaṃ samādapanañca nāhosi.
味地,就是肥沃的土地,在那里不用灌溉,庄稼就能长成。应当套上轭的牲畜叫“应调御者”,训练它们的老师叫“调御师”,就是负责调教它们的人。村长、象等也被叫作“应调御者”,所以经文里说“善巧的御者”。在四种道路中,他想走哪条路就走哪条路。在快速、平稳等各种步态中,他想用哪种步态就用哪种步态。他踏上哪条路,就已经如愿到达了。不需要勒紧缰绳去阻止,也不需要用刺棒去戳打。只需看着它们走:这些训练好的牲口会随我的心意,慢走、平稳地走、快走。御者在蹄上取相之后,只需观察它们的行走,不必在那里驱策。那些比丘也舍弃了应当舍弃的。毁坏娑罗树者,就是破坏娑罗树的蔓藤,以及其他缠绕在娑罗树上的蔓藤。通过向外移除,就是从娑罗林里向外丢弃。善安立的,就是形态完好的。筑起界限,就是为了做成树根周围的围土圈而筑起界限。蚁丘,就是红蚁丘。搬走干枯的树枝,是从围土圈里面搬走。巴利
Maṇḍabhūmīti ojavantabhūmi, yattha parisiñcanena vinā sassāni kiṭṭhāni sampajjanti. Yuge yojetabbāni yoggāni, tesaṃ ācariyo yoggācariyo, tesaṃ sikkhāpanako. Gāmaṇihatthiādayopi ‘‘yoggā’’ti vuccantīti āha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘assadammasārathī’’ti. Catūsu maggesu yena yena maggena icchati. Javasamagādibhedāsu gatīsu yaṃ yaṃ gatiṃ. Taṃ taṃ maggaṃ āruḷhāva otiṇṇāyeva. Neva vāretabbā rasmiviniggaṇhanena. Na vijjhitabbā patodalaṭṭhiyā. Gamanamevāti ime yuttā mama icchānurūpaṃ mandaṃ gacchanti, samaṃ gacchanti, sīghaṃ gacchantīti khuresu nimittaggahaṇaṃ paṭṭhapetvā sārathinā tesaṃ gamanameva passitabbaṃ hoti, na tattha niyojanaṃ . Tehipi bhikkhūhi. Pajahiṃsu pajahitabbaṃ. Sāladūsanāti sālarukkhavisanāsakā. Aññā ca valliyo sālarukkhe vinandhitvā ṭhitā. Bahi nīharaṇenāti sālavanato bahi chaḍḍanena. Susaṇṭhitāti saṇṭhānasampannā, mariyādaṃbandhitvāti ālavālasampādanavasena mariyādaṃ bandhitvā. Kipillapuṭakaṃ tambakipillakapuṭakaṃ. Sukkhadaṇḍakaharaṇaṃ ālavālabbhantarā.
226 韦德希咖:因为是在毗提诃国出生、长大的,所以叫韦德希咖。慧,就是智慧;依着这智慧而行、而转的人,就叫智者。家主妇:就是家里的女主人。以柔和:就是靠自制。谦下:就是行礼、恭敬的人。寂灭者:就是已经止息了恶行热恼的人。能奋起:就是有奋起精进的人。残酷:就是凶恶。巴利
226. Videharaṭṭhe jātasaṃvaḍḍhatāya vedehikā. Paṇḍā vuccati paññā, tāya itā gatā pavattāti paṇḍitā. Gahapatānīti gehasāminī. Soraccenāti saṃyamena. Nivātavuttīti paṇipātakārī. Nibbutāti nibbutaduccaritapariḷāhā. Uṭṭhāhikāti uṭṭhānavīriyavatī. Kibbisāti kurūrā.
227 已经通过不忍的过失来说明这一点:即使是世间享有“具德者”美名、声望远播的人,也会因为不能忍耐而招致名声败坏、功德损减等种种过患。这里说明了不忍的过患之后,接着讲“语道”,指的是言语往来的适当场合等。因为即使言语柔和,也是言语运作的一种方式,所以就叫“语道”。这里说的就是那些时机等。他们对那个人具有慈心,所以叫“具足慈”;心中已生起慈心,所以叫“已生起慈心者”。另外,“诸比丘,适时地……”等经文,是为了显示法的实相而说的,意思是:凡是出于劝诫他人而说话的人,他们就是以这些方式来说的。“信解之后”:以极大的欢喜,对那个人放下、释放修习之心。那个人是心的所缘,所以叫“以彼为所缘”,也就是慈心。如果这样的话,那慈心有个别的对象,怎么又好像没有个别对象一样呢?有人质问:“怎么能以彼为所缘,而把一切世间都作为对象呢?”对方就用“于五种语道中”等来回答。这里“以彼为所缘”的意思,是把那慈心的所缘作为对象,经文里省略了这个说法。因此说“又以彼为所缘”等。一切称为众生之类的人都是他的对象,所以叫“一切处”,为了显示这个意思就说“一切处”。“广大”:指以众多人为所缘。因为“广大”一词是“大”的同义词,而这里的“大”就是数量众多。所以说“以无量众生为所缘”。“那个人”:指通过五种语道而提到的那个人。“心的”:指与慈俱行的心。这里应当理解为:我们以与慈俱行的心而安住。对此,“如何”是指:把那个人和整个世间都作为那心的所缘,信解之后。巴利
227.Evaṃ akkhantiyā dosaṃ dassetvāti ‘‘guṇavanto’’ti loke patthaṭakittisaddānampi akkhantinimittaṃ ayasuppattiguṇaparihāniādiṃ akkhamatāyaādīnavaṃ pakāsetvā. Vacanapatheti vacanamagge yuttakālādike. Saṇhābhāvopi hi vacanassa pavattiākāroti katvā ‘‘vacanapatho’’ tveva vutto. Tesaṃyeva kālādīnaṃ. Mettā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, uppannaṃ mettacittaṃ etesanti uppannamettacittā. Puna ‘‘kālena vā, bhikkhave’’tiādi (pari. 362, 363) pāḷi dhammasabhāvadassanavasena pavattā ‘‘paraṃ codanāvasena vadantā nāma imehi ākārehi vadantī’’ti. Adhimuñcitvāti abhirativasena tasmiṃ puggale bhāvanācittaṃ muñcitvā vissajjetvā. So puggalo ārammaṇaṃ etassāti tadārammaṇaṃ, mettacittaṃ. Yadi evaṃ padesavisayaṃ taṃ kathaṃ nippadesavisayaṃ viya hotīti codento ‘‘kathaṃ tadārammaṇaṃ sabbāvantaṃ lokaṃ karotī’’ti āha, itaro ‘‘pañca vacanapathe’’tiādinā pariharati. Idha tadārammaṇañcāti tasseva mettacittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvāti pāḷiyaṃ vacanaseso daṭṭhabbo. Tenāha ‘‘puna tassevā’’tiādi. Sabbā sattakāyasaṅkhātā pajā etassa atthīti sabbāvantoti imamatthaṃ dassento ‘‘sabbāvanta’’nti āha. Vipulenāti mahājanārammaṇena. Mahantapariyāyo hi vipula-saddo, mahattañcettha bahukabhāvo. Tenāha ‘‘anekasattārammaṇenā’’ti. Tañca puggalanti pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapuggalaṃ. Cittassāti mettāsahagatacittassa. Ettha ca mettāsahagatena cetasā viharissāmāti sambandho. Tattha kathanti āha ‘‘tañca puggalaṃ sabbañca lokaṃ tassa cittassa ārammaṇaṃ katvā adhimuccitvā’’ti.
228 “阐明其义”:已经正确修习慈心解脱并安住其中的人,因为完全没有嗔恚,无论遇到什么情况,心都不会被扰乱——这就是“阐明其义”。“非地”:因为不是地,所以叫“非地”。“全无地”:指完全不存在任何地的性质。那为什么说“在横向上没有界限”呢?难道不是铁围山把一个个轮围界分隔开了吗?不是的,因为其他轮围界的大地和这个轮围界的大地是连成一片的。正如三个轮子之间的空隙处那样,在三个三个世界之间没有大地,因为那里是世界中间地狱所在之处。而在铁围山彼此相连的地方,大地就是连成一片的。劫初大地形成的时候,正在形成的大地也是与已形成的大地连成一片而形成的。因此说“在横向上没有界限”。正是通过这个甚深的道理,说明在所说的范围之外再没有别的了。巴利
228.Tadatthadīpikanti yā mettaṃ cetovimuttiṃ sammadeva bhāvetvā ṭhitassa nibbikārato kenaci vikāraṃ na āpādetabbatā, tadatthajotikaṃ. Apathavinti pathavī na hotīti apathavī. Nippathavinti sabbena sabbaṃ pathavībhāvābhāvaṃ. Tiriyaṃ pana aparicchinnāti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu cakkavāḷapabbatehi taṃ taṃ cakkavāḷaṃ paricchindati? Na, tadaññacakkavāḷapathaviyā ekābaddhabhāvato. Tiṇṇañhi cakkānaṃ antarasadise tiṇṇaṃ tiṇṇaṃ lokadhātūnaṃ antareyeva pathavī natthi lokantaranirayabhāvato. Cakkavāḷapabbatantarehi sambaddhaṭṭhāne pathavī ekābaddhāva. Vivaṭṭakāle hi saṇṭhahamānāpi pathavī yathāsaṇṭhitapathaviyā ekābaddhāva saṇṭhahati. Tenāha ‘‘tiriyaṃ pana aparicchinnā’’ti. Imināva gambhīrabhāvena vuttaparimāṇato paraṃ natthīti dīpitaṃ hoti.
229 “姜黄色”是指像姜黄那样的颜色,所以经文说“任何黄色的东西”。“有色”是说它具有被称为颜色的色法;不具有这种色法就是“无色”,所以说“无色”。正因如此,经文才说“因为遮止了可见性”。巴利
229.Haliddīti haliddivaṇṇaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘yaṃ kiñci pītakavaṇṇa’’nti. Vaṇṇasaṅkhātaṃ rūpaṃ assa atthīti rūpī, na rūpīti arūpīti āha ‘‘arūpo’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘sanidassanabhāvapaṭikkhepato’’ti.
230 五百由旬这个说法,是就雪山流入大海的那一段而言,不是从无热恼池的湖口算起。这里是拿其他河流来比较,取它们所能达到的深度和无法测量的水量,才说甚深、不可测量。不过义注里说,这只是为了显示它不能被草炬烧热,所以才有以这种方式等说法。巴利
230.Pañca yojanasatānīti himavantato samuddaṃ paviṭṭhaṭṭhānavasena vuttaṃ, na anotattadahamukhato. Aññā nadiyo upādāya labbhamānaṃ gambhīrataṃ appameyyaudakatañca gahetvā ‘‘gambhīrā appameyyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana tiṇukkāya tāpetabbattābhāvadassanaparametanti vuttaṃ ‘‘etena payogenā’’tiādi.
231 231. 就像“像棉一样”这句话,说的是“和木棉藤上的棉絮一样”。发出“嘶嘶”这样的声音,就是“嘶嘶声”。这是为了显示(它)随顺而柔软。同样地,“嗡嗡声”也是这样。这一切都是为了说明:安住于慈心者的心,是无法被破坏的。这里简略的意思是:就像大地不可能被任何人变成非大地,就像不可能在虚空中安立任何色法,就像恒河的水不可能被一把草火烤热,就像猫皮袋不可能变得又硬又粗涩;同样地,对于已经修习、反复修习、充分修习的慈心解脱,那个从五种语道而来的人,无论用什么方法,都不可能让他的心变得变异。巴利
231. Tūlinī viya tūlinīti āha ‘‘simbalitūlalatātūlasamānā’’ti. Sassaranti evaṃpavatto saddo sassarasaddo. Anuravadassanañhetaṃ. Tathā bhabbharasaddo. Sabbametaṃ mettāvihārino cittassa dūsetuṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvadassanaparaṃ. Ayañhettha saṅkhepattho – yathā mahāpathavī kenaci purisena apathaviṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, yathā ākāse kiñci rūpaṃ paṭṭhapetuṃ na sakkā, yathā gaṅgāya udakaṃ tiṇukkāya tāpetuṃ na sakkā, yathā ca biḷārabhastaṃ thaddhaṃ pharusañca samphassaṃ kātuṃ na sakkā, evamevaṃ mettāya cetovimuttiyā āsevitāya bhāvitāya bahulīkatāya pañca vacanapathe gahetvā āgatapurisena kenaci pariyāyena cittassa aññathattaṃ kātuṃ na sakkāti.
232 232.「密探」是指那些伤害他人、从事低贱行业的人。因此说「做低贱行业的人」。「以不能忍受」是指没有忍耐力。当别人对自己不利时,如果因为内心嗔恨而生气,他就不算是「在我的教法中正确修行的人」。巴利
232.Ocarakāti parūpaghātavasena hīnakammakārino. Tenāha ‘‘nīcakammakārakā’’ti. Anadhivāsanenāti akkhamanena. Mayhaṃ ovādakaro na hotīti paramhi anatthakārimhi cittapadosanena āghātuppādanena mama sāsane sammāpaṭipajjamāno nāma na hoti.
233 “细”是指微小的、稀薄的、少量的。“粗”是指大的、粗重的。不过,因为这里指的是言语之道,所以应当从有过失的类别来理解它,因此说“小过失或大过失”。由于以忍辱来面对这些并不成为重负,所以他们说“不能忍受……我们看”。“长时间”是指很久以来,意思就是毕竟、究竟。而毕竟的利益与安乐,只有通过证得究竟智才能获得,因此说“以阿罗汉果把握究竟”。巴利
233.Aṇunti appakaṃ tanu parittakaṃ. Thūlanti mahantaṃ oḷārikaṃ. Vacanapathassa pana adhippetattā taṃ sāvajjavibhāgena gahetabbanti āha ‘‘appasāvajjaṃ vā mahāsāvajjaṃ vā’’ti. Khantiyā idaṃ bhāriyaṃ na hotīti avocuṃ ‘‘anadhi…pe… passāmā’’ti. Dīgharattanti cirakālaṃ, accantamevāti attho. Accantañca hitasukhaṃ nāma aññādhigamenevāti āha ‘‘arahattena kūṭaṃ gaṇhanto’’ti.
2. 《蛇喻经》的注释巴利
2. Alagaddūpamasuttavaṇṇanā
234 “伤害”是指打击。“障碍”是指:以系缚各种成就的方式,来到众生相续的中间、中间地带,所以叫障碍,也就是现世利益等的无义;因为不可逾越,所以与那障碍相应的、或应得障碍之果的、或具有造作障碍之性质的,就称为“障碍法”。因此说“因为能造作障碍,所以称为障碍法”。“无间法”是指具有无间自性的思心所法。这里的词义是:死后的无间果报,称为无间;与这无间相应的,或者由它产生而无间造作的性质,或者以无间为作用的,就是无间法。这些也就是无间。业本身即是障碍法,所以叫“业障碍法”。只障碍解脱,不障碍生天,因为不具有邪行的特相。比丘尼中确实没有以法护身的情况,这是针对普通比丘尼来说的;如果是圣者比丘尼,对她所作的(侵犯恶行)必定是能招感恶趣的。这里的例证就是南达童子。又或者说,由于两者有共同的意乐,所以不是生天的障碍;但解脱的障碍性,是由于破坏了解脱道的修行。不过,如果造作的力量过于强烈,也不能阻止它成为生天的障碍。无因见、无作见、无有见,这三种见当它们成为决定性的状态时,就是“决定邪见法”。“结生法”指的是结生心的生起。这里提到黄门等,只是举例而已,因为一切无因的结生都是异熟障。如果是诽谤圣者,那个思心所就是“诽谤圣者法”。“从此以后”指从请求原谅之后。其余在这里应当说的,都已在《大狮子吼经》的义解中讲过了。只要宣称拥有比丘身份,便是犯了波罗夷。对于其他重罪,不出罪;轻罪,不忏悔。巴利
234.Bādhayiṃsūti (sārattha. ṭī. pācittiya 3.417) haniṃsu. Taṃtaṃsampattiyā vibandhanavasena sattasantānassa antare vemajjhe eti āgacchatīti antarāyo, diṭṭhadhammikādianattho, anatikkamanaṭṭhena tasmiṃ antarāye niyuttā, antarāyaṃ vā phalaṃ arahanti, antarāyassa vā karaṇasīlāti antarāyikā. Tenāha ‘‘antarāyaṃ karontīti antarāyikā’’ti. Ānantariyadhammāti ānantariyasabhāvacetanādhammā. Tatrāyaṃ vacanattho – cutianantaraphalaṃ anantaraṃ nāma, tasmiṃ anantare niyuttā, tannibbattanena anantarakaraṇasīlā, anantarapayojanāti vā ānantarikā, te eva ānantariyāti vuttā. Kammāni eva antarāyikāti kammantarāyikā. Mokkhasseva antarāyaṃ karoti, na saggassa micchācāralakkhaṇābhāvato. Na hi bhikkhuniyā dhammarakkhitabhāvo atthi. Pākatikabhikkhunīvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ, ariyāya pana pavattaṃ apāyasaṃvattaniyameva. Nandamāṇavako cettha nidassanaṃ. Ubhinnaṃ samānacchandatāvasena vā asaggantarāyikatā, mokkhantarāyikatā pana mokkhatthapaṭipattiyā vidūsanato, abhibhavitvā pana pavattiyaṃ saggantarāyikatāpi na sakkā nivāretunti. Ahetukadiṭṭhiakiriyadiṭṭhinatthikadiṭṭhiyova niyatabhāvaṃ pattā niyatamicchādiṭṭhidhammā. Paṭisandhidhammāti paṭisandhicittuppādamāha. Paṇḍakādiggahaṇañcettha nidassanamattaṃ sabbāyapi ahetukapaṭisandhiyā vipākantarāyikabhāvato. Yā hi ariye upavadati, sā cetanā ariyūpavādadhammā. Tato paranti khamāpanato upari. Yaṃ panettha vattabbaṃ, taṃ mahāsīhanādassa līnatthapakāsane vuttameva. Yāva bhikkhubhāvaṃ paṭijānāti pārājikaṃ āpanno. Na vuṭṭhāti sesaṃ garukāpattiṃ. Na deseti lahukāpattiṃ.
这位比丘就是阿利吒。“把味道和味道混在一起”,意思是:把没有过失的资具受用这种味道,跟有过失的五欲受用那种味道等同起来、混为一谈。“就像在引导”,意思是就像在引导束缚。也有版本写作“就像在连结”。“就像在撮合”,意思是把完全有过失的东西,通过掺入无过失这一面,撮合成相似的。所谓“恶”,是因为它卑劣,也是因为它能让人堕入恶趣,所以叫恶。就像有人想用造桥的办法把大海捆住一样。他把一切知智所见为“有过失”的,执取为“无过失”,因此与那位尊者相对抗。他执取“决定不受障碍”,以此排斥无畏智。他说欲刺不能染污圣道的正行道,因此被说成“在圣道上丢进树桩和荆棘等”。这里说的是第一部波罗夷学处所代表的教轮,以及“舍弃非梵行”等教诫所代表的教轮。巴利
Ayaṃ bhikkhu ariṭṭho. Rasena rasaṃ saṃsanditvāti anavajjena paccayaparibhuñjanarasena sāvajjaṃ kāmaguṇaparibhogarasaṃ samānetvā. Upanento viyāti bandhanaṃ upanento viya. ‘‘Ghaṭento viyā’’tipi pāṭho. Upasaṃharanto viyāti sadisataṃ upasaṃharanto viya ekantasāvajje anavajjabhāvapakkhepena. Pāpakanti lāmakaṭṭhena duggatisampāpanaṭṭhena ca pāpakaṃ. Setukaraṇavasena mahāsamuddaṃ bandhantena viya. Sabbaññutaññāṇena ‘‘sāvajja’’nti diṭṭhaṃ ‘‘anavajja’’nti gahaṇena tena paṭivirujjhanto. Ekantato anantarāyikanti gahaṇena vesārajjañāṇaṃ paṭibāhanto. Kāmakaṇṭakehi ariyamaggasammāpaṭipatti na upakkilissatīti vadanto ‘‘ariyamagge khāṇukaṇṭakādīnipakkhipanto’’ti vutto. Paṭhamapārājikasikkhāpadasaṅkhāte, ‘‘abrahmacariyaṃ pahāyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.8, 194) ādidesanāsaṅkhāte ca āṇācakke.
被询问时,他们就是在反复审问。因为问就是审问。为了反驳他凭所获得的见解而生的主张,通过反问让他再次承认并确立,这对他而言就像是拿着那个见解让他接受一样,所以说“他们在深入审问”。而当那个见解被审问时,他所说的理由也只是貌似理由而已,所以对他的提问就是“一同劝说”。以灼烧之义,是因为错误的修行方式在现在和未来都会灼烧;以大热恼之义,是因为没有恒常稳定的自性;以短暂显现之义,是因为只有片刻的可爱;以暂时之义,是因为会被他人所制伏;以破坏一切肢节之义,是因为成为切割、破裂等的依处;以如揭盖一般之义,是因为有过度砍斫之义;在无疮处生疮并进入内部,是因为有穿透的自性,故以穿透之义;以现世与来世无益为相,故以有怖畏有危险之义。以见之强力,是因为那见解具有强力;以执取见,是因为执取被称为见;因为见确实超越法性而从外部执取,所以是执取。以固执,是因为以贪欲的固执为先的见的固执,固执“只有这才是真理”。因为凡在那里固执,就称为固执者。因此说“执持之后”。巴利
Pucchamānā samanuyuñjanti nāma. Pucchā hi anuyogoti. Tenādhigatāya laddhiyā anuvajjanatthaṃ paccanubhāsanena puna paṭijānāpanaṃ patiṭṭhāpanaṃ, taṃ panassa ādāya samādāpanaṃ viya hotīti āha ‘‘samanugāhanti nāmā’’ti. Tassā pana laddhiyā anuyuñjitāya vuccamānampi kāraṇaṃ kāraṇapatirūpakamevāti tassa pucchanaṃ samanubhāsanaṃ. Anudahanaṭṭhena anupāyapaṭipattiyā sampati āyatiñca anudahanaṭṭhena. Mahābhitāpanaṭṭhena anavaṭṭhitasabhāvatāya. Ittarapaccupaṭṭhānaṭṭhena muhuttaramaṇīyatāya. Tāvakālikaṭṭhena parehi abhibhavanīyatāya. Sabbaṅgapaccaṅgapalibhañjanaṭṭhena chedanabhedanādiadhikaraṇabhāvena. Ugghāṭasadisatāya adhikuṭṭanaṭṭhena. Avaṇe vaṇaṃ uppādetvā anto anupavisanasabhāvatāya vinivijjhanaṭṭhena. Diṭṭhadhammikasamparāyikaanatthanimittatāya sāsaṅkasappaṭibhayaṭṭhena.Diṭṭhithāmenāti tassā diṭṭhiyā thāmagatabhāvena. Diṭṭhiparāmāsenāti diṭṭhisaṅkhātaparāmasanena. Diṭṭhiyeva hi dhammasabhāvaṃ atikkamitvā parato āmasanena parāmāso. Abhinivissāti taṇhābhinivesapubbaṅgamena diṭṭhābhinivesena ‘‘idamevettha tatha’’nti abhinivisitvā. Yasmā hi abhinivesanaṃ tattha abhiniviṭṭhaṃ nāma hoti.Tasmā āha ‘‘adhiṭṭhahitvā’’ti.
235 即使想说“没有”,也是因为想隐藏自己的见解、想贬低它。他接受并承认。“两种说”,是指欺骗性的说法。因为先前说的是真实语,现在说的是不实语,凭这两者就称为两种说。巴利
235.Natthīti vattukāmopīti attano laddhiṃ niguhetukāmatāya avajānitukāmopi. Sampaṭicchati paṭijānāti. Dve kathāti visaṃvādanakathaṃ sandhāya vadati. Abhūtakathā hi pubbe pavattā bhūtakathāya vasena dve kathāti vuccati.
236 “到底是为了谁呢?”导师用这句话表明:“像你这样的人,过去从来不曾有过为你而说的法义开示。”因此接着说“或是为了刹帝利”等等。巴利
236.Kassa kho nāmāti iminā satthā ‘‘na mama tuyhaṃ tādisassa atthāya dhammadesanā nāma bhūtapubbā’’ti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘khattiyassa vā’’tiādi.
世尊问比丘们:在这个法与律的教法里,是否还存在智慧种子?因为由智所生的暖存在,所以称为有暖者;由于那样的诸缘,在那自身当中,即使尚未通达的胎藏也已被暖所耕耘,因此其状态已被转变。比丘们否定这一点,是因为他们看到,由于已落入恶行,智慧已被摧毁。成为无热,就是变成没有热力,达到了热力衰退的状态。正因如此,他连在比丘们面前抬头正视都做不到,只能垂肩低头。因为丝毫说不出任何如法的话,所以是无辩才者。带来成就,就是能带来成就。予以止息,就是遮止。巴利
Ñāṇamayā usmā etassa atthīti usmī, tathārūpehi paccayehi anusmīkato tasmiṃ attabhāve paṭivedhagabbhoapi usmīkatoti vikatabhāvato paññābījamassa imasmiṃ dhammavinaye api nu atthīti bhagavā bhikkhū pucchati. Te paṭikkhipantā vadanti ṭhānagatena duccaritena ñāṇupahatabhāvaṃ sampassantā. Nittejabhūtoti nittejaṃ bhūto tejohānippatto. Tato eva bhikkhūnampi sammukhā oloketuṃ asamatthatāya pattakkhandho adhomukho. Sahadhammikaṃ kiñci vattuṃ avisahanato appaṭibhāno. Sampattūpaganti sampattiāvahaṃ. Paṭippassambhentoti paṭisedhento.
237 他通过阐明与障碍之见相关的本质,来净化大众,把持有不清净见解的人清除出去。这是针对某些不了解佛陀威神力的人说的。因为那些人可能会这样想:“这是随口说的。”确实,佛陀从来不会有轻率随意的行为。这里的“他”,就是指前面所说的那位比丘。“即使听了也可能保持沉默”,这是和“或者可能”连在一起说的。凡是“假如……”等等所说的这一切,都是假设。“他们不会去做”,这是和“净化大众之见”连在一起说的。“显示其见解”,就是通过指出其极大的过失来显示。“通过想与寻”,是指由执取净相、随好等而生起的想与寻。因此说“与烦恼欲相应”。“行淫”,这是就本文主题而说的。除此之外,还有像“然而,比丘接受女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、擦身”等经文所说的,属于与法不相应、以物质享受为对象的染着行为。“离开了诸欲、离开了欲想、离开了欲寻而行淫”,这样的事情根本不存在。巴利
237. Antarāyakaraladdhiyā sabhāvavibhāvanena parisaṃ sodheti. Nissāreti nīharati avisuddhadiṭṭhitāya. Kassaci buddhānubhāvaṃ ajānantassa. Tassa hi evaṃ bhaveyya ‘‘sahasā kathita’’nti. Na hi kadāci buddhānaṃ sahasā kiriyā nāma atthi. Assāti ‘‘kassacī’’ti vuttabhikkhussa. Sutvāpituṇhībhāvaṃ āpajjeyyāti athāpi siyāti sambandho. Taṃ sabbanti ‘‘sace hī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ sabbaṃ parikappanaṃ. Na karissantīti parisāya laddhiṃ sodhetīti sambandho. Laddhiṃ pakāsentoti mahāsāvajjatāvasena pakāsento. Saññāvitakkehīti subhanimittānubyañjanaggāhādivasena pavattehi saññāvitakkehi. Tenāha ‘‘kilesakāmasampayuttehī’’ti. Methunasamācāranti idaṃ adhikāravasena vuttaṃ. Tadaññampi pana – ‘‘apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaṃ parimaddanaṃ nahāpanaṃ sambāhanaṃ sādiyatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.50) āgataṃ visabhāgavatthuvisayaṃ āmisaparibhogaṃ. ‘‘Aññatreva kāmehi aññatra kāmasaññāhi aññatra kāmavitakkehi samācarissatī’’ti netaṃ ṭhānaṃ vijjati.
238 238. 通过如理观察,在这里不存在欲贪,所以是离欲贪,这就是离欲贪的状态。有时他们是以持布萨戒的身份受持戒律,有时又不是,这是针对戒律不固定的在家人说的。由于受持戒律的状态不固定,所以会成为障碍。也包括带着欲贪去受用欲乐对象。如果不如理观察,对比丘来说也会成为障碍。也包括带着欲贪去受用资具。这位阿利咤比丘因为错误地执取了所学的教法,既诽谤了我们,也伤害了自己,还生起了大量非福。为了让这样的想法不要生起,世尊在指出错误执取教法的过失时这样说道。“学习”:就是背诵,也包括能熟练地口头诵出并牢记不忘。巴利
238. Yoniso paccavekkhaṇena natthi ettha chandarāgoti nicchandarāgo, taṃ nicchandarāgaṃ. Kadāci uposathikabhāvena samādinnasīlāpi honti kadāci noti anibaddhasīlānaṃ gahaṭṭhānaṃ. Sīlasamādānabhāvato antarāyakaraṃ. Vatthukāmānaṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogañca. Apaccavekkhaṇena bhikkhūnaṃ āvaraṇakaraṃ. Paccayānaṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogañca. Ayaṃ ariṭṭho duggahitāya pariyattiyā vasena amhe ceva abbhācikkhati, attānañca khanati, bahuñca apuññaṃ pasavatīti evaṃ saññā mā hontūti duggahitāya pariyattiyā dosaṃ dassento āha. Uggaṇhantīti sajjhāyanti ceva vācuggataṃ karontā dhārenti cāti attho.
用“经”等这样的说法,就把九种分类的教法圣典全都包括进去了。怎么说是九种分类的经呢?因为带偈颂的经属于“应颂”,不带偈颂的经属于“记说”,而既不属于这两类、又没有“自说”等其他特定名称的经,实际上是不存在的。如果它应该归入“经”这一类,那么像《吉祥经》这样的经典,因为有偈颂,就归不进“经”这一类,就像《法句经》那样;或者说,因为它带有偈颂,就应该像《有偈品》那样归入“应颂”这一类。同样地,在《分别论》等经典中带有偈颂的部分……那又该怎么说呢?下面就来解说——巴利
Suttantiādinā navappabhedampi pariyattidhammaṃ pariyādiyati. Kathaṃ suttaṃ navappabhedaṃ? Sagāthakañhi suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇaṃ, tadubhayavinimuttañca suttaṃ udānādivisesasaññāvirahitaṃ natthi, yaṃ suttaṅgaṃ siyā, maṅgalasuttādīnañca suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā gāthābhāvato dhammapadādīnaṃ viya, geyyaṅgasaṅgaho vā siyā sagāthakattā sagāthāvaggassa viya, tathā ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānanti? Vuccate –
“经”是一个通称,其余则是分别不同的类别。
它们因为有各自的相状而得以确立,即使与其他事物共同存在,也不会因此变成别的类别。巴利
Suttanti sāmaññavidhi, visesavidhayo pare; Sanimittā nirūḷhattā, sahatāññena naññato. (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.nidānakathāvaṇṇanā; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.6; sārattha. ṭī. 1.bāhiranidānakathā);
对于世尊的一切教法来说,“经”是一个总称。所以具寿马哈咖咤那在《导论》中说“探求九分教之经”。像“这些世尊之教说入于经、摄于经”以及“自宗中有五百经”等说法,也都是这个意思的证明。不过在各类别中,应颂等分类是依据各自不同的特征而安立的。比如,应颂就是以“含有偈颂”这一特征来确立的。世间也把有诗律、有偈颂或首卢伽陀的作品称为“应颂”。如果完全没有偈颂,则以“有问有答”作为记说立名的依据,因为一问一答就称为“记说”,也就是veyyākaraṇa。巴利
Sabbassapi hi buddhavacanassa suttanti ayaṃ sāmaññavidhi. Tenevāha āyasmā mahākaccāno nettiyaṃ (netti. 1.saṅgahavāra) ‘‘navavidhasuttantapariyeṭṭhī’’ti. ‘‘Ettakaṃ tassa bhagavato suttāgataṃ suttapariyāpannaṃ (pāci. 655, 1242), sakavāde pañca suttasatānī’’ti (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā; kathā. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) evamādi ca etassa atthassa sādhakaṃ. Tadekadesesu pana geyyādayo visesavidhayo tena tena nimittena patiṭṭhitā. Tathā hi geyyassa sagāthakattaṃ tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Lokepi hi sasilokaṃ sagāthakaṃ vā cuṇṇiyaganthaṃ ‘‘geyya’’nti vadanti. Gāthāvirahe pana sati pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimittaṃ. Pucchāvissajjanañhi ‘‘byākaraṇa’’nti vuccati, byākaraṇameva veyyākaraṇaṃ.
如果真是这样,那么那些带有偈颂、又以问答方式展开的经文,不就变成记说了吗?不会。因为“应颂”等名称在这里根本没有成立的空间,而且已经特别限定为“在没有偈颂的情况下”。就像在《法句》等纯粹由偈颂组成的作品中,在虽然带有偈颂、但偈颂是由喜悦和智慧构成的作品中,在与“此确由世尊所说”等语句相连的作品中,以及在与未曾有法相关的某些经典中,依次安立了偈颂、自说、如是语、未曾有法这些名称;同样,虽然是偈颂的形式,但在阐明世尊过去世中生世行持与威神力的经典中,安立了本生的名称;虽然有问答的形式并带有偈颂,但在某些经典中因为能使人获得智慧,就安立了吠陀罗的名称。这样一来,就是依据各自“带有偈颂”等特征,在那些特定的经典上安立了应颂等名称。这些不同的分类,是在“经”这个总称之外另立的应颂等类别。至于那些不具备应颂等类别特征的,就保留“经”这个总称,也就是在排除了特殊名称之后,以普通名称来称呼它。那么,难道不是这样吗:带有偈颂的经是应颂,没有偈颂的经是记说,这样一来“经分”不就不能成立了吗?这个责难现在还成立吗?不,它已经不成立了,因为已经澄清了。因为前面已经澄清过:“在没有偈颂时,问答的形式才是记说之所以为记说的特征。”巴利
Evaṃ sante sagāthakādīnampi pucchaṃ katvā vissajjanavasena pavattānaṃ veyyākaraṇabhāvo āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati geyyādisaññānaṃ anokāsabhāvato, ‘‘gāthāvirahe satī’’ti visesitattā ca. Tathā hi dhammapadādīsu kevalaṃ gāthābandhesu, sagāthakattepi somanassañāṇamayikagāthāyuttesu, ‘‘vuttañheta’’nti (itivu. 1) ādivacanasambandhesu, abbhutadhammapaṭisaṃyuttesu ca suttavisesesu yathākkamaṃ gāthā-udāna-itivuttaka-abbhutadhamma-saññā patiṭṭhitā, tathā satipi gāthābandhabhāve bhagavato atītāsu jātīsu cariyānubhāvappakāsakesu jātakasaññā, satipi pañhavissajjanabhāve sagāthakatte ca kesuci suttantesu vedassa labhāpanato vedallasaññā patiṭṭhitāti evaṃ tena tena sagāthakattādinā nimittena tesu tesu suttavisesesu geyyādisaññā patiṭṭhitāti visesavidhayo suttaṅgato pare geyyādayo. Yaṃ panettha geyyaṅgādinimittarahitaṃ, taṃ suttaṅgaṃ visesasaññāparihārena sāmaññasaññāya pavattanatoti. Nanu ca sagāthakaṃ suttaṃ geyyaṃ, niggāthakaṃ suttaṃ veyyākaraṇanti suttaṅgaṃ na sambhavatīti codanā tadavatthā evāti? Na tadavatthā sodhitattā. Sodhitañhi pubbe ‘‘gāthāvirahe sati pucchāvissajjanabhāvo veyyākaraṇassa tabbhāvanimitta’’nti.
有人说:“因为《吉祥经》等是偈颂体,所以它们不该归入‘经’这一类。”这种说法不对,因为“经”这个称呼早已固定下来了。《吉祥经》等确实就是以“经”的身份被认定的。它们不像《法句》《佛史》那样,是因为偈颂体才被人知道,而是因为“经”这个身份才被人知道。正因如此,注疏里才把它们称为“名为经”。又有人说:“因为它们带有偈颂,所以应该归入‘应颂’这一类。”这也不对,因为“带有”的意思是跟另一个东西共同存在。“跟偈颂一起”就是“带有偈颂”,而所谓“共同存在”,从意义上说,确实是跟别的东西在一起。可是在《吉祥经》等里面,并没有哪一段经文是脱离了偈颂还能单独称为“跟偈颂一起”的,也没有一个脱离偈颂的独立整体存在。还有人说:“在《分别论》等里面,那些带有偈颂的段落应该归入‘应颂’这一类。”这也不对,因为那些偈颂属于别的类别。那些偈颂本身属于本生等所摄的范围,所以不会因为它们就让《分别论》等变成“应颂”这一类。应当这样理解:经等各个分类之间,是不会互相混淆的。巴利
Yañca vuttaṃ ‘‘gāthābhāvato maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttaṅgasaṅgaho na siyā’’ti (khu. pā. 5.1; su. ni. 261), taṃ na, niruḷhattā. Niruḷho hi maṅgalasuttādīnaṃ suttabhāvo. Na hi tāni dhammapadabuddhavaṃsādayo viya gāthābhāvena paññātāni, kintu suttabhāveneva. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘suttanāmaka’’nti nāmaggahaṇaṃ kataṃ. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ ‘‘sagāthakattā geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti , tadapi natthi, yasmā sahatāññena. Saha gāthāhīti hi sagāthakaṃ, sahabhāvo ca nāma atthato aññena hoti, na ca maṅgalasuttādīsu gāthāvinimutto koci suttapadeso atthi, yo ‘‘saha gāthāhī’’ti vucceyya, na ca samudāyo nāma koci atthi. Yadapi vuttaṃ ‘‘ubhatovibhaṅgādīsu sagāthakappadesānaṃ geyyaṅgasaṅgaho siyā’’ti, tadapi na aññato. Aññā eva hi tā gāthā jātakādipariyāpannattā, ato na tāhi ubhatovibhaṅgādīnaṃ geyyaṅgabhāvoti. Evaṃ suttādīnaṃ aṅgānaṃ aññamaññasaṅkarābhāvo veditabbo.
“Atthattha”(真实的义)就是指真实存在的、如实的义。有些人因为颠倒,把不是义的也当成“义”来执取,所以特别用“atthattha”这个词来区分。所谓“Kāraṇattha”,就是指作为因的义:戒是定的因,定是观的因,像这样,一层一层作为原因的义。因此经文说“在这个地方,戒”等等。这是要说明:他们无法了知——在这个地方讲戒,完全是为了定;讲定是为了观;讲观是为了道;讲道是为了果;讲流转,完全是为了证得还灭。像这样,他们无法了知。因此应当明白,在经典中,“attha”这个词包含了“所说的义”和“目的义”这两层意思。“不摄持”是指不仔细抉择,不能成为堪忍审查智慧的人。意思就是,他们不是那种能在审查之后、以智慧欢喜信受法义的人。就这样,他们学习这教法,竟然是为了“脱开论诤”的利益,把学习佛法变成了脱开别人加给自己的非难、使自己获得解脱的手段;或者说,“vādappamokkha”就是指从毁谤中脱身。所谓“为了彼之义”,是指为了通过圆满戒律等所应证得的,或由证得彼道而应得者,或由证得彼果而应得者,或为了无取解脱之义。他们学法,是依正理而学,这就是意趣。然而他们不能证得、不能获得。他们所学到的那些法,因为被错误执取,就成了忿恨、骄慢、恼害等的因,在长夜中导致不利与苦。巴利
Atthatthanti atthabhūtaṃ yathābhūtaṃ atthaṃ. Anatthampi keci vipallāsavasena ‘‘attho’’ti gaṇhantīti ‘‘atthattha’’nti visesetvā vuttaṃ. Kāraṇatthanti kāraṇabhūtaṃ atthaṃ, sīlaṃ samādhissa kāraṇaṃ, samādhi vipassanāyāti evaṃ tassa tassa kāraṇabhūtaṃ atthaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīla’’ntiādi. Tenetaṃ dasseti – imasmiṃ ṭhāne sīlaṃ kathitaṃ, tañca yāvadeva samādhatthaṃ, samādhi vipassanattho, vipassanā maggatthā, maggo phalattho, vaṭṭaṃ kathitaṃ yāvadeva vivaṭṭādhigamatthanti jānituṃ na sakkontīti. Evaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘attha’’nti iminā bhāsitatthapayojanatthānaṃ gahitatā veditabbā. Na pariggaṇhantīti na vicārenti, nijjhānapaññākkhamā na honti, nijjhāyitvā paññāya rocetvā gahetabbā na hontīti adhippāyo. Iti evaṃ etāya pariyattiyā vādappamokkhānisaṃsā attano upari parehi āropitavādassa niggahassa mokkhapayojanā hutvā dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti. Vādappamokkho vā nindāpamokkho. Yassa cāti yassa ca sīlādipūraṇena pattabbassa, maggassa vā tadadhigamena pattabbassa, phalassa vā tadadhigamena pattabbassa, anupādāvimokkhassa vā atthāya. Dhammaṃ pariyāpuṇanti, ñāyena pariyāpuṇantīti adhippāyo. Nānubhonti na vindanti. Tesaṃ te dhammā duggahitā upārambhamānadappamakkhapaḷāsādihetubhāvena dīgharattaṃ ahitāya dukkhāya saṃvattanti.
239 239. “alaṃ pariyatto gado assāti alagaddo”这句,是省略了鼻音,并加上一个“d”音之后形成的。为了从轮回之苦的荒漠中渡越出去而学的教理,就叫“渡越教理”。被安排守护库房的人,叫“库管”;像库管一样的,就是“库管式”的,也就是守护法宝的人。不看别的利益,只以库管本身的状态而学的教理,就是“库管式教理”。“就是护持传承者”这个限定,是以狮子回顾的方式来说的,意思是:纯粹只是持教者、护传统者;这个限定也应该套用到前面那两种教理上。巴利
239. Alaṃ pariyatto gado assāti alagaddo anunāsikalopaṃ da-kārāgamañca katvā. Vaṭṭadukkhakantārato nittharaṇatthāya pariyatti nittharaṇapariyatti. Bhaṇḍāgāre niyutto bhaṇḍāgāriko, bhaṇḍāgāriko viya bhaṇḍāgāriko, dhammaratanānupālako. Aññaṃ atthaṃ anapekkhitvā bhaṇḍāgārikasseva sato pariyatti bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti. ‘‘Vaṃsānurakkhakovā’’ti avadhāraṇaṃ sīhāvalokanañāyena tantidhārakova paveṇipālakovāti purimapadadvayepi yojetabbaṃ.
如果有人问:如果为了持诵佛语等目的而学习佛语,就属于“库管式教理”,那为什么特别指明是“诸漏尽者”呢?难道某些凡夫不也有这种方式吗?针对这个问难,论师说“然而,凡夫……”等。“于自位”,就是处于渡越的位置上。凡夫当然也可能抱着“我要守护传统”的想法去学习,但由于他自己还没有从有爱的荒漠中渡越出来,所以他的那种教理就只能叫作“渡越教理”——这就是论师的意趣所在。因此说“凡夫……”等。巴利
Yadi tantidhāraṇādiatthaṃ buddhavacanassa pariyāpuṇanaṃ bhaṇḍāgārikapariyatti, kasmā ‘‘khīṇāsavassā’’ti visesetvā vuttaṃ, nanu ekaccassa puthujjanassapi ayaṃ nayo labbhatīti anuyogaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘yo panā’’tiādi. Attano ṭhāneti nittharaṇaṭṭhāne. Kāmaṃ puthujjano ‘‘paveṇiṃ pālessāmī’’ti ajjhāsayena pariyāpuṇāti. Attano pana bhavakantārato anittiṇṇattā tassa sā pariyatti nittharaṇapariyatti eva nāma hotīti adhippāyo. Tenāha ‘‘puthujjanassā’’tiādi.
能够审察、能够承受,就是能够承受审察的智慧。对于各处开示的戒等法,经过细细思择,以智慧感到欢喜之后,就能如实地把握它们。因此说“此处,戒”等等。为了说明不只是依靠善巧掌握教理才能成就道的修习和果的证悟,连降伏外道论难、建立自宗等事也能成功,所以说了“他宗”等话。因此引述:“以正法善加降伏已起的他宗论难之后”等等(长部2.268)。“所欲之处”:指以解开邪见等方式所希望的任何一段经文。“解脱”:指排除、摆脱。即使是不导向利益、不导向苦的灭尽,在那种情况下,生起利益与安乐之因本身,在它存在时即是如此。应当看到,即使是善巧掌握了的毒蛇,也能导向利益与安乐。巴利
Nijjhānaṃ khamantīti nijjhānapaññaṃ khamanti. Tattha tattha āgate sīlādidhamme nijjhāyitvā paññāya rocetvā yāthāvato gahetabbā honti. Tenāha ‘‘idha sīla’’ntiādi. Na kevalaṃ suggahitaṃ pariyattiṃ nissāya maggabhāvanāphalasacchikiriyā, paravādaniggahasakavādapatiṭṭhāpanādīnipi ijjhantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘paravāde’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘uppannaṃ parappavādaṃ sahadhammena suniggahaṃ niggahitvā’’tiādi (dī. ni. 2.268). Icchiticchitaṭṭhānanti diṭṭhiviniveṭhanādivasena icchitaṃ icchitaṃ pāḷipadesaṃ. Mocetunti apanetuṃ. Ahitāya dukkhāya asaṃvattanampi tadabhāve uppajjanakahitasukhassa kāraṇameva tasmiṃ sati bhāvatoti. Suggahitaalagaddassapi hitāya sukhāya saṃvattanatā daṭṭhabbā.
240 240. “能渡越”是因为通过它来渡越,所以叫“渡越者”;“系缚”是因为绑扎起来,所以叫“桥”;它既是能渡越者又是桥,所以叫“渡越桥”。“筏”是能承载、把人送到彼岸的东西。“结扎成束而绑好”是指用竹子、芦苇等扎成一捆一捆地绑起来。“细”是指以八种等至为所缘的结缚。“粗”是指其余的结缚。“见”是指如实看见,也就是观的意思。如此清净、如此洁白:对于三界中的诸法,了知“这不是我的,这不是我,这不是我的我”;“不应依止”是指不应以贪喜之心去倚靠;“不应爱着”是指不应执为己有;“不应视为财物”是指不应将其视作财物或资产;“双方面”是指在止与观二者之上巴利
240. Uttaranti etenāti uttaro, sinanti bandhantīti setu, uttaro ca so setu cāti uttarasetu. Kūlaṃ paratīraṃ vahati pāpetīti kullaṃ. Kalāpaṃ katvā baddhoti veḷunaḷādīhi kalāpavasena baddho. Aṇunti idaṃ aṭṭhasamāpattiārammaṇaṃ saññojanaṃ sandhāya vadati. Thūlanti itaraṃ. Diṭṭhinti yathābhūtadassanaṃ, vipassananti attho. Evaṃ parisuddhaṃ evaṃ pariyodātanti tebhūmakesu dhammesu ñātaṃ ‘‘netaṃ mama, nesohamasmi, na meso attā’’ti, evaṃ taṇhādiṭṭhisaṃkilesābhāvena sabbaso visuddhaṃ, parisuddhattā eva pariyodātaṃ. Na allīyethāti nikantivasena na nissayetha. Na kelāyethāti na mamāyetha. Na dhanāyethāti dhanaṃ drabyaṃ na kayirātha. Ubhayatthāti samathe vipassanāya ca.
在“非正法”等说法中,因为那是下劣意乐之人的法,所以叫“非正法”。因为那是村里人的法,所以叫“村法”。因为诸烦恼的本质就是流漏,所以叫“卑劣法”。因为被烦恼所染污、又粗重,所以叫“秽恶”。因为以用水洗净为最终目的,所以叫“水净者”。即使以“诸比丘,法尚且应当舍弃”这一教诫对比丘们说法,世尊也正是在针对阿利吒进行呵责。巴利
Asaddhammetiādīsu asataṃ hīnajjhāsayānaṃ dhammoti asaddhammo. Gāmavāsīnaṃ dhammoti gāmadhammo. Kilesānaṃ vassanasabhāvatāya vasaladhammo. Kilesehi dūsitattā thūlattā ca duṭṭhullo. Udakasuddhipariyosānatāya odakantiko. ‘‘Dhammāpi vo pahātabbā’’ti imināpi ovādena bhikkhū uddissa kathentopi ariṭṭhaṃyeva niggaṇhāti.
241 “以三种执取方式”是指以渴爱、慢、见这三种执取方式。如果是这样,那为什么通常只说“执取我”和“执取我所”这两种执取呢?这并不矛盾,因为在那种说法里也已经把三种执取都说了。因为说到“我”时,由于“我是”这一执取是通称,所以也就说了慢的执取和见的执取。见也是见处,因为它能成为先前生起的见、后来生起的见、有身见、常见等的原因。它的所缘是五蕴,以及色所缘等。见的缘有无明、触、想、寻、非理作意、恶友、外来的传闻等,这些是见的依止等缘。因为《无碍解道》中这样说:“什么是八种见处?无明、触、想、寻、非理作意、恶友、外来的传闻都是见处”等等。“色所缘”是指以具有变坏性质的法作为所缘。但在这里不应当说“色是我”,因为这里并不是指“把色看作我”的那种执取。那种执取在后面以“那种见处”等语句来说。这里有些人认为是指“把有色的我看作我、我中有色、色中有我”这三种执取,这是不合理的。因为色并不是我,它只是执取“我”时的所缘;或者说,执取我的见是依于色等法而生起的,因为从究竟意义上找不到那个我,所以就说以色等为所缘的才是我见,因此不应当说色是“我”。这就是这里的含义。而“那种见处”等语句,则是像观照与再观照那样,显示了所谓的“见随观”。巴利
241.Tividhaggāhavasenāti taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhavasena. Yadi evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ mamāti gaṇhātī’’ti gāhadvayameva kasmā vuttanti? Nayidamevaṃ tatthāpi gāhattayasseva vuttattā. ‘‘Aha’’nti hi iminā mānadiṭṭhiggāhā vuttā ‘‘ahamasmī’’ti gāhasāmaññato. Diṭṭhipi diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ purimuppannāya diṭṭhiyā uttaradiṭṭhiyā sakkāyadiṭṭhiyā sassatadiṭṭhiyā ca kāraṇabhāvato. Ārammaṇaṃ pañca khandhā, rūpārammaṇādīni ca. Diṭṭhiyā paccayo avijjā-phassa-saññā-vitakka-ayonisomanasikāra-pāpamittaparatoghosādiko diṭṭhiyā upanissayādipaccayo. Vuttañhetaṃ paṭisambhidāyaṃ (paṭi. ma. 1.124)‘‘katamāni aṭṭha diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni avijjāpi phassopi saññāpi vitakkopi ayonisomanasikāropi pāpamittopi paratoghosopi diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādi. Rūpārammaṇāti ruppanasabhāvadhammārammaṇā. Rūpaṃ pana attāti na vattabbaṃ idha ‘‘rūpaṃ attato samanupassatī’’ti (saṃ. ni. 3.81, 345) imassa gāhassa anadhippetattā. So hi ‘‘yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā parato vuccati. Idha pana ‘‘rūpavantaṃ attānaṃ samanupassati, attani rūpaṃ, rūpasmiṃ attāna’’nti ime tayo gāhā adhippetāti keci, tadayuttaṃ. Yasmā rūpaṃ attā na hoti, attaggāhassa pana ālambanaṃ hoti, attasabhāveyeva vā rūpādidhamme ārabbha attadiṭṭhi uppajjati, na attānaṃ tassa paramatthato anupalabbhanato, tasmā rūpādiārammaṇāva attadiṭṭhīti katvā vuttaṃ, rūpaṃ pana ‘‘attā’’ti na vattabbanti ayamettha attho. ‘‘Yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhāna’’ntiādinā pana vipassanāpaṭivipassanā viya diṭṭhianupassanā nāma dassitā.
香、味、触处,因为属于“到达之后才执取”的根的境域,所以必须到达之后才能执取。它确实是先受用自己那个境域,再与之发生关联,然后才执取。其余七处则称为“所知”,因为是由意来识知的;否则,其他那些也会成为“所知”。“已到达”指已证得。“已遍寻”指已搜寻。“已遍思”指已思虑。因此说“以意”。在这里,为了显示“已到达、已遍寻”与“已遍思”的差别,先以不遮止已到达和已遍寻、各别遮止、以及总遮止这三种方式展示四句分别,然后为了显示已到达者和已遍寻者与已遍思者之间的差别,说了“在世间的……”等话。遍寻之后到达,因为先以心到达、后以身到达,所以称为“已到达”。遍寻之后没有到达,因为纯粹只是遍寻的状态,所以只称为“已遍寻”。没有遍寻而到达,以及没有到达的,因为是由意去遍思,所以称为“意所遍思”。巴利
Gandharasaphoṭṭhabbāyatanānaṃ sampattagāhindriyavisayatāya patvā gahetabbatā. Tañhi tassa attano visayaṃ paribhutvā sambandhaṃ hutvā gaṇhāti. Avasesāni sattāyatanāni viññātaṃ nāma manasā viññātabbato. Aññathā itaresampi viññātatā siyā. Pattanti adhigataṃ. Pariyesitanti gavesitaṃ. Anuvicaritanti cintitaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘manasā’’ti. Ettha ca pattapariyesanānaṃ apaṭikkhepassa, visuṃ, ekajjhaṃ paṭikkhepassa ca vasena catukkoṭikaṃ dassetvā pattapariyesitehi anuvicaritassa bhedaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘lokasmiñhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pariyesitvā pattaṃ paṭhamaṃ cetasā pacchā kāyena pattattā pattaṃ nāma. Pariyesitvā nopattaṃ pariyesitaṃ nāma kevalaṃ pariyesitabhāvato. Apariyesitvā pattañca nopattañca manasā anuvicaritabbato manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma.
这个区分看起来有点乱,所以接着说了“或者”等等。所谓“已到达”的意思,就是按已经到达的状态、已经到达的共同性来说的。没有去寻找而得到,叫做“意所遍思”,因为既没有到达,也没有寻找。或者说,这一切就是“寻找后得到”等所说的四种情况。通过“凡那个见处”等语句,是以识为所缘的渴爱、慢、见,用排除剩下的方式来讲述的。那么,用排除剩下的方式来统摄,有什么用处呢?回答说:是为了“说法的善巧”等等。有些应当调伏的人,如果不直接触及所应宣说之法的本身,而要通过说明所缘的作用、相应法、果的差别等其他方面才能通达,对他们就用这些种种差别之法来教导;而有些人只要从某一个方面,或者只要说明法的本身就能通达,对他们就只说那个法——因为如来是法的自在者,所以也能以毫无剩余的方式说明其他一切方面,这就是说法的善巧。因此说“依见等所缘而显示了识”。巴利
Ayañca vikappo ākulo viyāti ‘‘atha vā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Pattaṭṭhenāti pattabhāvena pattatāsāmaññena. Apariyesitvā nopattaṃ manasānuvicaritaṃ nāma pattiyā pariyesanāya ca abhāvato. Sabbaṃ vā etanti ‘‘pariyesitvā pattampī’’tiādinā vuttaṃ catubbidhampi. Imināti ‘‘yampi taṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ’’tiādivacanena. Viññāṇārammaṇā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiyo kathitā pārisesañāyena . Evaṃ pārisesañāyapariggahe kiṃ payojananti āha ‘‘desanāvilāsenā’’tiādi. Yesaṃ vineyyānaṃ desetabbadhammassa sarūpaṃ anāmasitvā ārammaṇakicca-sampayuttadhamma-phalavisesādi-pakārantaravibhāvanena paṭivedho hoti, tesaṃ tappakārabhedehi dhammehi, yesaṃ pana yena ekeneva pakārena sarūpeneva vā vibhāvane kate paṭivedho hoti, tesaṃ taṃ vatvā dhammissarattā tadaññaṃ niravasesākāravibhāvanañca desanāvilāso. Tenāha ‘‘diṭṭhādiārammaṇavasena viññāṇaṃ dassita’’nti.
“见处”就是指见本身作为见的立足处,这一段在前面已经说过了。这种见把色执取为“世间和自我”,所以针对那个色而说“那个世间就是那个我”,应当这样连接理解。所谓“我死后将会存在”,这是依照死后有想论者的立场而说这种见,因此说“那个我死后前往他世,成为常恒”等等。“常恒”就是坚固,“常住”就是永远存在,“不变易之法”就是不会因衰老和死亡而变易的本性,意思是没有变异。那种见也是这样执取的,它像执取自我一样,以渴爱和见执取的特别方式去执取,所以说“这是我的”等等。“以见为所缘”就是以见为对象领域。那么,见怎么会成为见的对象领域呢?回答说“以观……”等等。在逆观的时候,也就是从双观等时候开始,应当知道:就像文法家对声音、吠陀诵习者对吠陀论典那样,在见之中,只有具足见的人才会生起见执取的活动。巴利
Diṭṭhiṭṭhānanti diṭṭhi eva diṭṭhiṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ heṭṭhā vuttanayameva. Yaṃ rūpaṃ esā diṭṭhi ‘‘loko ca attā cā’’ti gaṇhāti. Taṃ rūpaṃ sandhāya ‘‘so loko so attā’’ti vacanaṃ vuttanti yojanā. So peccabhavissāmīti uddhamāghātanikavādavasenāyaṃ diṭṭhīti āha ‘‘so ahaṃ paralokaṃ gantvā nicco bhavissāmī’’tiādi. Dhuvoti thiro. Sassatoti sabbadābhāvī. Avipariṇāmadhammoti jarāya maraṇena ca avipariṇāmetabbasabhāvo, nibbikāroti attho. Tampi dassananti tampi tathāvuttaṃ diṭṭhidassanaṃ attānaṃ viya taṇhādiṭṭhiggāhavisesena gaṇhāti. Tenāha ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādi. Diṭṭhārammaṇāti diṭṭhivisayā. Kathaṃ pana diṭṭhi diṭṭhivisayā hotīti āha ‘‘vipassanāyā’’tiādi. Paṭivipassanākāleti yamakato sammasanādikālaṃ sandhāyāha. Tattha akkharacintakānaṃ sadde viya, vedajjhāyīnaṃ vedasatthe viya ca diṭṭhiyaṃ diṭṭhigatikānaṃ diṭṭhiggāhappavatti daṭṭhabbā.
“随观”这个词,连同它“随观”的含义,要这样连接起来理解。由此说明,所谓“随观”有四种。其中,智是正确、如实地观察平等与不平等,所以叫“随观”。其余的则是依杂染,反复地观察,所以也叫“随观”。如果这样的话,见随观因为是邪见的缘故,那渴爱和慢又怎么算呢?其实,渴爱在众生造恶时,也会以看似智慧的方式出现,让人想出种种手段,由此产生欺骗、诈伪和曲心。慢也是通过“我胜过别人”这类看法来抬高自己。所以应当知道,渴爱和慢也有类似随观的活动。在“这是我的”这样执取的渴爱所依之处——内在的五蕴中,当它们找不到、已坏灭时,他不再恐惧战栗,因为怖畏的战栗和渴爱的战栗已经被道彻底断除了。巴利
Samanupassatīti padassa ca tasso samanupassanā atthoti yojanā. Tena samanupassanā nāma catubbidhāti dasseti. Tattha ñāṇaṃ tāva samavisamaṃ sammā yāthāvato anupassatīti samanupassanā. Itarā pana saṃkilesavasena anu anu passantīti samanupassanā. Yadi evaṃ hotu tāva diṭṭhisamanupassanā micchādassanabhāvato, kathaṃ taṇhāmānāti? Taṇhāyapi sattānaṃ pāpakaraṇe upāyadassanavasena paññāpatirūpikā pavatti labbhateva, yāya vañcananikatisāciyogā sambhavanti. Mānopi seyyādinā dassanavaseneva tathā attānaṃ ūhatīti taṇhāmānānaṃ samanupassanāpatirūpikā pavatti labbhatīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Avijjamāneti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’ti evaṃ gahetabbe taṇhāvatthusmiṃ ajjhattakhandhapañcake anupalabbhamāne vinaṭṭhe. Na paritassati bhayaparittāsataṇhāparittāsānaṃ maggena samugghātitattā.
242 以四种原因——把“不存在时不战栗”这句话和其余三种原因合在一起,就说成是四种原因。四种原因,就是阐述四边空理的种种原因。在外不存在,是指外在的事物不存在。而它的不存在,或者是已经得到后又失去了,或者是还没得到、没能获得,所以圣典里说:“我曾经有,如今却没有了;我将会有的,我却得不到。”把这两方面按资具来分别,为了显示其中的战栗,就说“在外在资具坏失时”等等。其中,车乘指车、乘舆之类,坐骑指象、马之类。巴利
242.Catūhi kāraṇehīti ‘‘asati na paritassatī’’ti vuttampi itarehi tīhi saha gahetvā vuttaṃ. Catūhi kāraṇehīti catukkoṭikasuññatākathanassa kāraṇehi. Bahiddhā asatīti bāhire vatthusmiṃ avijjamāne. Sā panassa avijjamānatā laddhavināsena vā aladdhālābhena vāti pāḷiyaṃ – ‘‘ahu vata me, taṃ vata me natthi, siyā vata me, taṃ vatāhaṃ na labhāmī’’ti vuttanti tadubhayaṃ parikkhāravasena vibhajitvā tattha paritassanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bahiddhā parikkhāravināse’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha yānaṃ ‘‘ratho vayha’’nti evamādi. Vāhanaṃ hatthiassādi.
“以哪些烦恼”是指以那些尚未达成愿望之类的烦恼。“会这样发生”是指会以“我曾经有过”这样的方式生起责备等等。“见处、见依止、见缠、执取、随眠”在这里的意思是:在接连不断生起的各种见解当中,后来生起的那些见解,对于它们来说,先前生起的见解以“因”的意义成为见处;以“增上”的意义成为见依止;当达到缠缚的状态时,一切见解都成为见缠;以“只有这才是真实的,其他都是虚妄的”这种方式生起,就是执取;由于未被断除而潜伏在相续当中,就是随眠。应当这样理解见处等这些词的区别。由于被渴爱等所动摇,一切行都是动摇的,所以叫“一切行动摇”,剩下两个词也是同样的道理。苦依止于此,所以叫“所依”;蕴就是所依,所以叫“蕴依”,其余的也同理。也就是缘于它,渴爱被耗尽、离染、灭尽,应当这样连接理解。在“我将断灭,我将不存在”等语句中,这只是语气词,或者表示疑惑。“那些”是指:因为无我所,所以有渴爱的恐惧和怖畏的恐惧。因此说“那就是恐惧”等等。“我若不存在,我所也不存在”——据说如果“我”完全不存在,“我所”也就不会存在。这就是显示恐惧对治方法的内容。巴利
Yehikilesehīti yehi asantapatthanādīhi kilesehi. Evaṃ bhaveyyāti evaṃ ‘‘ahu vata me’’tiādinā codanādi bhaveyya. Diṭṭhiṭṭhānādhiṭṭhānapariyuṭṭhānābhinivesānusayānanti ettha aparāparaṃ pavattāsu diṭṭhīsu yā parato uppannā diṭṭhiyo, tāsaṃ purimuppannā diṭṭhiyo kāraṇaṭṭhena diṭṭhiṭṭhānāni. Adhikaraṇaṭṭhena diṭṭhādhiṭṭhānāni, pariyuṭṭhānappattiyā sabbāpi diṭṭhipariyuṭṭhānāni. ‘‘Idameva saccaṃ moghamañña’’nti (ma. ni. 2.202, 427; 3.27-29; udā. 55; mahāni. 20; netti. 59) pavattiyā abhinivesā. Appahīnabhāvena santāne sayantīti anusayāti evaṃ diṭṭhiṭṭhānādīnaṃ padānaṃ vibhāgo veditabbo. Taṇhādīhi kampaniyatāya sabbasaṅkhārāva iñjitānīti sabbasaṅkhāraiñjitāni. Sesapadadvayepi eseva nayo. Upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti upadhi, khandhāva upadhi khandhūpadhi. Esa nayo sesesupi. Tadeva ca āgamma taṇhā khīyati virajjati nirujjhatīti yojanā. Ucchijjissāmi nāmassūtiādīsu nipātamattaṃ, saṃsaye vā. Tāsoti attaniyābhāvaṃ paṭicca taṇhāparittāso ceva bhayaparittāso ca. Tenāha ‘‘tāso heso’’tiādi. No cassaṃ,no ca me siyāti ‘‘aha’’nti kira koci no cassaṃ, ‘‘me’’ti ca kiñci no siyāti. Tāsappatīkāradassanañhetaṃ.
243 “至此”是指从“这样说时”等开始,或者依着提问的脉络而展开的“诸比丘,有这六种见处”等经文。那也是先显示在内蕴坏灭时恐惧的人,再显示不恐惧的人,因此对于恐惧的人来说,虽然显示空性并不能直接成办他的利益,但仍然就是显示空性,基于这些而说“四边的空性已经宣说”。外在的资具是指外在有认知的与无认知的有情资具,因为它以活命资具的意义而成为资具。起了执取,就是由于执取“这是我的”而称为摄受。一切见执都以“我是常、坚固、常住”或“我断灭、坏灭”这样的有身见为所依,所以说“以有身见为首的六十二见”。因为不如实的执取是执取与施设的支撑,而见本身就是所依,所以叫“见所依”。“可执取”就是结合常等殊胜相而执取。怎么能这样执取呢?在“诸比丘,你们可执取那我想取,可依止那见所依”等处,也是这个意思。巴利
243.Ettāvatāti ‘‘evaṃ vutte’’tiādinā, pucchānusandhivasena pavattāya ‘‘chayimāni, bhikkhave, diṭṭhiṭṭhānānī’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.241) vā. Sāpi hi ajjhattakhandhavināse paritassanakaṃ dassetvā aparitassanakaṃ dassentī pavattāti tassanakassa suññatādassanaṃ akiccasādhakampi suññatādassanamevāti imesaṃ vasena ‘‘catukkoṭikā suññatā kathitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Bahiddhā parikkhāranti bāhiraṃ saviññāṇakaṃ aviññāṇakañca sattopakaraṇaṃ. Tañhi jīvitavuttiyā parikkhārakaṭṭhena ‘‘parikkhāro’’ti vuttaṃ. Pariggahaṃ nāma katvāti ‘‘mama ida’’nti pariggahetabbatāya pariggahitaṃ nāma katvā. Sabbopi diṭṭhiggāho ‘‘attā nicco dhuvo sassato, attā ucchijjati vinassatī’’tiādinā attadiṭṭhisannissayoyevāti vuttaṃ ‘‘sakkāyadiṭṭhipamukhā dvāsaṭṭhidiṭṭhiyo’’ti. Ayāthāvaggāhinā abhinivesanapaññāpanānaṃ upatthambhabhāvato diṭṭhi eva nissayoti diṭṭhinissayo. Pariggaṇheyyāti niccādivisesayuttaṃ katvā pariggaṇheyya. Kimevaṃ pariggahetuṃ sakkuṇeyya ? Sabbatthāti ‘‘taṃ, bhikkhave, attavādupādānaṃ upādiyetha, taṃ, bhikkhave, diṭṭhinissayaṃ nissayethā’’ti etesupi.
244 如果有一个“我”,能因为属于自己而被叫作“我的”,那么当这样的“我”存在时——然而那个“我”在胜义上根本不存在,这才是这里的意旨。难道可以把外道设想出来的“我”说成是“胜义”吗?五蕴因为是可知之法的自性,就像瓶一样,如果除此之外还有另一个所谓的“我”,那它难道不会必然与五蕴相违吗?然而那个“我”在胜义上并不存在,因为用正量去寻求也找不到,就像兔角一样。或者当属于我的资具存在时,也就是当某个事物被决定为“这名为属于自己所有”,以彼为“有属我之物”的状态而存在时。所谓“自己的这个”,就是“属于我的”。当“我”存在时,即在“我名为如此”的、作为我执之境的、胜义上已确定其自相的任何事物存在时,以彼为属于自己所有的状态,取“我的”某物才应合理。当“我的”存在时,在这里“我”也是如此道理。这样,由于在胜义上找不到“我”,所以“属于我的”任何事物在胜义上也根本不存在,从而显示了一切行法的无我性,以及由无我性而显示无我所造作。真实者,即真实之义;如性者,即如是之自性;坚固者,即住立之自性、无变异。巴利
244.Attani vā satīti yassa attano santakabhāvena kiñci attaniyanti vucceyya, tasmiṃ attani sati, so eva pana attā paramatthato natthīti adhippāyo. Sakkā hi vattuṃ bāhirakaparikappito attā ‘‘paramattho’’ti? Siyā khandhapañcakaṃ ñeyyasabhāvattā yathā taṃ ghaṭo, yadi pana tadaññaṃ nāma kiñci abhavissa, na taṃ niyamato viparītaṃ siyāti? Na ca so paramatthato atthi pamāṇehi anupalabbhamānattā turaṅgamavisāṇaṃ viyāti. Attaniye vā parikkhāre satīti ‘‘idaṃ nāma attano santaka’’nti tassa kiñcanabhāvena nicchite kismiñci vatthusmiṃ sati. Attano idanti hi attaniyanti. Ahanti satīti ‘‘ahaṃ nāmāya’’nti ahaṃkāravatthubhūte paramatthato niddhāritasarūpe kismiñci sati tassa santakabhāvena mamāti kiñci gahetuṃ yuttaṃ bhaveyya. Mamāti sati ‘‘aha’’nti etthāpi eseva nayo. Iti paramatthato attano anupalabbhamānattā attaniyaṃ kiñci paramatthato natthevāti sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ anattatāya anattaniyataṃ, anattaniyatāya ca anattakataṃ dasseti. Bhūtatoti bhūtatthato. Tathatoti tathasabhāvato. Thiratoti ṭhitasabhāvato nibbikārato.
因为“有了之后又不存在”:因为先前并不存在,依靠各种条件和合而生起,生起之后又随着坏灭而消失,所以它不是恒常的,也就是无常,意思是不稳固。正因如此,它才以生起和坏灭的方式持续运转,也就是依着生起和灭去而流转。自性的丧失,在这里就叫变易;刹那性就是暂时性;恒常自性的不存在,本身就是对恒常的否定。因为无常的事物,确实就是以其自身的无常性,在实义上否定了恒常。正如所说的“不是恒常的,就是无常”。由于生、老、坏灭的不断逼迫,色法被持续压迫,所以以这种压迫的方式说它有苦性。热恼,就是以苦苦等方式令其灼烧、煎熬,因此它难以忍受,所以是苦。由于它是三种苦和轮回之苦的依托处,所以是苦的所依。乐的自性不存在,本身就是对乐的否定。“变易法”,是指其自性会因老和死而变易。因为这种色法依靠条件和合而生起,生起之后必然走向老、坏,坏灭之后就只是坏灭,没有任何迁移到别处的情形——为了通过“没有迁移到别的存在”这一点来显示它的变易法性,所以说“没有转生到别的存在、趣向别的存在的自性”。本性的舍弃,就是自性的丧失,也就是坏灭。如此,色法是无常、苦、变易法。用“尊者,这确实不是”这句话,是通过否定色法可以成为渴爱等执取的依托处。因为已经生起的色法,无法让它停住;已经停住的,无法让它不老;已经衰老的,无法让它不坏;对于生起和坏灭,无法让它不疲苦,因此这里没有任何人的自在力,而这种不随自在而转的状态,正是无我随观的理由,所以说“以不随自在而转的方式,了知色法是无我的”。由于缺乏居住者、造作者、受者、主宰者,所以从这一点说它是空,这是空之义;没有属于主人的任何人,这是无主之义;如前所说的没有自在转起的状态,这是无自在之义;被他人所构想的自我自性不存在,本身就是否定我之义。巴利
Yasmā hutvā na hotīti yasmā pubbe asantaṃ paccayasamavāyena hutvā uppajjitvā puna bhaṅgupagamena na hoti, tasmā na niccanti aniccaṃ, adhuvanti attho. Tato eva uppādavayavattitoti uppajjanavasena nirujjhanavasena ca pavattanato. Sabhāvavigamo idha vipariṇāmo, khaṇikatā tāvakālikatā, niccasabhāvābhāvo eva niccapaṭikkhepo. Aniccadhammā hi teneva attano aniccabhāvena atthato niccataṃ paṭikkhipanti nāma. Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘na niccanti anicca’’nti. Uppādajarābhaṅgavasena rūpassa nirantarabādhatāti paṭipīḷanākārenassa dukkhatā. Santāpo dukkhadukkhatādivasena santāpanaṃ paridahanaṃ, tato evassa dussahatāya dukkhamatā. Tissannaṃ dukkhatānaṃ saṃsāradukkhassa ca adhiṭṭhānatāya dukkhavatthukatā. Sukhasabhāvābhāvo eva sukhapaṭikkhepo. Vipariṇāmadhammanti jarāya maraṇena ca vipariṇamanasabhāvaṃ. Yasmā idaṃ rūpaṃ paccayasamavāyena uppādaṃ, uppādānantaraṃ jaraṃ patvā avassameva bhijjati, bhinnañca bhinnameva, nāssa kassaci saṅkamoti bhavantarānupagamanasaṅkhātena saṅkamābhāvena vipariṇāmadhammataṃ pākaṭaṃ kātuṃ ‘‘bhavasaṅkanti upagamanasabhāva’’nti vuttaṃ. Pakatibhāvavijahanaṃ sabhāvavigamo nirujjhanameva. Nti aniccaṃ dukkhaṃ vipariṇāmadhammaṃ rūpaṃ. Imināti ‘‘no hetaṃ, bhante’’ti rūpassa taṇhādiggāhānaṃ vatthubhāvapaṭikkhepena. Rūpañhi uppannaṃ ṭhitiṃ mā pāpuṇātu, ṭhitippattaṃ mā jīratu, jarappattaṃ mā bhijjatu, udayabbayehi mā kilamiyatūti na ettha kassaci vasībhāvo atthi, svāyamassa avasavattanaṭṭho anattatāsallakkhaṇassa kāraṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘avasavattanākārena rūpaṃ, bhante, anattāti paṭijānantī’’ti. Nivāsikārakavedakaadhiṭṭhāyakavirahena tato suññatā suññaṭṭho, sāmibhūtassa kassaci abhāvo assāmikaṭṭho, yathāvuttavasavattibhāvābhāvo anissaraṭṭho, paraparikappitaattasabhāvābhāvo eva attapaṭikkhepaṭṭho.
因为无常相容易让人理解苦相,而通过这两者——无常和苦——就更容易让人明白无我相。不仅如此,所以在这里正是以这两者来阐明无我相。为了说明这一点,世尊才说了“世尊确实……”等话。其中,“以无常”是指依无常性;“以苦”是指依苦性;“不适用”是指不相应。为了显示这种不相应的道理,才说了“眼的生起……”等话。因为主张有“我”的人把“我”设定为常恒的,然而眼却是无常的,所以就像眼是无常的一样,“我”也就成了无常。因此说了“若有人……”等话。其中,“舍去”是指消失、坏灭。因此,“眼是无我”:由于眼有生灭,所以是无常;而主张有“我”的人并不认同这种无常,所以眼是无我。巴利
Yasmā aniccalakkhaṇena viya dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ, tadubhayena anattalakkhaṇaṃ suviññāpayaṃ, na kevalaṃ, tasmā tadubhayenettha anattalakkhaṇavibhāvanaṃ katanti dassento ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādimāha. Tattha aniccavasenāti aniccatāvasena. Dukkhavasenāti dukkhatāvasena. Na upapajjatīti na yujjati. Tameva ayujjamānataṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘cakkhussa uppādopī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yasmā attavādī attānaṃ niccaṃ paññapeti, cakkhuṃ pana aniccaṃ, tasmā cakkhu viya attāpi anicco āpanno. Tenāha ‘‘yassa kho panā’’tiādi. Tattha vetīti vigacchati nirujjhati. Iti cakkhu anattāti cakkhussa udayabbayavantatāya aniccatā, attano ca attavādinā aniccatāya anicchitattā cakkhu anattā.
虽然在《无我相经》里说“比丘们,因为色是无我,所以色会带来病患”,这话看起来像是在用色的无我性来显示苦性,但实际上,是通过“色会带来病患,所以是无我”这个显而易见的道理,来显示色具有病患性、没有“我”的实质。也正是因此,才说“对于色,不能要求‘让我的色变成这样,让我的色不要变成那样’”,这就显示出对色没有任何自主支配的能力,以及它不能随自己意愿而转的特性。所以论中说“是以苦来显示无我性”。
“凡是无常的,那就是苦”:意思是,凡是无常的事物就是苦,因为它被生灭所逼迫;而凡是常恒的,因为没有这种逼迫,就是乐,就像涅槃那样。这是这段话的意旨所在。
“凡是那”这一句,是在说明原因,意思是“因为色是无常的,所以它是那样”。“凡是苦的,那就是无我”这一句,应当按前面所说的道理来理解。
“无常”这个词,是用来说色如同瓶等事物一样,是因缘所生,所以是无常。按照这个道理,虽然可以说它是“无我”,但实际上并没有什么可以被称为“我”的东西。同样,说“是苦”等等,也应当根据具体情况来说明,比如“就像眼痛等各种病变出现的时候,因为色是因缘所生,所以是苦”等等。这是很难见到的,也很难让人理解。正因为如此,像萨罗邦伽等大师们也没能见到,更不用说向别人说明了。这就是无我相。巴利
Kāmaṃ anattalakkhaṇasutte (saṃ. ni. 3.59; mahāva. 20) – ‘‘yasmā ca kho, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ anattā, tasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattatī’’ti rūpassa anattatāya dukkhatā vibhāvitā viya dissati, tathāpi ‘‘yasmā rūpaṃ ābādhāya saṃvattati, tasmā anattā’’ti pākaṭatāya sābādhatāya rūpassa attasārābhāvo vibhāvito, tato eva ca ‘‘na labbhati rūpe evaṃ me rūpaṃ hotu, evaṃ me rūpaṃ mā ahosī’’ti rūpe kassaci anissaratā, tassa ca avasavattanākāro dassitoti āha ‘‘dukkhavasena anattataṃdassetī’’ti. Yadaniccaṃ taṃ dukkhanti yaṃ vatthu aniccaṃ, taṃ dukkhaṃ udayabbayapaṭipīḷitattā, yaṃ pana niccaṃ tadabhāvato, taṃ sukhaṃ yathā taṃ nibbānanti adhippāyo. Yaṃ tanti kāraṇaniddesovāyaṃ, yasmā rūpaṃ aniccaṃ, taṃ tasmāti attho. Yaṃ dukkhaṃ tadanattāti ettha vuttanayeneva attho veditabbo. Aniccanti iminā ghaṭādi viya paccayuppannattā rūpaṃ aniccanti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Imināva nayena ‘‘anattā’’ti vattuṃ labbhamānepi ‘‘anattā’’ti vattā nāma natthi. Evaṃ dukkhanti vadantīti etthāpi yathārahaṃ vattabbaṃ ‘‘akkhisūlādivikārappattakāle viya paccayuppannattā dukkhaṃ rūpa’’ntiādinā. Duddasaṃ duppaññāpanaṃ. Tathā hi sarabhaṅgādayopi satthāro nāddasaṃsu, kuto paññāpanā. Tayidaṃ anattalakkhaṇaṃ.
所以,以“tasmātiha”等语开头的那段话,是把三相当作三世色法来安立之后才说的,因此论师说“现在或其他时候也一样”。不过,那种色无论是什么样子,都同样如前所说,所以也应该说明内色等的区别。或者,通过“pi”这个字,也可以理解为连那种色也包括在内。巴利
Tasmātihātiādinā tiyaddhagatarūpaṃ lakkhaṇattayaṃ āropetvā vuttanti āha ‘‘etarahi aññadāpī’’ti. Taṃ pana yādisaṃ tādisampi tathā vuttanti ajjhattādivisesopi vattabbo. Pi-saddena vā tassāpi saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo.
245 “Ukkaṇṭhatī”的意思是心不喜乐、不安住。在别的地方,“nibbidā”(厌离)指的是强有力的观,而与它随顺的“行舍智”则称为“出起观”。那么,这里它怎么就成了厌离呢?所以论师说“由出起观的……”等等。这是要表明:因为已经达到了厌离的极致,所以在这里把出起观称为厌离。巴利
245.Ukkaṇṭhatīti nābhiramati. Aññattha ‘‘nibbidā’’ti balavavipassanā vuccati, sānulomā pana saṅkhārupekkhā ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminī’’ti, sā idha kathaṃ nibbidā nāma jātāti āha ‘‘vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya hī’’tiādi. Iminā sikhāpattanibbedatāya vuṭṭhānagāminī idha nibbidānāmena vuttāti dasseti.
“他次第触达想之顶”这句话说完之后,因为经中又说“布吒婆楼,想先产生,智在后”,所以“想顶”是就世间断想已经达到顶点来说的。“法住智”则是说对缘起的洞见已经达到顶点,因为从此之后就是以无为法为所缘的智了。所以经中说:“须深,法住智在先,涅槃智在后。”所谓“清净精进支”,是说证得道果的障碍,也就是一切杂染,都已清净,这是精进行者的支分,或者说是由精进修行而生起的支分,因此这样称呼。“行道智见清净”则是就已达最上位的行道智见清净来说的。“非彼所成性”在这里,“彼所成性”名为渴爱,因为在欲爱等中由彼彼所生,所以称为“彼所成”,即三地所转起者,其存在故。由于那渴爱的遍尽,出起所行的观被称为“非彼所成性”。所谓“依止”,是以那非彼所成性为缘。“来到”是那的同义词。“异类”是种种自性、众多、多种类。“异类所依”是种种所缘所依,以色等为境。“一类”是同一种自性。“一类所依”是只依一个所缘。“依止那”是以那一类所依的舍为缘。“此的”是此舍的。“断除”是从无知舍以来,舍弃一切舍而住立者的,被称为“非彼所成性”的出起所行观、无色界等至舍及观舍的断除,因此说为遍尽。对于一切行,以欲脱的审察已达顶点,所以出起所行的欲脱审察也被说为欲脱审察。以软弱、中等等形态只是转起的行相,义上是一义,欲脱等只是文异。“以二名”是种姓、清净,以这二名。巴利
‘‘So anupubbena saññaggaṃ phusatī’’ti (dī. ni. 1.414, 415) vatvā ‘‘saññā kho poṭṭhapāda paṭhamaṃ uppajjati, pacchā ñāṇa’’nti (dī. ni. 1.416) vuttattā saññagganti vuttā lokiyāsu pahānasaññāsu sikhāpattabhāvato. Dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇanti vuttā idappaccayatādassanassa matthakappattīti katvā. Tato parañhi asaṅkhatārammaṇaṃ ñāṇaṃ hoti. Tenāha – ‘‘pubbe kho susima dhammaṭṭhitiñāṇaṃ, pacchā nibbāne ñāṇa’’nti (saṃ. ni. 2.70). Pārisuddhipadhāniyaṅganti vuttā maggādhigamassa paripanthabhūtasabbasaṃkilesavisuddhi padhānikassa yogino, padhānabhāvanāya vā jātaṃ aṅganti katvā. Paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhīti vuttā paramukkaṃsagatapaṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhibhāvato. Atammayatanti ettha tammayatā nāma taṇhā, kāmataṇhādīsu tāya tāya nibbattattā tammayaṃ nāma tebhūmikappavattaṃ, tassa bhāvoti katvā. Tassā taṇhāya pariyādānato vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanā atammayatāti vuccati. Nissāyāti taṃ atammayataṃ paccayaṃ katvā. Āgammāti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Nānattāti nānāsabhāvā bahū anekappakārā. Nānattasitāti nānārammaṇanissitā rūpādivisayā. Ekattāti ekasabhāvā. Ekattasitāti ekaṃyeva ārammaṇaṃ nissitā. Taṃ nissāyāti taṃ ekattasitaṃ upekkhaṃ paccayaṃ katvā. Etissāti etissā upekkhāya. Pahānaṃ hotīti aññāṇupekkhato pabhuti sabbaṃ upekkhaṃ pajahitvā ṭhitassa ‘‘atammayatā’’ti vuttāya vuṭṭhānagāminivipassanāya arūpāvacarasamāpattiupekkhāya vipassanupekkhāya ca pahānaṃ hotīti pariyādānanti vuttāti. Sabbasaṅkhāragatassa muñcitukamyatāpaṭisaṅkhānassa sikhāpattabhāvato vuṭṭhānagāminī muñcitukamyatā paṭisaṅkhānanti ca vuttā. Mudumajjhādivasena pavattiākāramattaṃ, atthato ekatthā muñcitukamyatādayo, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Dvīhi nāmehīti gotrabhu, vodānanti imehi dvīhi nāmehi.
离贪就是道。因为正是通过它才彻底离贪,所以叫离贪,也就是通过这个道。以道作为因,心就解脱了。这是依寂止解脱的方式而解脱。因此说,果已经被开示了。巴利
Virāgoti maggo, accantameva virajjati etenāti virāgo, tena. Maggena hetubhūtena. Vimuccatīti paṭippassaddhivimuttivasena vimuccati. Tenāha ‘‘phalaṃ kathita’’nti.
“大漏尽者”是一句称赞的话,就像称呼“大王”一样。同样地,导师在称赞他时确实说过:“比丘们,这位比丘被称为已拔除门闩者”等等。为了阐明这个意思,才说了“现在对此……”等话。“如实”就是指按照真实的样子存在。“难以拔除”的意思是说,普通大众无法把它拔掉。它像门闩一样阻挡人进入涅槃之城,所以叫“门闩”。就像截断头部的多罗树不再长出叶子、果实等,也像吉祥草被称为“sivā”一样。因此说“像截断头部的多罗树那样”。能造出后有,或者以后有为果报,所以叫“后有者”。这样的状态还能给出后有,因此说“给与后有者”。“后有蕴的缘”,这是用果的名称来说因,表明因就是生和轮回。“周围”是指围绕相续。“散乱”是指完全散乱、彻底毁坏。“深入”是指深深进入。“拔除”就是连根拔起。“这些”是指欲贪结缚等。“门闩”是以遮止、确定之义而称为门闩。以最上道而倒下的慢幢属于此人,所以叫“慢幢已倒者”。由于其余负担的放下已由前面的词句说明,所以说“应理解为只是慢的负担已放下,故名负担已放下者”。由于只是与慢相应而得以脱离,这里也是同样的道理。以五种蕴不加分别地执取“我”而转起者,被称为“我慢”,所以说“于色计有我慢”等。巴利
Mahākhīṇāsavoti pasaṃsāvacanaṃ yathā ‘‘mahārājā’’ti. Tathā hi taṃ pasaṃsanto satthā ‘‘ayaṃ vuccati, bhikkhave, bhikkhu ukkhittapaligho itipī’’tiādimāhāti. Tadatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘idāni tassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Yathābhūtehīti yāthāvato bhūtehi. Durukkhipanaṭṭhenāti pacurajanehi ukkhipituṃ asakkuṇeyyabhāvena. Nibbānanagarappavese vibandhanena paligho viyāti palighoti vuccati. Matthakacchinno tālo pattaphalādīnaṃ anaṅgato tālāvatthu asive ‘‘sivā’’ti samaññā viya. Tenāha ‘‘sīsacchinnatālo viya katā’’ti. Punabbhavassa karaṇasīlo, punabbhavaṃ vā phalaṃ arahatīti ponobhaviko. Evaṃbhūto pana punabbhavaṃ deti nāmāti āha ‘‘punabbhavadāyako’’ti. Punabbhavakhandhānaṃ paccayoti iminā jātisaṃsāroti phalūpacārena kāraṇaṃ vuttanti dasseti. Parikkhāti vuccati santānassa parikkhipanato. Saṃkiṇṇattāti sabbaso kiṇṇattā vināsitattā. Gabbhīrānugataṭṭhenāti gambhīraṃ anupaviṭṭhaṭṭhena. Luñcitvāti uddharitvā. Etānīti kāmarāgasaññojanādīni. Aggaḷāti vuccanti avadhāraṇaṭṭhena. Aggamaggena patito mānaddhajo etassāti patitamānaddhajo. Itarabhāroropanassa purimapadehi pakāsitattā ‘‘mānabhārasseva oropitattā pannabhāroti adhippeto’’ti vuttaṃ. Mānasaṃyogeneva visaṃyuttattāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pañcapi khandhe avisesato asmīti gahetvā pavattamāno ‘‘asmimāno’’ti adhippetoti vuttaṃ ‘‘rūpe asmīti māno’’tiādi.
为了挡住城门的危险,也为了让它好看,人们在城门两边把立柱埋进地里立起来,所以说“在城门竖立起立柱”。拆毁城墙本身,就能把护城河填平、把地面整平,所以说“拆毁城墙,填平护城河”。“这样……”等话,是把譬喻和所喻对应起来。“有身”就是存在着的身体,是诸法的集合体,也就是五取蕴。三十二种业所生的身,归在苦聚里。眼病、头病等九十八种病。王难等二十五种大怖畏。巴利
Nagaradvārassa parissayapaṭibāhanatthañceva sobhanatthañca ubhosu passesu esikatthambhe nikhaṇitvā ṭhapentīti āha ‘‘nagaradvāre ussāpite esikatthambhe’’ti. Pākāraviddhaṃsaneneva parikkhāya bhūmisamakaraṇaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘pākāraṃ bhindanto parikkhaṃ saṃkiritvā’’ti. Evantiādi upamāsaṃsandanaṃ. Santo saṃvijjamāno kāyo dhammasamūhoti sakkāyo, upādānakkhandhapañcakaṃ. Dvattiṃsa kammakāraṇā dukkhakkhandhe āgatā. Akkhirogasīsarogādayo aṭṭhanavuti rogā. Rājabhayādīni pañcavīsati mahābhayāni.
246 难以了知的心,是指这样难以了知的心性:这个心依靠什么、以什么方式生起。anvesanti 是反身语态的单数动词,所以注释说 anvesanto,即正在探寻者。有情也可以称为如来,就像如来死后等经文里的用法一样。因为某一个有情由业和烦恼而来到这样的状态,另一个有情也同样来到,所以称为如来。最上士则是指世尊。任何一位漏尽者也被认为是如来。因为就像某一位以善住于四念处的心,如实修习七觉支,而到达、证得无上阿罗汉果,另一位也同样到达、证得,所以称为如来。不存在,是指在究竟意义上不可得。不可寻得,是指不应被寻得,意思是难以了知。巴利
246.Anadhigamanīyaviññāṇatanti ‘‘idaṃ nāma nissāya iminā nāma ākārena pavattatī’’ti evaṃ duviññeyyacittataṃ. Anvesanti paccatte ekavacananti āha ‘‘anvesanto’’ti. Sattopi tathāgatoti vuccati ‘‘tathāgato paraṃ maraṇā’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.65) viya. Satto hi yatheko kammakilesehi itthattaṃ āgato, tathā aparopi āgatoti ‘‘tathāgato’’ti vuccati. Uttamapuggaloti bhagavantaṃ sandhāya vadati. Khīṇāsavopīti yo koci khīṇāsavopi ‘‘tathāgato’’ti adhippeto. Sopi hi yatheko catūsu satipaṭṭhānesu sūpaṭṭhitacitto satta bojjhaṅge yathābhūtaṃ bhāvetvā anuttaraṃ arahattaṃ āgato adhigato, tathā aparopi āgatoti ‘‘tathāgato’’ti vuccati. Asaṃvijjamānoti paramatthato anupalabbhanīyo. Avindeyyoti na vinditabbo, duviññeyyoti attho.
我不把如来施设为“有情”或“人”,因为从究竟真理的角度看,有情根本不存在,这就是我的意思。那我还能施设什么呢?因为连施设所依赖的那个看似持续存在的东西也不存在。或者,这里说的是以“不生起是安稳,不再生是安稳”等方式,通过趣入无为界而生起的、属于最高果等至的观智心。巴利
Tathāgato satto puggaloti na paññapemi paramatthato sattasseva abhāvatoti adhippāyo. Kiṃ paññapessāmi paññattiupādānassapi dharamānakassa abhāvato. ‘‘Anuppādo khemaṃ, anuppatti khema’’ntiādinā asaṅkhatāya dhātuyā pakkhandhanavasena pavattaṃ aggaphalasamāpattiatthaṃ vipassanācittaṃ vā.
“空”这个词是具格形式,所以用“以空”来表达。能调伏,就是律;他本身就是能调伏者。“如实的我”,就是指如实存在的我。如果对在究竟意义上真实存在的有情说其不存在,那或许可以被称为宣说有情毁灭的人。但我是在说那个在究竟意义上并不存在的东西为“不存在”。而且,世间怎么表达,我也同样那么表达。那些沙门婆罗门说“能调伏的沙门乔达摩是断灭论者”,他们是在用不真实的、空洞的、虚假的东西来诽谤如实的我——应当这样连接理解。对于不再结生的漏尽者,他最后的心因为没有执取,就像不再执取燃料的火一样,般涅槃后无法被指认为“依这个”而辨识;这样说的人,怎么会是断灭论者呢?我从来不说“有我”,也从来不说“有任何人”。既然如此,那些愚人凭什么说“他宣说存在的有情的断灭、破坏、消失”,而用不真实的……来诽谤我呢?这就是这里的要义。巴利
Tucchāti karaṇe nissakkavacananti āha ‘‘tucchakenā’’ti. Vinayatīti vinayo, so eva venayiko. Tathā manti tathābhūtaṃ maṃ. Paramatthato vijjamānassa hi sattassa abhāvaṃ vadanto sattavināsapaññāpako ca nāma siyā, ahaṃ pana paramatthato avijjamānaṃ taṃ ‘‘natthī’’ti vadāmi. Yathā ca loko voharati, tatheva taṃ voharāmi, tathābhūtaṃ maṃ ye samaṇabrāhmaṇā ‘‘venayiko samaṇo gotamo’’ti vadantā asatā tucchā musā abhūtena abbhācikkhantīti yojanā. Appaṭisandhikassa khīṇāsavassa carimacittaṃ nirupādānato anupādāno viya jātavedo parinibbutaṃ idaṃ nāma nissitanti na paññāyatīti vadanto kimettāvatā ucchedavādī bhaveyya, nāhaṃ kadācipi atthi, nāpi koci atthīti vadāmi. Evaṃ sante kiṃ nissāya te moghapurisā sato sattassa nāma ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapetīti vadantā asatā…pe… abbhācikkhantīti ayamettha adhippāyo.
“在大菩提座”这里,用“菩提座”这个说法,指的是七个七天,也就是说明他在转法轮之前所说的那套教法。“我只施设四圣谛”这句话,是用来说明:离开了圣谛,就没有什么师长的教法了。在这里,世尊说“无论过去还是现在,我都只施设苦和苦的灭”,这样说的时候,他从来没有说过“自我断灭、毁坏”,也没有说过“存在某个所谓的我”。既然这样,那些愚人凭什么说“他施设众生的断灭、破坏、消失”,用根本不存在的、空洞的话来诽谤呢?这段话就是为了指出这一点。“其他人”,指的是没有我所执的人,是不能领受我教诫的人,所以说“不能胜解……圣谛的人们”。“以意欲”这个说法,是在表示那只是他们自己的意欲;而忿怒和害心对如来来说,就像在空中画画一样,根本不可能发生。“撞击心”就是嗔。“他们因此不满足”,所以叫“不满”。“不让心欢喜”,所以叫“不喜”。“不乐”,是乐的反面,是那样生起的心,或者就是忿怒本身。巴利
Mahābodhimaṇḍamhīti bodhimaṇḍaggahaṇena sattasattāhamāha. Tena dhammacakkapavattanato (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) pubbe vuttaṃ tantidesanaṃ vadati . Catusaccameva paññapemīti etena saccavimuttā satthudesanā natthīti dasseti. Ettha ca – ‘‘pubbe ceva etarahi ca dukkhañceva paññapemi dukkhassa ca nirodha’’nti vadanto bhagavā nāhaṃ kadācipi ‘‘attā ucchijjati, vinassatī’’ti vā, ‘‘attā nāma koci atthī’’ti vā vadāmi. Evaṃ sante kiṃ nissāya te moghapurisā ‘‘sato sattassa ucchedaṃ vināsaṃ vibhavaṃ paññapetī’’ti asatā tucchena abbhācikkhantīti dasseti. Pareti amāmakā, mama ovādassa abhājanabhūtāti atthoti āha ‘‘saccāni…pe… asamatthapuggalā’’ti. Adhippāyenāti iminā tesaṃ adhippāyamattaṃ, rosanavihesanāni pana tathāgatassa ākāsassa vilikhanaṃ viya na sambhavantiyevāti dasseti. Āhanati cittanti āghāto. Appatītā honti etenāti appaccayo. Cittaṃ na abhirādhayatīti anabhiraddhi. Atuṭṭhīti tuṭṭhipaṭipakkho tathāpavatto cittuppādo, kodho eva vā.
另有一些人认为:“喜”(ānanda)就是通过它而欢喜、雀跃,所以叫喜,这其实就是“喜”(pīti)的别名。“喜悦”(somanassa)是心的美好状态,是心所乐的别名。“兴奋”(uppila)是因为先前的情况而兴奋、被打破,进入一种特殊状态,所以叫兴奋;这种状态本身就是“被兴奋”,它的性质就是“兴奋性”。当它生起时,身心就像被风吹胀的食物一样,呈现出膨胀的状态,这是执著于在家生活、极其热烈的喜的别名。他们没有能力证悟诸谛,不能这样了知:只有苦生起、只有苦灭尽,并没有所谓别的有情存在。他们怀着“有我存在”的见解,是没有断除颠倒的人。连最值得净信的如来他们都要辱骂,更何况是比丘们呢——这就是其意图所在。巴利
Pareti aññe ekacce. Ānandanti pamodanti etenāti ānando, pītiyā evetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Sobhanamanatā somanassaṃ, cetasikasukhassetaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Uppilati purimāvatthāya bhijjati visesaṃ āpajjatīti uppilaṃ, tadeva uppilāvitaṃ, tassa bhāvo uppilāvitattaṃ. Yāya uppannāya kāyacittaṃ vātapūritabhattā viya uddhumāyanākārappattaṃ hoti, tassā gehassitāya odaggiyapītiyā etaṃ adhivacanaṃ. Saccāni paṭivijjhituṃ asamatthāti dukkhameva uppajjati nirujjhati ca, na añño satto nāma atthīti evaṃ jānituṃ asamatthā ‘‘attā nāma atthī’’ti evaṃdiṭṭhino appahīnavipallāsā. Uttamaṃ pasādanīyaṭṭhānaṃ tathāgatampi akkosanti, kimaṅgaṃ pana bhikkhūti adhippāyo.
247 对于并非“我所有”的五蕴组合,要以错误执取的方式,断除由“我所有”想所引生的欲贪。所谓“不是我们的我”,是因为色、受等本身就是执取“我”的依托处,而脱离了这些,并没有可供贪染的对象。那些草、木、枝、叶,不是我们的色,也不是我们的识,所以说“不是我们的我”——应当这样结合起来理解。由于已经否定了内在依托处的“不是我们的我”,外在的依托处也就以“我所有”的性质被否定了,因此说“我们的衣等资具也不成为我所有”。接着,“只是五蕴组合”:以外在的依托处作为例子,让他断除“这五蕴组合本身也不是你们的”这种执着。不是像连根拔起的球茎那样,也不是像硬拔下来的头发那样。以这种方式,他们主张通过名义上的方式来断除对色等的执着。他以“欲贪的调伏”令所标示的意义得以断除——这是从具体形态上显示出来的。巴利
247. Anattaniyepi khandhapañcake micchāgāhavasena attaniyasaññāya pavattassa chandarāgassa pahānaṃ. Amhākaṃ neva attāti yasmā rūpavedanādiyeva attaggāhavatthu tabbinimuttassa lobhaneyyassa abhāvato. Etaṃ tiṇakaṭṭhasākhāpalāsaṃ na amhākaṃ rūpaṃ, na viññāṇaṃ, tasmā amhākaṃ neva attāti yojanā. Ajjhattikassa vatthuno neva attāti paṭikkhittattā bāhiravatthu attaniyabhāvena paṭikkhittaṃ hotīti āha ‘‘amhākaṃ cīvarādiparikkhāropi na hotī’’ti. Khandhapañcakaṃyevāti bāhiravatthuṃ nidassanaṃ katvā khandhapañcakaṃyeva na tumhākanti pajahāpeti. Na uppāṭetvā kandaṃ viya. Na luñcitvā vā kese viyāti. Iminā rūpādīnaṃ nāmamukhena pahānaṃ icchanti. Ulliṅgitamatthaṃ chandarāgavinayena pajahāpetīti sarūpato dasseti.
248 248. “比丘们,你们怎么想,色是常还是无常?”这一段开示有三重转起。所谓“直到这个地方”,是指直到“是善说的”这一句经文为止。虽然因为容易理解而宣说,但仍是“善说的”,所以说“因为是善说的,所以是明显的、敞开的、被阐明的”。横向撕开、纵向剖开,因此到处缝补打结的旧布,就是“碎布”。因为不存在那种情况,所以是“已断碎布”,意思是不带碎布。此处的威仪、安立,以及不存在的禅那与观,对于已断除、不存在的行道来说,就像缝补和打结一样,但这里并没有那样的情况,所以说“这里没有……存在”。“无法安住”:即使通过与清净者共住的方式也无法安住;若从证得殊胜来说,那更是不用谈了。巴利
248. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, rūpaṃ niccaṃ vā’’tiādi desanā tiparivaṭṭaṃ. Yāva imaṃ ṭhānanti ‘‘evaṃ svākkhāto’’ti yāvāyaṃ pāḷipadeso. Suviññeyyabhāvena akkhātattāpi svākkhātoti āha ‘‘sukathitattā eva uttāno vivaṭo pakāsito’’ti. Tiriyaṃ vidāraṇena chinnaṃ, dīghaso phālanena bhinnaṃ, tato eva tattha tattha sibbitagaṇṭhikatajiṇṇavatthaṃ pilotikā, tadabhāvato chinnapilotiko, pilotikarahitoti attho. Iriyāpatha-saṇṭhapanaavijjamānajhāna-vipassanāni chinnāya avijjamānāya paṭipattiyā sibbanagaṇṭhikaraṇasadisāni, tādisaṃ idha natthīti āha ‘‘na hettha…pe… atthī’’ti. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhatīti pesalehi saddhiṃ saṃvāsavasenapi patiṭṭhātuṃ na labhati, visesādhigamavasena pana vattabbameva natthi.
把那些稗子清除掉:对于因为破戒而变成垃圾一样的人,要像对待垃圾那样毫不顾惜地拿掉。把那些糠粃也丢掉:对于像混在刹帝利等众人当中、败坏混乱、像流脓的旃陀罗一样的人,要把他排挤出去、驱逐出去。这是什么缘故呢?因为僧园是为持戒的人建的,不是为破戒的人建的,正是因为这个道理。所以要把他赶走、扬弃,把那些不是沙门却冒充沙门的人清除掉。就像空谷壳里面没有实心米粒、外面带着谷壳看起来像稻谷一样,恶比丘内里没有戒,外面却凭着袈裟等资具看起来像比丘,因此被称为“稗子”,要把那些稗子赶走、抖落、清除。从究竟义上说,要把那些不是沙门、只是以形相冒充沙门的人如此清除之后……乃至……具念者。其中,“kappayavho”就是“kappetha”,意思是“做吧”。“patissatā”就是于一切处具念、正知、善于了知的人。或者说,“patissatā”就是有惭愧者,彼此互相尊重。这样,清净者与清净者共住,以见和戒的共同性而和合。由于次第成熟智慧,成为明智者。你们将为此一切苦轮作终结,达到般涅槃,这就是其义。巴利
Kāraṇḍavaṃ niddhamathāti vipannasīlatāya kacavarabhūtaṃ puggalaṃ kacavaramiva nirapekkhā apanetha. Kasambuñcāpakassathāti kasaṭabhūtañca naṃ khattiyādīnaṃ majjhagataṃ sambhinnaṃ paggharitakuṭṭhaṃ caṇḍālaṃ viya apakassatha nikkaḍḍhatha. Kiṃ kāraṇaṃ? Saṅghārāmo nāma sīlavantānaṃ kato, na dussīlānaṃ, yato etadeva. Tato palāpe vāhetha, assamaṇe samaṇamānineti yathā palāpā antosārarahitā ataṇḍulā bahi thusena vīhi viya dissanti, evaṃ pāpabhikkhū antosīlarahitāpi bahi kāsāvādiparikkhārena bhikkhū viya dissanti, tasmā ‘‘palāpā’’ti vuccanti, te palāpe vāhetha odhunātha vidhamatha. Paramatthato assamaṇe vesamattena samaṇamānine evaṃ niddhamitvāna…pe…patissatāti. Tattha kappayavhoti kappetha, karothāti vuttaṃ hoti. Patissatāti pati pati satā sampajānantā suṭṭhu pajānantā. Patissatā vā sappatissā aññamaññaṃ sagāravā. Athevaṃ suddhā suddhehi saṃvāsaṃ kappentā diṭṭhisīlasāmaññena samaggā. Anukkamena paripākagatapaññatāya nipakā. Sabbassevimassa dukkhavaṭṭassa antaṃ karissatha, parinibbānaṃ pāpuṇissathāti attho.
对他们来说,并不存在“轮回”这个概念可以表达,因为轮回的根源已经被彻底断除了。巴利
Vaṭṭaṃ tesaṃ natthi paññāpanāya sabbaso samucchinnavaṭṭamūlakattā.
随法行:就是随念法,或者有随念法的习性,所以叫随法行。随信行也应该这样理解。行道者:指正在行道的人,也包括处在入流道阶段的人。增上:就是强而有力。慧导:意思是慧在引导,或者慧引导这个人,所以叫慧导。以慧为先导:就是把慧放在前面。这样的人,就是以称为慧的法来随念、随观,所以叫随法行。信导:意思是信在引导,或者信引导这个人,所以叫信导。以信为先导:就是把信放在前面。这样的人,就是靠信来随念、随观,所以叫随信行。信量:就是以“彼世尊亦如是”等语,对佛陀善证悟的信解之量。以“量”一词遮止不动信解。爱量:就是依如前所说的随信行者所生起的喜量。有人说“润滑”。如此令观住立而安坐者:已通过聚思惟等方式开始修观的人。一信:依观随行而成就善说法的性质,由此生起唯一殊胜、崇高的信。一爱:这里也是同样的道理。如置于天界者:这是说他们的信与爱由于能导向天界而不违逆。他们说“小须陀洹”:因为已部分安住于证悟真理。其余则极易理解。巴利
Dhammaṃ anussaranti, dhammassa vā anussaraṇasīlāti dhammānusārino. Evaṃ saddhānusārinopi veditabbā. Paṭipannassāti paṭipajjamānassa, sotāpattimaggaṭṭhopi adhippeto. Adhimattanti balavaṃ. Paññāvāhīti paññaṃ vāheti, paññā vā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti paññāvāhītipi vadanti. Paññāpubbaṅgamanti paññaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo paññāsaṅkhātena dhammena sarati anussaratīti dhammānusārī. Saddhāvāhīti saddhaṃ vāheti, saddhā vā imaṃ puggalaṃ vahatīti saddhāvāhītipi vadanti. Saddhāpubbaṅgamanti saddhaṃ purecārikaṃ katvā. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ evarūpo puggalo saddhāya sarati anussaratīti saddhānusārī. Saddhāmattanti ‘‘itipi so bhagavā’’tiādinā buddhasubuddhatāya saddahanamattaṃ. Matta-saddena aveccappasādaṃ nivatteti. Pemamattanti yathāvuttasaddhānusārena uppannaṃ tuṭṭhimattaṃ. Sinehoti keci. Evaṃ vipassanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā nisinnānanti kalāpasammasanādivasena āraddhavipassanānaṃ. Ekā saddhāti vipassanānusārena svākkhātadhammatā siddhā, tato eva ekā seṭṭhā uḷārā saddhā uppajjati. Ekaṃ pemanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Sagge ṭhapitā viya hontīti tesaṃ saddhāpemānaṃ saggasaṃvattaniyatāya abyabhicārībhāvamāha. Cūḷasotāpannoti vadanti ekadesena saccānubodhe ṭhitattā. Sesaṃ suviññeyyameva.
3. 《蚁垤经》的注释巴利
3. Vammikasuttavaṇṇanā
249 爱语,就是让人感到亲切的说话方式。有智慧的人对别人说话时,会用亲爱的方式称呼对方,比如称“有啊”“天所爱”“具寿”。所以当面称呼时用“贤友”,背后提及时用“具寿”,这也是一种说话方式。因为还有大迦叶、优楼频螺迦叶等其他也叫迦叶的人,所以问“是哪位迦叶”。“国王”指憍萨罗王。“他们认出了”之后,为了展开略说的内容,就开始说“而这位……”等。“他的”指童子迦叶的,或者指所说的“认出”这件事。“做福德”指在十万劫中于天界和人间受生后,修习布施等福德。“减退时”指衰退之时。“最初”指尚是童女之时。导师让优波离尊者裁决,那件僧事正是以律仪业而使那位比丘尼得以出家并恢复健康。巴利
249.Piyavacananti piyasamudācāro. Viññujātikā hi paraṃ piyena samudācarantā ‘‘bhava’’nti vā, ‘‘devānaṃ piyo’’ti vā, ‘‘āyasmā’’ti vā samudācaranti, tasmā sammukhā sambodhanavasena ‘‘āvuso’’ti, tirokkhaṃ ‘‘āyasmā’’ti ayampi samudācāro. Mahākassapauruvelakassapādayo aññepi kassapanāmakā atthīti ‘‘katarassa kassapassā’’ti pucchanti. Raññāti kosalaraññā. ‘‘Sañjāniṃsū’’ti saṅkhepato vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘ayaṃ panā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Assāti kumārakassapassa, ‘‘sañjāniṃsū’’ti vuttasañjānanassa vā. Puññāni karontoti kappasatasahassaṃ devesu ca manussesu ca nibbattitvā dānādīni puññāni bhāvento. Osakkanteti parihāyamāne. Paṭhamanti kumārikākāle. Satthā upālittheraṃ paṭicchāpesi taṃ adhikaraṇaṃ vinayakammenevassā bhikkhuniyā pabbajjāya arogabhāvaṃ.
“施设的阐明”,就是对被称为“盲林”的那个地方所作的说明。“沉滞”就是萎缩、缓慢地进行。“诵者”就是音声诵者。“凡有的,就取来”:意思是如今已经没有需要再寻找的地方了,只是按照它本来的样子,凡有的就取来。“强力之德”就是殊胜的功德。在迦叶世尊的时代,因为惯用名称的言说传统未曾中断,所以即使到了现在这位佛陀出世的时代,尽管大地之上树木丛林等不断生长繁茂,那个地方仍然被称为“盲林”。“有学行道”就是能带来有学状态的清净修行。巴利
Paññattivibhāvanāti ‘‘andhavana’’ntveva paññāyamānassa vibhāvanā. Olīyatīti saṅkucati saṇikaṃ vattati. Bhāṇakoti sarabhāṇako. Yaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvāti idāni pariyesitabbaṭṭhānaṃ natthi, yathāgataṃ pana yaṃ atthi, taṃ gahetvā. Balavaguṇeti adhimattaguṇe. Kassapabhagavato kāle niruḷhasamaññāvasena vacanasantatiyā avicchedena ca imasmimpi buddhuppāde taṃ ‘‘andhavana’’ntveva paññāyittha, uparūparivaḍḍhamānāya pathaviyā upari rukkhagacchādīsu sañjāyantesupīti. Sekkhapaṭipadanti sekkhabhāvāvahaṃ visuddhipaṭipattiṃ.
“aññatara”(某个)这个词,就像能用在不明晰的事物上一样,也能用在明晰的事物上,因为它和“eka”(一)这个词意义相同。为了说明这一点,才说了“他胜知……”等话。这里在展示“abhikkanta”(殊胜)这个词的含义时,也一并涉及了“怖畏恐惧”的内容,由此作出引导:下面各处已经作过的义理解释,在随后相应的经句中,应当随宜而说。皮肤具有如金的状态,这已经被“金色”这个说法涵盖,正是基于这个意思才说“以皮肤”。不过另有一些注释师认为,这里“金色”中的“颜色”,所指的只是皮肤所摄的色界。被称赞、被称扬、被宣告的,就是“色”,即赞美。被区分得不相混杂、被确定下来的,就是“色”,即种姓。借着它,果报能被人如实知晓、如实辨明,就是“色”,即原因。以长短等形态而安立的,就是“色”,即形状。以微小、巨大等而被衡量的,就是“色”,即量度。使变化中的状态、已入心的状态得以显现的,就是“色”,即色处。如此,应当知道,“色”这个词随着各种不同的发生因由,在各自相应的意义上被使用。巴利
Aññatara-saddo apākaṭe viya pākaṭepi vattati eka-saddena samānatthattāti dassetuṃ ‘‘abhijānātī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhayabheravadassitampi abhikkanta-saddassa atthuddhāraṃ idha dassento evaṃ heṭṭhā tattha tattha katā atthasaṃvaṇṇanā parato tasmiṃ tasmiṃ suttapadese yathārahaṃ vattabbāti nayadassanaṃ karoti. Kañcanasannibhattacatā suvaṇṇavaṇṇaggahaṇena gahitāti adhippāyenāha ‘‘chaviya’’nti. Chavigatā pana vaṇṇadhātu eva ‘‘suvaṇṇavaṇṇo’’ti ettha vaṇṇaggahaṇena gahitāti apare. Vaṇṇīyati kittīyati ugghosananti vaṇṇo, thuti. Vaṇṇīyati asaṅkarato vavatthapīyatīti vaṇṇo, kulavaggo. Vaṇṇīyati phalaṃ etena yathāsabhāvato vibhāvīyatīti vaṇṇo, kāraṇaṃ. Vaṇṇanaṃ dīgharassādivasena saṇṭhahananti vaṇṇo, saṇṭhānaṃ. Vaṇṇīyati aṇumahantādivasena pamīyatīti vaṇṇo, pamāṇaṃ. Vaṇṇeti vikāramāpajjamānaṃ hadayaṅgatabhāvaṃ pakāsetīti vaṇṇo, rūpāyatanaṃ. Evaṃ tena tena pavattinimittena vaṇṇa-saddassa tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe pavatti veditabbā.
“无余性”就是完整性、全然性。关于“kevalakappā”这个词,有些人说:稍微有些不圆满的“唯”就叫“kevalakappā”。如果这样理解,那么“kevala”这个词就只具有“无余”的意思了。但是,借由并非毫无意义的“kappa”一词来扩展词形,则“kevalā”本身就是“kevalakappā”。或者,因为可以被设想、可以被施设,所以叫“kevalakappā”。“不杂性”:因有别种而不混同的无错乱、纯净性。“无超余性”:仅限于此、无差别的状态。“kevalakappaṃ”:“作为坚固的唯然”。“多数性”就是数量众多的状态。“无混杂性”:不与异类混杂、清净性。“无多余性”:仅此程度、无特殊状态。“kevalakappaṃ”的意思是“作坚固的唯”。唯被称为涅槃,因为远离一切有为法。因此说“离结等多种含义”。此唯已被证得,故为“具唯者”,即已证涅槃、漏尽者。巴利
Anavasesattaṃ sakalatā kevalatā. Kevalakappāti ettha keci īsaṃ asamattā kevalā kevalakappāti vadanti, evaṃ sati anavasesattho eva kevala-saddo siyā. Anatthantarena pana kappa-saddena padavaḍḍhanaṃ katvā kevalā eva kevalakappā. Tathā vā kappanīyattā paññapetabbattā kevalakappā. Yebhuyyatā bahulabhāvo. Abyāmissatā vijātiyena asaṅkaro suddhatā. Anatirekatā taṃmattatā visesābhāvo. Kevalakappanti kevalaṃ daḷhaṃ katvāti attho. Kevalaṃ vuccati nibbānaṃ sabbasaṅkhatavivittattā. Tenāha ‘‘visaṃyogādianekattho’’ti. Kevalaṃ etassa adhigataṃ atthīti kevalī, sacchikatanirodho khīṇāsavo.
这里的“kappa”一词,可能带前缀,也可能不带前缀;出于这个考虑,才举出在“okappanīya”(可确知)一词中能见到的“okappa”作为例子。否则,在解释“kappa”词义时,“okappanīya”这个词就根本不能拿来当例子。“samaṇakappehi”指依律成立的沙门称谓方式。“niccakappaṃ”指恒常之时。“paññatti”就是名称,那位尊者被叫的名字正是“kappa”。“kappitakesamassu”指用剪刀修剪过的须发。“dvaṅgulakappo”指过了正午时分,允许留两指长的头发。“leso”指借口。对于连无余遍满都能做到的遍光,由于某种原因,也可能只遍满一部分;然而,为了说明这光是完全遍满的,才取了“kappa”一词有“一切”之义,因此说“anavasesaṃ samantato”(无余、周遍)。巴利
Kappa-saddo panāyaṃ saupasaggo anupasaggo cāti adhippāyena okappanīyapade labbhamānaṃ okappasaddamattaṃ nidasseti, aññathā kappa-saddassa atthuddhāre okappanīyapadaṃ anidassanameva siyā. Samaṇakappehīti vinayasiddhehi samaṇavohārehi. Niccakappanti niccakālaṃ. Paññattīti nāmaṃ. Nāmañhetaṃ tassa āyasmato, yadidaṃ kappoti. Kappitakesamassūti kattarikāya cheditakesamassu. Dvaṅgulakappoti majjhanhikavelāya vītikkantāya dvaṅgulatāvikappo. Lesoti apadeso. Anavasesaṃ pharituṃ samatthassapi obhāsassa kenaci kāraṇena ekadesapharaṇampi siyā, ayaṃ pana sabbasova pharīti dassetuṃ samantattho kappa-saddo gahitoti āha ‘‘anavasesaṃ samantato’’ti.
“以沙门想而起的言行”是指:由“我是沙门”这样的想所生起的言行,或者以这种想为标记、以此为称呼。“前因缘”是指在前面讲修行因缘的那段话里。“这是障碍”是说:你们来了以后,像那样进行的招待和交谈,对我们来说就是障碍。我们连这些都不做,只修沙门之法,这才是本意。巴利
Samaṇasaññāsamudācārenāti ‘‘ahaṃ samaṇo’’ti evaṃ uppannasaññāsamuṭṭhitena samudācārena, tannimittena vā tabbohārena. Pubbayogeti pubbayogakathāyaṃ. Papañco esāti eso tumhesu āgatesu yathāpavatto paṭisanthāro kathāsamudācāro ca amhākaṃ papañco. Ettakampi akatvā samaṇadhammameva karomāti adhippāyo.
证到圣者境界,就是指已经证得不来果。这是针对薄拘娑族的善男子说的。作了分别,就是加以分析和区分。出于急促呼唤的方式,就是以急促呼叫的方式。这说明:这位沙门很难遇到,所以应当赶快为他解答问题,他也应当赶快前去问世尊,因此才急促地呼唤。而依照“yathā vā”等语句,则是出于言辞修饰的手法,呼唤了两次。他这样说,就是指他两次说道:“比丘,比丘。”巴利
Ariyabhūmiṃ pattoti anāgāmiphalaṃ adhigato. Pakkusātikulaputtaṃ sandhāya vadati. Vibhajitvāti vibhāgaṃ katvā. Turitālapanavasenāti turitaṃ ālapanavasena. Tena dullabho ayaṃ samaṇo, tasmā sīghamassa pañho kathetabbo, iminā ca sīghaṃ gantvā satthā pucchitabboti turitaṃ ālapīti dasseti. ‘‘Yathā vā’’tiādinā pana vacanālaṅkāravasena dvikkhattuṃ ālapati. Evamāhāti ‘‘bhikkhu bhikkhū’’ti evaṃ dvikkhattuṃ avoca.
天神以蚁冢这个比喻,把业生身直接摆在眼前,然后说:“这是蚁冢。”不过,因为她没有说明背后的真实含义,只是在显示字面上的意思,所以注释者才说:“站在前方……说这是……”等等。其余几句也应这样理解。“maṇḍūkaṃ”是指陆蛙,它被称为“膨胀者”,不是水蛙。为了不让它住处上方的风来扰害它,所以说“从上方风际离开”。那么,这位天神又是怎样用这种方式,把这些问题告诉长老的呢?有些注释师说:她按照所听到的内容,抓住其中的比喻性质,再凭自己的智慧在心里推想出比喻所指的含义,而且她知道世尊将会为他开示,那场开示会带来利益、幸福和安乐,于是就以“这是蚁冢”等纯粹比喻的方式,向长老讲说了十五个问题。据说,在迦叶正等正觉者住世时,波罗奈有一位长者,富有、大财、大富,他埋下了一大笔宝藏,还在那里安放了一些门闩之类的障碍物。他临死时告诉自己的朋友——一位婆罗门说:“我在这个地方埋了宝藏,等我儿子长大懂事时,你就把它指给他看。”说完就去世了。后来,那位婆罗门的儿子——也就是那位朋友的儿子——长大懂事时,婆罗门就把那个地方指给他看。他挖开以后,最后看见一条龙。那条龙看见自己的儿子后,心想“让他顺利地把财宝拿走吧”,于是就离开了。这件事在当时世上变得广为人知。而这位天神,那时生在波罗奈的一个居士家里,长大后,在导师般涅槃后,以勇猛之心在教法中出家,和五位同伴比丘一起修行沙门法。所谓“五位比丘绑好梯子”等等,就是针对他们说的。因此才说“按照所听到的内容,抓住其中的比喻性质”等等。另一些注释师则说:“天神是凭自己的智慧,把这些问题的比喻这样组织起来,然后告诉长老的。”这是就天子本身,依天子所问而说其义。巴利
Vammikapariyāyena karajakāyaṃ paccakkhaṃ katvā dassentī devatā ‘‘ayaṃ vammiko’’ti āha. Tāya pana bhāvatthassa abhāsitattā saddatthameva dassento ‘‘purato ṭhitaṃ…pe… ayanti āhā’’ti avoca. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Maṇḍūkanti thalamaṇḍūkaṃ. So hi uddhumāyikāti vuccati, na udakamaṇḍūko. Tassa nivāsato vāto mā kho bādhayitthāti ‘‘uparivātato apagammā’’ti vuttaṃ. Kathaṃ panāyaṃ devatā iminā nīhārena ime pañhe therassa ācikkhīti? Keci tāva āhu – yathāsutamatthaṃ upamābhāvena gahetvā attano paṭibhānena upameyyatthaṃ manasā cintetvā taṃ bhagavāva imassa ācikkhissati. Sā ca desanā atthāya hitāya sukhāya hotīti ‘‘ayaṃ vammiko’’tiādinā upamāvaseneva pannarasa pañhe therassa ācikkhi. Kassapasammāsambuddhakāle kira bārāṇasiyaṃ eko seṭṭhi aḍḍho mahaddhano mahantaṃ nidhānaṃ nidahitvā palighādiākārāni kānicipi laṅgāni tattha ṭhapesi. So maraṇakāle attano sahāyassa brāhmaṇassa ārocesi – ‘‘imasmiṃ ṭhāne mayā nidhānaṃ nidahitaṃ, taṃ mama puttassa viññutaṃ pattassa dassetī’’ti vatvā kālamakāsi. Brāhmaṇo sahāyakaputtassa viññutaṃ pattakāle taṃ ṭhānaṃ dassesi. So nikhanitvā sabbapacchā nāgaṃ passi, nāgo attano puttaṃ disvā ‘‘sukheneva dhanaṃ gaṇhatū’’ti apagacchi. Svāyamattho tadā loke pākaṭo jāto. Ayaṃ pana devatā tadā bārāṇasiyaṃ gahapatikule nibbattitvā viññutaṃ patto satthari parinibbute uraṃ datvā sāsane pabbajito pañcahi sahāyakabhikkhūhi saddhiṃ samaṇadhammamakāsi. Ye sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘pañca bhikkhū nisseṇiṃ bandhitvā’’tiādi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘yathāsutamatthaṃ upamābhāvena gahetvā’’tiādi. Apare pana ‘‘devatā attano paṭibhānena ime pañhe evaṃ abhisaṅkharitvā therassa ācikkhī’’ti vadanti. Devaputte nissakkaṃ devaputtapañhattā tassa atthassa.
251 251. 由四大种所生,就是四大所造。因此说“四大所成者的”。Vamati 的意思是像在呕吐一样。Vantako 指被吐出来的东西。Vantussayo 指白蚁吐出的土块堆成的高堆。Vantasinehasambaddho 指被吐出的唾液黏合成团。Asucikalimalaṃ vamatī 这一句,因为虫类从口等处爬出来,所以也能得出“吐出虫类”这个意思。Ariyehi vantakoti 是就身体状态的共通性来说的。或者,因为对苦谛的遍知,一切三地法的种类都已遍知,所以整个身体都已被圣者们以断除欲贪而吐弃了。Taṃ sabbaṃ 指:由三百块骨支撑,由筋腱连接,由肉涂抹,被湿皮包裹,被外皮染色——对那一切骨等,因极度厌嫌而离染,所以就是被吐弃的。以“Yathā cā”等应当说的譬喻来看,也像蚁冢一样,由此显示“蚁冢”这个意思。巴利
251. Catūhi mahābhūtehi nibbattoti cātumahābhūtiko. Tenāha ‘‘catumahābhūtamayassā’’ti. Vamati uggiranto viya hotīti attho. Vantakoti ucchaḍḍako. Vantussayoti upacikāhi vantassa mattikāpiṇḍassa ussayabhūto. Vantasinehasambaddhoti vantena kheḷasinehena sampiṇḍito. Asucikalimalaṃ vamatīti ettha mukhādīhi pāṇakānaṃ niggamanato pāṇake vamatīti ayampi attho labbhateva. Ariyehi vantakoti kāyabhāvasāmaññena vuttaṃ. Dukkhasaccapariññāya vā sabbassapi tebhūmakadhammajātassa pariññātattā sabbopi kāyo ariyehi chandarāgappahānena vanto eva. Taṃ sabbanti yehi tīhi aṭṭhisatehi ussito, yehi nhārūhi sambaddho, yehi maṃsehi avalitto, yena allacammena pariyonaddho, yāya chaviyā rañjito, taṃ aṭṭhiādisabbaṃ accantameva jigucchitvā virattatāyavantameva. ‘‘Yathā cā’’tiādinā vattabbopamatopi vammiko viya vammikoti imamatthaṃ dasseti.
从它产生,所以叫“生起”;这个身体由父母所生,所以叫“父母所生”。对于它来说,靠这个而积集,所以叫“积集”;这个身体靠饭粥团而积集,所以叫“饭粥团所积集”。对于它来说,因为自性不恒常,所以是“无常法”;为了去除汗、粪、胆汁、痰等界扰动的沉重和恶臭,所以是“应涂洗法”;因为要从四周揉按,所以是“应揉按法”;因为每一刹那都在坏灭,所以是“坏灭法”;正因如此,具有散坏的性质,所以是“消散法”——这里的“法”这个词,应当逐句分别配上。以涂身之物,就是用涂抹身体的东西来涂洗、涂抹。为了去除身体各肢节的病痛,就是为了消除由这类原因引起的身体变异。因为精与血是食物,涂洗和揉按则适当地成为生起和增长的助缘,所以说“父母所生……已说”。高下之分应当按适当情况配上:从“饭粥团所积集”和“涂洗、揉按”这些来说,是高的方面,即增长;从“父母所生”来说,是集起;从其余的来说,是低的方面,即衰退、灭没已被表明。因为身体各肢节的安立也是由于轮回的助缘,所以它们仍在轮回中。巴利
Sambhavati etasmāti sambhavo, mātāpettiko sambhavo etassāti mātāpettikasambhavo. Tassa. Upaciyati etenāti upacayo’ odanakummāsaṃ upacayo etassāti odanakummāsūpacayo. Tassa. Adhuvasabhāvatāya aniccadhammassa, sedagūtha-pitta-semhādi-dhātukkhobha-garubhāvaduggandhānaṃ vinodanāya ucchādetabbadhammassa, parito sambāhanena parimadditabbadhammassa, khaṇe khaṇe bhijjanasabhāvatāya bhedanadhammassa, tato eva vikiraṇasabhāvatāya viddhaṃsanadhammassāti dhamma-saddo paccekaṃ yojetabbo. Tanuvilepanenāti kāyāvalepanena ucchādanavilepanena. Aṅgapaccaṅgābādhavinodanatthāyāti tādisasamuṭṭhāna-sarīravikāravigamāya. Yasmā sukkasoṇitaṃ āhāro, ucchādanaṃ parimaddanañca yathārahaṃ uppādassa, vuḍḍhiyā ca paccayo, tasmā āha ‘‘mātāpettika…pe… kathito’’ti. Uccāvacabhāvoti yathārahaṃ yojetabbo – odanakummāsūpacaya-ucchādanaparimaddanaggahaṇehi uccabhāvo, vaḍḍhī. Mātāpettikasambhavaggahaṇena samudayo. Itarehi avacabhāvo, parihāni, atthaṅgamo pakāsito. Aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ saṇṭhapanampi hi vaṭṭapaccayattā vaṭṭanti.
“忿怒是烟”这句话里,因为是用烟的比喻来说明忿怒,所以说“烟”这个词指的是忿怒,因此说“如烟之烟”。“灰”就是灰。“妄语”就是说假话。烟本身就是烟熏。贪欲是它的烟熏,所以众生就是被贪欲烟熏的。而“被贪欲烟熏”这个词用在渴爱上,说明方式和前面一样。“正在冒烟”是指被寻思的热恼烧灼,也就是正在寻思的意思。“泥沼”是指难以行走的大泥潭。“三根”是指像依三种根而安住那样,不动摇地持续运转,所以这样说。“尘与烟是我所宣说的”:因为具有尘的性质,我说它是“尘”;因为具有烟的性质,我说它是“烟”。就像自然界的烟相对于火,是烦恼火焰的显现;而说法之烟,则是点燃智慧之火的先导。“这是夜间的冒烟”:是指白天为了要做的事业,在夜里反复寻思,这就是夜间的冒烟。巴利
Kodho dhūmoti ettha dhūmapariyāyena kodhassa vuttattā dhūma-saddo kodhe vattatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘dhūmo viya dhūmo’’ti. Bhasmanīti bhasmaṃ. Mosavajjanti musāvādo. Dhūmo eva dhūmāyitaṃ. Icchā dhūmāyitaṃ etissāti icchādhūmāyitā, pajā. Icchādhūmāyitasaddassa taṇhāya vutti vuttanayo eva. Dhūmāyantoti vitakkasantāpena saṃtappento, vitakkentoti attho. Palipoti dukkaramahākaddamaṃ. Timūlanti tīhi mūlehi patiṭṭhitaṃ viya acalaṃ pavattanti vuttaṃ. Rajo ca dhūmo ca mayā pakāsitāti rajasabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘rajo’’ti ca dhūmasabhāvakaraṇaṭṭhena ‘‘dhūmo’’ti ca mayā pakāsitā. Pakatidhūmo viya aggissa kilesaggijālassa paññāṇabhāvato. Dhammadesanādhūmo ñāṇaggisandhīpanassa pubbaṅgamabhāvato. Ayaṃ rattiṃ dhūmāyanāti yā divā kattabbakammante uddissa rattiyaṃ anuvitakkanā, ayaṃ rattiṃ dhūmāyanā.
“七法”这一说法,是依照经中(《小部·慈行童男问义释》第28)所呈现的方式而说的。经文也是按照应当受教化的众生的意乐来说的。或者,是因为那些烦恼与另一些烦恼同属一类的缘故。“善妙慧者”:以了知遍知、审察遍知、舍断遍知这三种遍知的智慧,而成为善妙慧者。巴利
Sattannaṃ dhammānanti idaṃ sutte (cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 28) āgatanayena vuttaṃ. Suttañca tathā ārādhanaveneyyajjhāsayavasena. Tadekaṭṭhatāya vā tadaññakilesānaṃ. Sundarapaññoti ñātatīraṇapahānapariññāya paññāya sundarapañño.
所谓“此”,就是“刀”这个称呼,因为它切削并断除杂染法。所谓“精进”,是指努力。它只以智慧为归宿,因为这里只以智慧所带来的利益为目的。当世间智慧开始生起时,应当取用世间精进;当出世间智慧现起的刹那,应当取用出世间精进——应当这样结合起来理解。阐明所喻之义,就是显示所比喻之意义的譬喻。巴利
Etanti ‘‘sattha’’nti etaṃ adhivacanaṃ saṃkilesadhammānaṃ sasanato samucchindanato. Nti vīriyaṃ. Paññāgatikameva paññāya hitasseva adhippetattā. Lokiyāya paññāya ārambhakāle lokiyavīriyaṃ gahetabbaṃ, lokuttarāya paññāya pavattikkhaṇe lokuttaravīriyaṃ gahetabbanti yojanā. Atthadīpanāti upameyyatthadīpanī upamā.
“gāmato”是指从自己住的村子。“manteti”是指阿闼婆咒。那些婆罗门只在树林里教诵,心想:“别让别人听到。”“tathā akāsi”是指分成四份。这样一来,这里只是以蚁垤之问作为譬喻出现,其余部分则应按照前面所说的方式理解。巴利
Gāmatoti attano vasanagāmato. Manteti āthabbanamante. Te hi brāhmaṇā araññe eva vācenti ‘‘mā aññe assosu’’nti. Tathā akāsīti cattāro koṭṭhāse akāsi. Evamettha vammikapañhasseva vasena upamā āgatā, sesānaṃ vasena heṭṭhā vuttanayena veditabbā.
以阻挡和遮止的作用称为门闩,即闩。在智之门中,指在观智的路径上。掉落,指转起。以受持业处和提问的方式,指通过受持四圣谛业处,以及请问其义理,还有以观智抉择义理的请问。因为想要完全了知就是请问,而观也想要从无常等方面了知一切三地诸法。如此,这是从观的角度说断除无明;由于之后还有应做之事,所以暂时没有从圣道的角度来说。巴利
Laṅganaṭṭhena nivāraṇaṭṭhena laṅgī, paligho. Ñāṇamukheti vipassanāñāṇavīthiyaṃ. Patatīti pavattati. Kammaṭṭhānauggahaparipucchāvasenāti catusaccakammaṭṭhānassa uggaṇhanena tassa atthaparipucchāvasena ceva vipassanāsaṅkhāta-atthavinicchaya-paripucchāvasena ca. Sabbaso ñātuṃ icchā hi paripucchā. Vipassanā ca aniccādito sabbatebhūmakadhammānaṃ ñātuṃ icchati. Evaṃ vipassanāvasena avijjāpahānamāha, uparikattabbasabbhāvato na tāva maggavasena.
或者在藤蔓之间:这里的“或”字,表示没有说出来的其他可能,也就是“或者在尘土之间,或者在泥土之间”。只是心浑浊:只是心受到扰动而已。未制伏:没有靠反复思择的力量挡住它。面容扭曲:面部皱缩。牙齿打颤:导致内心自言自语的状态。四处张望:为了看见那个应当被防范的人站在哪里,为了防护和守护。杖与刀的攻击:指把杖和刀打到别人身上的情形。由于那未受制伏的瞋,杀害了母亲等不该杀害的人之后,心想“我做的实在不对”,连自己也杀害——就是针对这个而说“也导致杀他和自杀”。或者,因为别人被杀,凶手也会遭到杀害,应当按这个意思来理解。这是就瞋的一般情况而说“杀他之后自杀”。达到极盛:达到顶点。瞋本身就是瞋恼,因为它带来顽固的灾患,所以说“变得强盛”等等。巴利
Valliantare vāti vā-saddo paṃsuantare vā mattikantare vāti avuttavikappattho. Cittāvilamattakovāti cittakkhobhamattakova. Aniggahitoti paṭisaṅkhānabalena anivārito. Mukhavikulanaṃ mukhasaṅkoco. Hanusañcopanaṃ pāpeti antojappanāvatthāyaṃ. Disā vilokanaṃ pāpeti yattha bādhetabbo ṭhito, taṃdassanatthaṃ nivārakaparivāraṇatthaṃ. Daṇḍasatthābhinipātanti daṇḍasatthānaṃ parassa upari nipātanāvatthaṃ. Yena kodhena aniggahitena mātādikaṃ aghātetabbaṃ ugghātetvā ‘‘ayuttaṃ vata mayā kata’’nti attānampi hanati, taṃ sandhāyetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paraghātanampi attaghātanampi pāpetī’’ti. Yena vā parassa haññamānassa vasena ghātakopi ghātanaṃ pāpuṇāti, tādisassa vasenāyamattho veditabbo. Kodhasāmaññena hetaṃ vuttaṃ ‘‘paraṃ ghātetvā attānaṃ ghātetī’’ti. Paramussadagatoti paramukkaṃsagato. Daḷhaṃ parissayamāvahatāya kodhova kodhūpāyāso. Tenāha ‘‘balavappatto’’tiādi.
两条路,是因为它是不修行之因。巴利
Dvedhāpathasamāhoti appaṭipattihetubhāvato.
善法无法住立,因为它已被诸盖彻底障蔽。对于以止为先导而修观的人来说,最初通过止镇伏诸盖,而观则仅以彼分断的方式去除它们,因此说“以镇伏与彼分断”。巴利
Kusaladhammo na tiṭṭhati nīvaraṇehi nivāritaparamattā. Samathapubbaṅgamaṃ vipassanaṃ bhāvayato paṭhamaṃ samathena nīvaraṇavikkhambhanaṃ hoti, vipassanā pana tadaṅgavaseneva tāni nīharatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘vikkhambhanatadaṅgavasenā’’ti.
在《相应部》“就像乌龟把四肢收进自己的壳里”等经文里,龟的“肢”特别是指脚和头,所以说“有五肢”。因为这是针对修观的人所说的,所以这里要取的正是应当被观照的那些法,因此特别点明“一切有为法”。世尊正是因此说:“这是对五取蕴的称呼。”巴利
‘‘Kummova aṅgāni sake kapāle’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.17) kummassa aṅgabhāvena visesato pādasīsāni eva vuccantīti āha ‘‘pañceva aṅgāni hontī’’ti. Vipassanācārassa vuccamānattā adhikārato sammasanīyānameva dhammānaṃ idha gahaṇanti ‘‘sabbepi saṅkhatā dhammā’’ti visesaṃ katvāva vuttaṃ. Tenāha bhagavā ‘‘pañcannetaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ adhivacana’’nti.
人们在那里宰杀、砍斫,所以叫屠场;注释说“在屠场之上”,就是指在屠场上面。以剑,就是用切肉的刀。正被杀,就是正在被杀害、被折磨。把它们放在感官欲乐之上,就是把它们置于感官欲乐之上,彻底超越它们。割截,就是切断。切碎,就是分成一片片。欲贪的舍断,这里指以镇伏的方式舍断欲贪。巴利
Sunanti koṭṭanti etthāti sūnā, adhikuṭṭananti āha ‘‘sūnāya uparī’’ti. Asināti maṃsakantanena. Ghātiyamānāti haññamānā vibādhiyamānā. Vatthukāmānaṃ upari katvāti vatthukāmesu ṭhapetvā te accādhānaṃ katvā. Kantitāti chinditā. Koṭṭitāti bilaso vibhajitā. Chandarāgappahānanti chandarāgassa vikkhambhanappahānaṃ.
“沉醉”就是迷恋、昏了头。“亲近喜贪而增长轮回”:因为昏了头,看不到其中的过患,就去靠近喜贪的所缘,不断把它养大。“被喜贪所缚”:因为黏在喜贪上,就被它绑住了。“黏着于轮回”:就是在三界的轮回里死死粘着。正因为这样粘着,即使遭了苦,也不厌烦,也不厌倦。这里说的是彻底断除,所以说“以第四道宣说了喜贪的断除”。巴利
Sammattāti mucchitā sammūḷhā. Nandīrāgaṃ upagamma vaṭṭaṃ vaḍḍhentīti sammūḷhattā evaādīnavaṃ apassantā nandīrāgassa ārammaṇaṃ upagantvā taṃ paribrūhenti. Nandīrāgabaddhāti nandīrāge laggattā tena baddhā. Vaṭṭe laggantīti tebhūmake vaṭṭe sajjanti. Tattha sajjattā eva dukkhaṃ patvāpi na ukkaṇṭhanti na nibbindanti. Idha anavasesappahānaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘catutthamaggena nandīrāgappahānaṃ kathita’’nti.
《无垢经》(《中部》义注1.63)里已经讲得很清楚,就是从“不以欲等而行”这类话开始的。“彼世尊是佛陀”等句,是在说明“礼敬”一语(《中部》1.249, 251)所说的礼敬方式。“为菩提”:就是为了证悟四圣谛。“调御、寂静、度脱、般涅槃”这些,应当按圣道来理解。不过“寂静”和“般涅槃”也可以结合无余涅槃来解释。“成为业处”:就是成为观的业处。“此问”:指这第十五个问题的含义。其余的问题也应这样理解:这是以漏尽者的功德把观业处推向顶点,顺着经文本身的脉络来完成开示,而不是顺着提问的脉络——这是要点。有人问:难道这个开示不是以提问开始的吗?确实是以提问开始的。但只能说“依提问而立论”,不能说“依提问的次第来完成开示”。因为开示并不因中间的提问而转向,所以它是按与开头一致的方式完成的。巴利
Anaṅgaṇasutte (ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.63) pakāsito eva ‘‘chandādīhi na gacchantī’’tiādinā. ‘‘Buddho so bhagavā’’tiādi ‘‘namo karohī’’ti (ma. ni. 1.249, 251) vuttanamakkārassa karaṇākāradassanaṃ. Bodhāyāti catusaccasambodhāya. Tathā damathasamathataraṇaparinibbānāni ariyamaggavasena veditabbāni. Samathaparinibbānāni pana anupādisesavasenapi yojetabbāni. Kammaṭṭhānaṃ ahosīti vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ ahosi. Etassa pañhassāti etassa pannarasamassa pañhassa attho. Evaṃ itaresupi vattabbaṃ vipassanākammaṭṭhānaṃ khīṇāsavaguṇehi matthakaṃ pāpento yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesi, na pucchitānusandhināti adhippāyo. Nanu ca pucchāvasenāyaṃ desanā āraddhāti? Saccaṃ āraddhā, evaṃ pana ‘‘pucchāvasiko nikkhepo’’ti vattabbaṃ, na ‘‘pucchānusandhivasena niṭṭhapitā’’ti. Antarapucchāvasena desanāya aparivattitattā ārambhānurūpameva pana desanā niṭṭhapitā.
第四 车接替经的注释巴利
4. Rathavinītasuttavaṇṇanā
252 252. 所谓“被大典尊所摄持”这一说法,是指当时被摩揭陀王所摄持的标志,因为那位大典尊正是他的国师。有些人说:“大典尊”是古代的一位摩揭陀王。“被执取”就是执取,诸王的执取之处就是王舍城。这是为了呼应“城”这个词而用了中性来表达。这里还有别的解释:因为被诸王看到并妥善建立,所以作为他们执取之处,王舍城也成了“家”;因为具备守护等条件而成为灾祸产生的原因,对于前来进犯的敌国诸王来说,王舍城作为执取之处也成了“家”;因为园林等可爱之物而光彩美丽,因为居住舒适等而被众生以我执执取,或者说“被摄持”,所以叫王舍城——诸如此类的解释。所谓“在佛陀时代和转轮王时代”,这是就多数情况而说的。它曾被竹林所围绕,但并不只是竹木之林;国王游园时,因为建有楼阁,所以说它“具备楼阁”。巴利
252. Mahāgovindena pariggahitatākittanaṃ tadā magadharājena pariggahitūpalakkhaṇaṃ. Tassa hi so purohito. Mahāgovindoti purātano eko magadharājāti keci. Gayhatīti gaho, rājūnaṃ gaho rājagahaṃ. Nagara-saddāpekkhāya napuṃsakaniddeso. Aññepettha pakāreti rājūhi disvā sammā patiṭṭhāpitattā tesaṃ gahaṃ gehabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ. Ārakkhasampattiādinā anatthuppattihetutāya upagatānaṃ paṭirājūnaṃ gahaṃ gahabhūtantipi rājagahaṃ, ārāmarāmaṇīyakādīhi rājate, nivāsasukhatādinā sattehi mamattavasena gayhati, pariggayhatīti vā rājagahanti evamādike pakāre. Buddhakāle ca cakkavattikāle cāti idaṃ yebhuyyavasena vuttaṃ. Veḷūhi parikkhittaṃ ahosi, na pana kevalaṃ kaṭṭhakapavanameva. Rañño uyyānakāle patiṭṭhāpitaaṭṭālakavasena aṭṭālakayuttaṃ.
出生就是“生”,出生的地方就是“生地”;或者说,大菩萨在这里出生,这个地方本身就是“地”,所以叫“生地”。这里是他们的住处,因此称他们为“生地者”,意思是住在生地的人。那么这是谁的生地呢?用“那么,那个……”等话来说明。由此表明,因为这里所说的“生”是不共的,在包括天神的世间中极为显著,所以即使没有修饰语,这里的“生”这个词也能被理解为指殊胜的对象。因此说:“一切知菩萨的出生地——释迦人的地方。”在那里,又指以迦毗罗卫为依托的区域,所以说“以迦毗罗卫为食处”。巴利
Jananaṃ jāti, jātiyā bhūmi jātibhūmaṃ, jāyi vā mahābodhisatto etthābhi jāti, sā eva bhūmīti jātibhūmaṃ, sā imesaṃ nivāsoti jātibhūmakāti āha ‘‘jātibhūmakāti jātibhūmivāsino’’ti. Kassa panāyaṃ jātibhūmīti āha ‘‘taṃ kho panā’’tiādi. Tena anaññasādhāraṇāya jātiyā adhippetattā sadevake loke supākaṭabhāvato visesanena vināpi visiṭṭhavisayova idha jāti-saddo viññāyatīti dasseti. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaññubodhisattassa jātaṭṭhānasākiyajanapado’’ti. Tatthapi kapilavatthusannissayo padesoti āha ‘‘kapilavatthāhāro’’ti.
关于重法性的解说巴利
Garudhammabhāvavaṇṇanā
释迦族群体,就是释迦王族的团体。十种少欲之论等内容的所依,叫十论事,也就是少欲等。因为他善于安住其中,所以他是十论事的获得者。其中,就是在十论事中。巴利
Sākiyamaṇḍalassāti sākiyarājasamūhassa. Dasannaṃ appicchakathādīnaṃ vatthu dasakathāvatthu, appicchatādi. Tattha suppatiṭṭhitatāya tassa lābhī dasakathāvatthulābhī. Tatthāti dasakathāvatthusmiṃ.
因为法是应当被尊重恭敬的,所以法是他的尊贵处,因此他被称为“法尊”;这种状态就是“法尊性”,以这种法尊性来说。说了“应当以意乐来了知”之后,为了表明不只是以意乐,还要通过身和语的行动来了知,于是说“正是法尊性……”等。关于“整夜说法之后”这一句,应当按补充语句的方式理解为“住在陶匠的住处,整夜住下之后说法”。否则,如果按字面直接理解为“整夜都在说法”,就会出问题,而事实并非如此。因为下文会说“许多夜”,那其实只是大约半夜。正如十力等功德殊胜一样,以敬重法为因的利他行道,在一切佛陀之中也是彼此相似的,就像劈开的黄金一样。因此,在称扬这位世尊敬重法时,通过“迦叶世尊也……”等语句来显示迦叶世尊的敬重法。巴利
Garukaraṇīyatāya dhammo garu etassāti dhammagaru, tassa bhāvo dhammagarutā, tāya. ‘‘Ajjhāsayena veditabbo’’ti vatvā na kevalaṃ ajjhāsayeneva, atha kho kāyavacīpayogehipi veditabboti dassento ‘‘dhammagarutāyeva hī’’tiādimāha. Tiyāmarattiṃ dhammakathaṃ katvāti ettha ‘‘kumbhakārassa nivesane tiyāmarattiṃ vasanto dhammakathaṃ katvā’’ti evaṃ vacanasesavasena attho veditabbo. Aññathā yathālābhavasena atthe gayhamāne tiyāmarattiṃ dhammakathā katāti āpajjati, na ca taṃ atthi. Vakkhati hi ‘‘bahudeva rattinti diyaḍḍhayāmamatta’’nti. Dasabalādiguṇavisesā viya dhammagāravahetukā parahitapaṭipattipi sabbabuddhānaṃ majjhe bhinnasuvaṇṇaṃ viya sadisā evāti imassa bhagavato dhammagāravakittane ‘‘kassapopi bhagavā’’tiādinā kassapabhagavato dhammagāravaṃ dasseti.
“出发游化”是指为了巡游乡间而出发。因为在不合适的时候出发去乡间游化,憍萨罗王等人就开始阻拦。诸佛的习惯确实是在自恣之后才出行。世尊期待满能正确地修行,就说道:“你能为我做什么呢?”巴利
Cārikaṃ nikkhamīti janapadacārikaṃ carituṃ nikkhami. Janapadacārikāya akāle nikkhantattā kosalarājādayo vāretuṃ ārabhiṃsu. Pavāretvā hi caraṇaṃ buddhāciṇṇaṃ. Puṇṇāya sammāpaṭipattiṃ paccāsīsanto bhagavā ‘‘kiṃ me karissasī’’ti āha.
“尚未沐浴”是指:因为急着听法,傍晚时没有按照诸佛的惯例去沐浴。在自利修行和利他修行当中,只具备其中一种或具备两种,由此成立四种修行类型,所以说“名为行道者……有四种”。因为即使是以拒绝为前提的行道者,从实质上说也仍然是行道者。虽然为了自利而修行,以这种正修行能让教法光耀,却不能使教法增长,因为他处于少事务的状态;也不能完全满足具足悲悯的世尊的心愿。正如世尊初成道时,以及六十一位比丘证得阿罗汉时,说“诸比丘,为了众人的利益……游行吧”等,劝导比丘们致力于利他修行。因此说:“世尊不询问这样的比丘。为什么?因为他没有站在我教法增长的一边。”巴利
Anahātovāti dhammasavanussukkena sāyanhe buddhāciṇṇaṃ nhānaṃ akatvāva. Attahitaparahitapaṭipattīsu ekissā dvinnañca atthitāsiddhā catubbidhatā paṭipattikatā eva nāma hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘paṭipannako ca nāma…pe… catubbidho hotī’’ti. Paṭikkhepapubbakopi hi paṭipanno atthato paṭipannattho evāti. Kāmaṃ attahitāya paṭipanno tāya sammāpaṭipattiyā sāsanaṃ sobhati, na pana sāsanaṃ vaḍḍheti appossukkabhāvato, na ca kāruṇikassa bhagavato sabbathā manorathaṃ pūreti. Tathā hi bhagavā paṭhamabodhiyaṃ ekasaṭṭhiyā ca arahantesu jātesu – ‘‘caratha, bhikkhave, bahujanahitāyā’’tiādinā (dī. ni. 2.86-88; mahāva. 32) bhikkhū parahitapaṭipattiyaṃ niyojesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘evarūpaṃ bhikkhuṃ bhagavā na pucchati, kasmā? Na mayhaṃ sāsanassa vuḍḍhipakkhe ṭhito’’ti.
众会虽然因为少了个别人而显得不完整,却好像毫无欠缺一样,所以即使把婆拘罗长老排除在第四类之外,仍然说“如同八十位大长老”。或者,“八十位大长老”这个称呼,也可以理解为就像在部分上使用“八等至”这个通称一样。在这种场合,众多比丘聚在一起说法,而且大声说法,完全是为了让导师心中欢喜。为了说明那些比丘正是这样行道的,所以说“那些比丘听到雷声……”等等。“由于功德的推崇”,是指因为后面将要说的功德而受到推崇,并不是因为任何办事能力等缘故。巴利
Samudāyo appakena ūnopi anūno viya hotīti bākulattheraṃ catuttharāsito bahi katvāpi ‘‘asītimahātherā viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Asītimahātherasamaññā vā avayavepi aṭṭhasamāpattisāmaññā viya daṭṭhabbā. Īdise ṭhāne bahūnaṃ ekato kathanaṃ mahatā kaṇṭhena ca kathanaṃ satthu cittārādhanamevāti tehi bhikkhūhi tathā paṭipannanti dassento ‘‘te bhikkhū meghasaddaṃ sutvā’’tiādimāha. Guṇasambhāvanāyāti vakkhamānaguṇahetukāya sambhāvanāya sambhāvito, na yena kenaci kiccasamatthatādinā.
少欲等内容的解说巴利
Appicchatādivaṇṇanā
把“少”(appa)这个词理解为“小”的意思之后,就说“文句似乎还有剩余”。因此接着说了“并非彼”等话。不过,这里的“少”字其实是“不存在”的意思,就像在“我知无病”等句子中那样,可以这样理解。巴利
Appa-saddassa parittapariyāyataṃ manasi katvā āha ‘‘byañjanaṃ sāvasesaṃ viyā’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘na hi tassā’’tiādi. Appa-saddo panettha abhāvatthoti sakkā viññātuṃ ‘‘appābādhatañca sañjānāmī’’tiādīsu (ma. ni. 1.225; 2.134) viya.
名为“过欲”的,意思是“处处都有欲求”。所谓“称扬不实的功德”,就是把自己身上并不存在的功德,当作存在一样向别人展示。“有信者”,是想要让人知道“我是履行仪轨、获得殊胜利益的人”,也就是想让人知道“我是诵习仪轨行持的人”等等。“称扬真实的功德”,是指安住在欲求的行为中,展示自己确实具备的戒、头陀支等功德。因为这样的人在接受供养时,也会不知节制。巴利
Atricchatā nāma (a. ni. ṭī. 1.1.63) atra atra icchāti katvā. Asantaguṇasambhāvanatāti attani avijjamānaṃ guṇānaṃ vijjamānānaṃ viya paresaṃ pakāsanā. Saddhoti maṃ jano jānātūti vattapaṭipattikārakavisesalābhīti jānātu ‘‘vattapaṭipattiāpāthakajjhāyitā’’ti evamādinā. Santaguṇasambhāvanāti icchācāre ṭhatvā attani vijjamānasīladhutadhammādiguṇavibhāvanā. Tādisassa hi paṭiggahaṇe amattaññutāpi hoti.
就在抓取的那一刻,它已经浮现出来了;意思是说,在其他人完全不知情的情况下。巴利
Gaṇhantoyeva ummujji aññesaṃ ajānantānaṃyevāti adhippāyo.
先以人为立足点,说明了少欲为首的四种欲的分别;接着又以人为立足点,说明四种欲的分别,于是说“还有另一种四种少欲者”等。随施主,就是随施主的心意。随应施之物,就是随应施之物的多少。随自身之力,就是随自己仅能维持生活的那一点能力。巴利
Appicchatāpadhānaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānena catubbidhaṃ icchāpabhedaṃ dassetvā punapi puggalādhiṭṭhānena catubbidhaṃ icchāpabhedaṃ dassento ‘‘aparopi catubbidhoappiccho’’tiādimāha. Dāyakassa vasanti dāyakassa cittavasaṃ. Deyyadhammassa vasanti deyyadhammassa appabahubhāvaṃ. Attano thāmanti attano yāpanamattakathāmaṃ.
连一位比丘也没有发觉他住在冢间,因为他在冢间住的行持中极为正确地生活。“不夹杂”就是没有间断。“第二个人不该知道我”是说:即使是同住的同伴,也没法知道我就是这样连续六十年不间断地住在坟场里;所以,我确实是冢间住者中最顶尖的。巴利
Ekabhikkhupi na aññāsi sosānikavatte sammadeva vuttittā. Abbokiṇṇanti avicchedaṃ. Dutiyo maṃ na jāneyyāti dutiyo sahāyabhūtopi yathā maṃ jānituṃ na sakkuṇeyya, tathā saṭṭhi vassāni nirantaraṃ susāne vasāmi, tasmā ahaṃ aho sosānikuttamo.
用说法把大众搅动起来:靠让人汗毛直竖、连声称赞、供养、抛掷衣物等方式,以及让其他赶来的人喧嚷着说“我们怎么才能在尊者跟前听法呢”,就这样把大批人群搅动起来。他走了:因为怕被人知道“那天夜里说法的就是他”,又因为不想多学,他就回了自己的住处。巴利
Dhammakathāya janataṃ khobhetvāti lomahaṃsanasādhukāradānacelukkhepādivasena sannipatitaṃ itarañca ‘‘kathaṃ nu kho ayyassa santikeva dhammaṃ sossāmā’’ti kolāhalavasena mahājanaṃ khobhetvā. Gatoti ‘‘ayaṃ so, tena rattiyaṃ dhammakathā katā’’ti jānanabhayena pariyattiappicchatāya pariveṇaṃ gato.
就像在东竹林园中和合共住的三位善男子一样。舍断:先以彼分断等方式作为前分,之后以最上道彻底断除。巴利
Tayokulaputtā viyāti pācīnavaṃsadāye samaggavāsaṃ vutthā tayo kulaputtā viya. Pahāyāti pubbabhāge tadaṅgādivasena pacchā aggamaggeneva pajahitvā.
十二种知足的解释巴利
Dvādasavidhasantosavaṇṇanā
体质天生虚弱之类的比丘,穿沉重的袈裟等,既不会带来安乐,也会让身体疲劳。所以,从实际需要出发,而不是出于额外的贪求,把那些沉重袈裟换成轻便的来用,并不违背知足,因此说“即使只用轻便的袈裟过活,也还是知足的人”。即使得到了贵重的袈裟,或者得到了很多袈裟,把它们放下来另取别的,因为这是站在随宜合适的做法上,所以也不违背知足,因此说“即使受用那些……也还是知足的人”。同样,在其余资具的随力知足和随宜知足的说明中,也要理解加入一个“也”字的用意。随宜知足才是最殊胜的,因为它把无贪的意乐推到了最高处。巴利
Pakatidubbalādīnaṃ garucīvarādīni naphāsubhāvāvahāni sarīrakhedāvahāni ca hontīti payojanavasena naatricchatādivasena tāni parivattetvā lahukacīvaraparibhogo na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘lahukena yāpentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Mahagghacīvaraṃ, bahūni vā cīvarāni labhitvāpi tāni vissajjetvā tadaññassa gahaṇaṃ yathāsāruppanaye ṭhitattā na santosavirodhīti āha ‘‘tesaṃ…pe… dhārentopi santuṭṭhova hotī’’ti. Evaṃ sesapaccayesupi yathābalayathāsāruppasantosaniddesesu apisaddaggahaṇe adhippāyo veditabbo. Yathāsāruppasantosoyeva aggo alobhajjhāsayassa ukkaṃsanato.
三种远离的解说巴利
Tividhapavivekavaṇṇanā
“一”就是独自一人。“行”是依据分段式的威仪来说的。“游”是依据在住处之外往来走动的角度来说的,“住”是依据白天安住等情形来说的。所谓“身远离”,是指一个志求出离的人,通过修行而安住在远离之处,并不只是指禅那层面的远离。因此才说“乐于出离的人”。“清净心”是指从五盖等染污中清净了的心。“达到至高纯净”是指由于消除了寻等每一禅那的对立障碍,而达到了最高、最殊胜的纯净。“无依著”是指由于断除了烦恼等一切依著,而成为无依著的人。巴利
Ekoti ekākī. Gacchatīti cuṇṇikairiyāpathavasena vuttaṃ. Caratīti vihārato bahi sañcāravasena, viharatīti divāvihārādivasena. Kāyavivekoti ca nekkhammādhimuttassa bhāvanānuyogavasena vivekaṭṭhakāyatā, na jhānavivekamattaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nekkhammābhiratāna’’nti. Parisuddhacittānanti nīvaraṇādisaṃkilesato visuddhacittānaṃ. Paramavodānappattānanti vitakkāditaṃtaṃjhānapaṭipakkhavigamena paramaṃ uttamaṃ vodānaṃ pattānaṃ. Nirupadhīnanti kilesupadhiādīnaṃ vigamena nirupadhīnaṃ.
五种接触的解释巴利
Pañcavidhasaṃsaggavaṇṇanā
因为会陷进去,所以叫“接触”,也就是贪。以听闻为因,或者依听闻而发生的接触,就是“闻接触”。其余的也按这个道理类推。而“身接触”就是身体的碰触。女人,或者新娘,或者年轻女子。“连接起来”就是把前后串连起来。所谓“依耳识路”,这是就作为根本的听闻来说的;即使是在它之后、于意门速行心路中生起的贪,也仍然属于闻接触。在见接触里,道理也是一样。“无女性香气的菩萨”是举他人讲述而发生的闻接触为例,低沙年轻比丘则是以自己听闻为例。其中,为了说明第一个例子应当从《本生》中了知,于是开示另一个例子,说“据说有一位年轻比丘……”等。被欲贪射中,就是被贪欲之箭刺入心中,从内部穿透。巴利
Saṃsīdati etenāti saṃsaggo, rāgo. Savanahetuko, savanavasena vā pavatto saṃsaggo savanasaṃsaggo. Esa nayo sesesupi. Kāyasaṃsaggo pana kāyaparāmāso. Itthī vāti vadhū, yuvatī vā. Sandhānetunti pubbenāparaṃ ghaṭetuṃ. Sotaviññāṇavīthivasenāti idaṃ mūlabhūtaṃ savanaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, tassa piṭṭhivattakamanodvārikajavanavīthīsu uppannopi rāgo savanasaṃsaggoyeva. Dassanasaṃsaggepi eseva nayo. Anitthigandhabodhisatto parehi kathiyamānavasena pavattasavanasaṃsaggassa nidassanaṃ. Tissadaharo attanā suyyamānavasena. Tattha paṭhamaṃ jātake veditabbanti itaraṃ dassento ‘‘daharo kirā’’tiādimāha. Kāmarāgena viddhoti rāgasallena hadaye appito anto anuviddho.
所谓“彼”,就是指由看见而产生的接触。应当这样理解:这是通过具体事例来说明。据说在那个村子里,大多数女人都容貌美丽、端庄悦目,所以长老说:“如果你不在村中走动……”因为正好在合适的时间进入村中,他才得到了粥,因此当他只拿了粥就要离开时,大家说:“尊者,请回来,请接受食物。”他们请求说:“尊者,我们并不是只想供养食物才请您回来,而是有这样的原因,尊者。”巴利
Soti dassanasaṃsaggo. Evaṃ veditabboti vatthuvasena pākaṭaṃ karoti. Tasmiṃ kira gāme yebhuyyena itthiyo abhirūpā dassanīyā pāsādikā, tasmā thero ‘‘sace antogāme na carissasī’’ti āha. Kālasseva paviṭṭhattā yāguṃ adāsi, tasmā yāgumeva gahetvā gacchantaṃ ‘‘nivattatha, bhante, bhikkhaṃ gaṇhāhī’’ti āhaṃsu. Yācitvāti ‘‘na mayaṃ, bhante, bhikkhaṃ dātukāmā nivattema, apica idaṃ bhante kāraṇa’’nti yācitvā.
一开始的搭话叫“语”;以问答互动方式展开的交谈叫“共语”。这里举“比丘尼”只是举个例子。对任何一位女性,因受用她的所有物而生起的贪染,就是受用方面的接触杂染。巴利
Ādito lapanaṃ ālāpo, vacanapaṭivacanavasena pavatto lāpo sallāpo. Bhikkhuniyāti idaṃ nidassanamattaṃ. Yāya kāyacipi itthiyā santakaparibhogavasena uppannarāgopi sambhogasaṃsaggova.
执取者等的解说巴利
Gāhagāhakādivaṇṇanā
比丘被其他比丘以按摩身体等方式触碰身体,这就是身体上的触摸。身体接触,就是身体抚摸的接触。执取者,意思是抓取那些抓取者的人。从执取中脱出者,是指自己能从那些不如理地以物质利养拉拢人的人当中脱离出来的人。从脱出者中执取,是指去拉拢那些已从上述拉拢中脱出的人。从脱出者中脱出,是指自己也从那些脱出者当中脱离出来。这是就执取一面、以拉拢的方式来说的。他们亲近比丘,是希望从中得到一些世俗的好处,并不是以应受供养者的态度。而在比丘这一方,执取应当理解为为了获得资具而以拉拢的方式去做。以上是依照“以物质利养”等前面所说的方式来讲的。巴利
Bhikkhuno bhikkhūhi kāyaparāmāso kāyasambāhanādivasena. Kāyasaṃsagganti kāyaparāmāsasaṃsaggaṃ. Gāhagāhakoti gaṇhanakānaṃ gaṇhanakoti attho. Gāhamuttakoti ayoniso āmisehi saṅgaṇhanakehi sayaṃ muccanako. Muttagāhakoti yathāvuttasaṅgahato muttānaṃ saṅgaṇhanako. Muttamuttakoti muccanakehi sayampi muccanako. Gahaṇavasena saṅgaṇhanavasena. Upasaṅkamanti tato kiñci lokāmisaṃ paccāsīsantā, na dakkhiṇeyyavasena. Bhikkhupakkhe gahaṇavasenāti paccayalābhāya saṅgaṇhanavasenāti yojetabbaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘āmisenā’’tiādinā vuttanayena.
“处”是指它自己的立足处。不让它到达,意思是:当烦恼一升起,就以反复思维的力量把它拔除、压制下去。所以经文说“以咒语”等等。就像想活命的人不会跟黑蛇或敌人住在一起,同样,他连一刹那也不跟烦恼同住——这就是这段话的意思。巴利
Ṭhānanti attano ṭhānāvatthaṃ. Pāpuṇituṃ na deti uppannameva taṃ paṭisaṅkhānabalena nīharanto vikkhambheti. Tenāha ‘‘mantenā’’tiādi. Yathā jīvitukāmo puriso kaṇhasappena, amittena vā saha na saṃvasati, evaṃ khaṇamattampi kilesehi saha na saṃvasatīti attho.
四遍清净戒既属于世间,也属于出世间。定也是这样。以八等至来统摄时,世间定被取为“观的足处”,同样,以八等至来统摄时,出世间定也被取为“观的足处”。正如以四种色界禅那为依托而生起的道定是观的足处,以四种无色界禅那为依托而生起的道定也是观的足处。不过,等至的次第应当按先前的说法来理解。或者,因为断除对立而正确趣入,就像“入流道”这个名称一样。因此应当知道,在这里戒和定也具有混合的性质,并非只有慧才如此。“解脱”是指圣果,因为经中说了“解脱具足者”。那是从“完成”的意义上应当成就的,而不是指涅槃。巴利
Catupārisuddhisīlaṃ lokiyaṃ lokuttarañca. Tathā samādhipi. Vipassanāya pādakā vipassanāpādakāti aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇena yathā lokiyasamādhi gahito, evaṃ vipassanāpādakā etesanti vipassanāpādakāti aṭṭhasamāpattiggahaṇeneva lokuttaro samādhi gahito. Yathā hi cattāri rūpajjhānāni adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā pavatto maggasamādhi vipassanāpādako, evaṃ cattāri arūpajjhānāni adhiṭṭhānaṃ katvā pavattopi. Samāpattipariyāyo pana pubbavohārena veditabbo. Paṭipakkhasamucchedanena sammā āpajjanato vā yathā ‘‘sotāpattimaggo’’ti. Evamettha sīlasamādhīnampi missakabhāvo veditabbo, na paññāya eva. Vimuttīti ariyaphalanti vuttaṃ ‘‘vimuttisampanno’’ti vuttattā. Tañhi nipphādanaṭṭhena sampādetabbaṃ, na nibbānanti.
在这里,由于少欲,他对所得的资具感到知足;由于知足,他受用所得之物时不贪著、不迷恋,见到过患,以出离的智慧来受用。处于这种状态时,他因为对任何事物都不执著于心,便增长远离,不与任何在家人或出家人混杂而住。他具备这样的意乐之后,就发起精进,为了获得尚未获得的、证得尚未证得的。当他精进时,他如实观察自己所受持的戒,依靠这戒的完全清净,生起无悔,这是他的戒具足。以无悔为根基,生起欢悦、喜、轻安与乐,心因此得到善加修习,真正地入定,这是他的定具足。从此如实知见,便厌离;厌离便离贪;离贪便解脱,这是他的慧具足。而他的心解脱状态,就是他的解脱具足;从这解脱之后,有解脱知见。应当了知这十种论题的次第。他具备这十种论题,就是为自利的修行;将这些向他人宣说,就是为利他的修行。在这两者中,前者以智为先导、与智相应;后者以悲为先导、与悲相应。这一切应当作为智悲篇来说。巴利
Ettha ca appicchatāya laddhapaccayena paritussati, santuṭṭhatāya laddhā te agadhito amucchitoādīnavadassī nissaraṇapañño paribhuñjati, evaṃbhūto ca katthaci alaggamānasatāya pavivekaṃ paribrūhento kenaci asaṃsaṭṭho viharati gahaṭṭhena vā pabbajitena vā. So evaṃ ajjhāsayasampanno vīriyaṃ ārabhati appattassa pattiyā, anadhigamassa adhigamāya. Ārabhanto ca yathāsamādinnaṃ attano sīlaṃ paccavekkhati, tassa sīlassa suparisuddhataṃ nissāya uppajjati avippaṭisāro, ayamassa sīlasampadā. Tassa avippaṭisāramūlakehi pāmojjapītipassaddhisukhehi sammā brūhitaṃ cittaṃ sammadeva samādhiyati, ayamassa samādhisampadā. Tato yathābhūtaṃ jānaṃ passaṃ nibbindati, nibbindaṃ virajjati, virāgā vimuccati, ayamassa paññāsampadā. Vimuttacittatā panassa vimuttisampadā, tato vimuttito ñāṇadassananti etesaṃ dasannaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ anupubbī veditabbā. Tassa yo dasahi kathāvatthūhi samannāgamo, ayaṃ attahitāya paṭipatti. Yā nesaṃ paresaṃ saṃkittanaṃ, ayaṃ parahitāya paṭipatti. Tāsu purimā ñāṇapubbaṅgamā ñāṇasampayuttā ca, itarā karuṇāpubbaṅgamā karuṇāsampayuttā cāti sabbaṃ ñāṇakaruṇākaṇḍaṃ vattabbaṃ.
他用这十种论事作为方法,对比丘们给予教导。意思是说:作为比丘,应当远远避开多欲等过失,如法地安住在少欲之中——如此逐一为比丘们开示这些论事。当这样开示时,就说他“以这些论事教导比丘”。他确实是在教导,只是通过展示其本来面目而已。若要说明其中微细的含义,比如“这样是少欲,这样也是少欲”,虽然按少欲的种种表现一一展示了少欲的行相,却仍然无法让人了知那微细精妙的、所谓少欲的真实含义。所谓“使人了知”,就是依上述种种差别来说明。“因”,是指少欲得以成就的缘由,也就是应当看到“在多欲等中有这些过失,在少欲中有这样的利益”这样的过患与利益之展示。能以正确的原因显示少欲的,就是“指示者”。“使人执取”,是指让他按照所执取的那样去做,令他安立其中。通过激发精进力,使他如所受持的那样坚固不动,正确地给予策励,就是“激发者”。对于已生起精进的人,称赞其功德,赞叹今生及未来所能获得的成就与殊胜,令他欢喜,正确地以种种方式令他满意,就是“令欢喜者”。对于知足等,也应按照相应的情况如此配释。巴利
Dasahikathāvatthūhi karaṇabhūtehi bhikkhūnaṃ ovādaṃ deti, ‘‘bhikkhunā nāma atricchatādike dūrato vajjetvā sammadeva appicchena bhavitabba’’ntiādinā taṃ taṃ kathāvatthuṃ bhikkhūnaṃ upadisatīti attho. Upadisanto hi tāni ‘‘tehi bhikkhū ovadatī’’ti vutto. Ovadatiyeva sarūpadassanamattena. Sukhumaṃ atthaṃ parivattetvāti evampi appicchatā hoti evampīti appicchatādivasena aparāparaṃ appicchatāvuttiṃ dassetvā tattha sukhumanipuṇaṃ appicchatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthaṃ jānāpetuṃ na sakkoti. Viññāpetīti yathāvuttehi visesehi viññāpeti. Kāraṇanti yena kāraṇena appicchatā ijjhati, taṃ pana ‘‘mahicchatādīsu ete dosā, appicchatāya ayamānisaṃso’’tiādīnavānisaṃsadassanaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Sammā hetunā appicchataṃ dassetīti sandassako. Gāhetunti yathā gaṇhati, tathā kātuṃ, tattha paṭṭhapetunti attho. Ussāhajananavasenāti yathā taṃ samādānaṃ niccalaṃ hoti, evaṃ ussoḷhiyā uppādanavasena sammadeva uttejetīti samuttejako. Ussāhajāteti appicchatāya jātussāhe. Vaṇṇaṃ vatvā tattha sampattiṃ āyatiñca labbhamānaguṇaṃ kittetvā sampahaṃseti sammadeva pakārehi tosetīti sampahaṃsako. Evaṃ santuṭṭhiādīsu yathārahaṃ yojanā kātabbā.
五利得的解说巴利
Pañcalābhavaṇṇanā
253 “在导师面前,这样的名声流传开来。”这句话说明,他的名声是由真实的功德产生的。“mandamando”就像极其愚钝的人一样。“abalabalo”就像极其羸弱的人一样。“bhākuṭikabhākuṭiko”就像极其愁眉苦脸、面目可憎的人一样。“anumassā”是随念之后,也就是从自相和差别两方面一一把握了十种论事的意思。而把握它们,就如同进入其中,所以说“anupavisitvā(进入之后)”。与同梵行者谈论功德,这是一种利养,应当这样理解。其余的利养也应当照此类推。他是出于对法的尊重,怀着这样的期望才说的,这就是其用意所在。巴利
253.Satthu sammukhā evaṃ vaṇṇo abbhuggatoti. Iminā tassa vaṇṇassa yathābhūtaguṇasamuṭṭhitataṃ dasseti. Mandamando viyāti ati viya acheko viya. Abalabalo viyāti ati viya abalo viya. Bhākuṭikabhākuṭiko viyāti ati viya dummukho viya. Anumassāti anumasitvā, dasa kathāvatthūni sarūpato visesato ca anupariggahetvāti attho. Pariggaṇhanaṃ pana nesaṃ anupavisanaṃ viya hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘anupavisitvā’’ti. Sabrahmacārīhi vaṇṇabhāsanaṃ eko lābhoti yojanā. Evaṃ sesesupi. Patthayamāno evamāha dhammagarutāyāti adhippāyo.
254 254. “abhirataṃ”(所乐)就是“abhiramana”(喜悦)的意思,这里没有把鼻音省略掉,所以读作“abhirantaṃ”。这也是一个状态中性名词。所谓“不喜乐”并不存在,喜乐之后也没有长久安住这回事,因为已经如实遍知了诸法的体性。一切诸佛世尊确实都已获得无可比拟的功德。巴利
254. Abhiramanaṃ abhirataṃ, tadeva anunāsikalopaṃ akatvā vuttaṃ ‘‘abhiranta’’nti. Bhāvanapuṃsakañcetaṃ. Anabhirati nāma natthi, abhiramitvā ciravihāropi natthi sammadeva pariññātavatthukattā. Sabbasahā hi buddhā bhagavanto asayhalābhino.
先前在赞叹尊重法的语境中,已经部分地提到了大迦叶前去迎接等已说和未说的事,接着详细讲述了林居帝沙沙弥的故事。现在为了说明各地游行,便以“世尊确实……”等开始讲述。他希望能和那些能行于空中的比丘一同前往,便说:“去告知那些获得六神通的人。”有人说,具足戒虽然可以通过僧团羯磨成就,但在这里是依导师的命令才得以成就的,因此说:“我将把佛的遗产给你。”另一些人说:“导师在准许这位未满二十岁者受具足戒时,说道:‘我将把佛的遗产给你。’”受具足戒:由法将(舍利弗)担任他的亲教师,为他授予具足戒。巴利
Pubbe dhammagarutākittanapasaṅgena gahitaṃ aggahitañca mahākassapapaccuggamanādiṃ ekadesena dassetvā vanavāsitissasāmaṇerassa vatthuṃ vitthāretvā janapadacārikaṃ kathetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Ākāsagāmīhi saddhiṃ gantukāmo ‘‘chaḷabhiññānaṃ ārocehī’’ti āha. Saṅghakammena sijjhamānāpi upasampadā satthu āṇāvaseneva sijjhanato ‘‘buddhadāyajjaṃ te dassāmī’’ti vuttanti vadanti. Apare ‘‘aparipuṇṇavīsativassasseva tassa upasampadaṃ anujānanto satthā ‘buddhadāyajjaṃ tedassāmī’ti avocā’’ti vadanti. Upasampādetvāti dhammasenāpatinā upajjhāyena upasampādetvā.
“不超过九百由旬”的范围,只是属于中部地区而已;再往远处,因为走得慢,所以不是世尊想要去的地方。“四周”是指所到之处的四个方向。还有别的理由:因为比丘们的止和观还很稚嫩,也因为中部地区那些应当受度化的人智慧成熟等其他原因,世尊才离开,又进入界内区域。“以七日……”等等,应当按后面所说的“或一个月……”等顺序来理解。巴利
Navayojanasatikaṃ majjhimadesapariyāpannameva, tato paraṃ nādhippetaṃ dandhatāvasena gamanato. Samantāti gatagataṭṭhānassa catūsu passesu. Aññenapi kāraṇenāti bhikkhūnaṃ samathavipassanātaruṇabhāvato aññenapi majjhimamaṇḍale veneyyānaṃ ñāṇaparipākādikāraṇena nikkhamati, antomaṇḍalaṃ otarati. Sattahi vātiādi ‘‘ekaṃ māsaṃ vā’’tiādinā vuttānukkamena yojetabbaṃ.
为了让身体舒适:是指固定住在一个地方时,体内四大会增盛,通过排泄(游化)使身体变得舒畅。为了期待说法时机成熟:就像《火聚喻经》(A.7.72)、《摩伽天本生经》(Jā.1.1.9)等说法那样,是为了等待说法因缘时机的到来。为了制定学处:就像制定饮酒学处(Pāc.326)那样,是为了制定学处。为了度化应度众生:是为了度化像央掘摩罗那样应受度化的众生。而针对某个固定居住的人而进行的游行,就叫作固定游行。巴利
Sarīraphāsukatthāyāti ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne nibaddhavāsena ussannadhātukassa sarīrassa virecanena phāsubhāvatthāya. Aṭṭhuppattikālābhikaṅkhanatthāyāti aggikkhandhūpamasutta (a. ni. 7.72) maghadevajātakādidesanānaṃ (jā. 1.1.9) viya dhammadesanāya aṭṭhuppattikālassa ākaṅkhanena. Surāpānasikkhāpadapaññāpane (pāci. 326) viya sikkhāpadapaññāpanatthāya. Bodhaneyyasatte aṅgulimālādike bodhanatthāya. Nibaddhavāsañca puggalaṃ uddissa cārikā nibaddhacārikā.
255 255. 为了说明他在任何地方都不执取、不黏着的状态,所以说了“舍弃象群……犹如狂象”这句话。“没有同伴也能做事”,是指像狮子一样,不需要同伴帮忙就能独自行动。借此显示他独居的状态和威势。不过,那时他还无法获得身远离,这一点应当理解为这里的关键原因。“被众多(比丘围绕)”等说法,则是就实际情况而说的。长老的弟子众调伏得非常好,习惯于恭敬师长,所以他们的行为正好都随顺尊者的心意。巴利
255. Apariggahabhāvaṃ katthaci alaggabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yūthaṃ pahāya…pe… mattahatthī viyā’’ti vuttaṃ. Asahāyakiccoti sahāyakiccarahito sīho viya. Tenassa ekavihāritaṃ tejavantatañca dasseti. Tadā pana kāyaviveko na sakkā laddhunti idamettha kāraṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ. Bahūhītiādi pana sabhāvadassanavasena vuttaṃ. Therassa parisā suvinītā ciṇṇagaruvāsā garuno icchānurūpameva vattati.
为了说明在具备所说理由的长途跋涉中,“游行”这个说法在教法里已经成为约定俗成的用语,所以他说“虽然……”等。所谓“惯用”,就是由于某种相状而对某件事形成了概念,即使在没有那种相状的其他情形下也照样沿用这个概念。就像一个人仅仅因为征服了魔军,就被称为大会战中决胜的大勇士。至于“拜访他人”:意思是为了请人通报“我来了,请告知导师”,而去拜访了另一位比丘。巴利
Vuttakāraṇayutte addhānagamane cārikānaṃ vohāro sāsane niruḷhoti āha ‘‘kiñcāpī’’tiādi. Kenacideva nimittena kismiñci atthe pavattāya saññāya tannimittarahitepi aññasmiṃ pavatti ruḷhī nāma. Vijitamārattā saṅgāmavijayamahāyodho viya. Aññaṃ sevitvāti ‘‘mama āgatabhāvaṃ satthu ārocehī’’ti ārocanatthaṃ aññaṃ bhikkhuṃ sevitvā.
世尊说法时,总是根据每个众生的根性和意乐,讲说恰好适合他们的法语。为了说明这一点,所以接着说“在《小牛角经》中”等等。
其中,“和合的利益”:是依据“阿那律们,你们是否和合、互相欢喜……”等经文,讲说了和合的利益。
“住所的利益”:是依据“抵御寒冷炎热……”等经文,讲说了与住所相关的利益。
“获得正念”:乔帝巴喇长老当时刚陷入低劣的境地,但他曾在大菩提树下发愿要证得一切知智,为此圆满种种波罗蜜而来。像这样的人,放逸而住是不合适的。正如迦叶世尊为了让菩萨获得正念而讲说法语那样,这位世尊也为比丘们讲说了与宿住有关的《嘎帝咖拉经》。
“四法要”:他讲说了这四个法要——“世间被衰老牵引,是无常的;世间没有救护,没有归属;世间空无所有,一切都要舍弃而去;世间有欠缺,不知满足,是贪爱的奴仆。”虽然这些法要本来是具寿赖吒和罗尊者在《赖吒和罗经》中对俱卢王说的,但那是他从佛陀那里拿来、再在那边复述的,所以经文说“在《赖吒和罗经》中”等等。经中确实是这样说的:“大王,那些法要是由那位世尊、知者、见者、阿拉汉、正等觉者所宣说的”等等。
“饮料的利益”:先说了“火供是诸祭祀之首……”等随喜语,然后又以杂谈的方式,讲说了与饮料相关的利益。
他讲说了独住的利益,关于这一点,经文说“于是世尊以法语教导具寿婆古”等等。
“无尽的教法”:就是与少欲等相关的无量教法。因此他说“富楼那,这也是少欲之谈”等等,以多种方式、种种理趣来宣说。那位长老怎么理解这样宣说的法呢?所以说“因为他已得无碍解……”。巴利
Bhagavā dhammaṃ desento taṃtaṃpuggalajjhāsayānurūpaṃ tadanucchavikameva dhammiṃ kathaṃ karotīti dassento ‘‘cūḷagosiṅgasutte’’tiādimāha. Tattha sāmaggirasānisaṃsanti ‘‘kacci pana vo, anuruddhā, samaggā sammodamānā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.326) sāmaggirasānisaṃsaṃ kathesi. Āvasathānisaṃsanti ‘‘sītaṃ uṇhaṃ paṭihanatī’’tiādinā (cūḷava. 295, 315) āvasathapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ānisaṃsaṃ. Satipaṭilābhikanti jotipālatthere lāmakaṃ ṭhānaṃ otiṇṇamatte mahābodhipallaṅke pana sabbaññutaṃ paṭivijjhituṃ patthanaṃ katvā pāramiyo pūrento āgato. Tādisassa nāma pamādavihāro na yuttoti yathā kassapo bhagavā bodhisattassa satiṃ paṭilabhituṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ kathesi, tathā ayaṃ bhagavā tameva pubbenivāsapaṭisaṃyuttakathaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ ghaṭikārasuttaṃ (ma. ni. 2.282) kathesi. Cattāro dhammuddeseti – ‘‘upanīyati loko addhuvo, atāṇo loko anabhissaro, assako loko sabbaṃ pahāya gamanīyaṃ, ūno loko atitto taṇhādāso cā’’ti (ma. ni. 2.305) ime cattāro dhammuddese kathesi. Kāmañcete dhammuddesā raṭṭhapālasutte (ma. ni. 2.304) āyasmatā raṭṭhapālattherena rañño korabyassa kathitā, te pana bhagavato eva āharitvā therena tattha kathitāti vuttaṃ ‘‘raṭṭhapālasutte’’tiādi. Tathā hi vuttaṃ sutte – ‘‘atthi kho, mahārāja, tena bhagavatā jānatā passatā arahatā sammāsambuddhena cattāro dhammuddesā uddiṭṭhā’’tiādi (ma. ni. 2.305) pānakānisaṃsakathanti ‘‘aggihuttaṃ mukhaṃ yaññā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 2.400; su. ni. 573) anumodanaṃ vatvā puna pakiṇṇakakathāvasena pānakapaṭisaṃyuttaṃ ānisaṃsakathaṃ kathesi. Ekībhāve ānisaṃsaṃ kathesi, yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ ‘‘atha kho bhagavā āyasmantaṃ bhaguṃ dhammiyā kathāya sandassesī’’tiādi (ma. ni. 3.238). Anantanayanti aparimāṇadesanānayaṃ appicchatādipaṭisaṃyuttaṃ dhammiṃ kathaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘puṇṇa, ayampi appicchakathāyevā’’tiādi bahūhi pariyāyehi nānānayaṃ deseti. Kathaṃ tathā desitaṃ thero aññāsīti āha ‘‘paṭisambhidāpattassa…pe… ahosī’’ti.
七清净问的注释巴利
Sattavisuddhipañhavaṇṇanā
256 “从那时起”:当出生地的比丘们在导师面前称赞那位长老的功德时,就是从那个时候开始。“成为仰头张望、从背后一路跟随”:应当理解为,这是长老出于恭敬,在遇见(导师)时便这样跟随。正如经文里也说“也许……”,以及“急匆匆的样子”。然而,注释书里说“躲在一个地方”,这并不合理。法将怎么可能不知道那位长老坐的地方,还需要用神通才能知道呢?“他会不会没看到我就走了”——这种想法同样也只是出于恭敬。因为前来拜见导师的弟子——即便是阿若憍陈如尊者——也绝不可能没见到住在那里、与导师同在的法将就离开。“为了昼住”:这里是表示目的的业格,所以注释说“为了昼住”。巴利
256.Tatopaṭṭhāyāti. Yadā jātibhūmakā bhikkhū satthu sammukhā therassa vaṇṇaṃ bhāsiṃsu, tato paṭṭhāya. Sīsānulokī hutvā piṭṭhito piṭṭhito anubandhanaṃ therena samāgame ādaravasena katanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Tathā hi vuttaṃ pāṭhe ‘‘appeva nāmā’’tiādi, ‘‘taramānarūpo’’ti ca. Yaṃ pana vuttaṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘ekasmiṃ ṭhāne nilīna’’ntiādi, taṃ akāraṇaṃ. Na hi dhammasenāpati tassa therassa nisinnaṭṭhānaṃ abhiññāñāṇena jānituṃ na sakkoti. ‘‘Kacci nu kho maṃ adisvāva gamissatī’’ti ayampi cintā ādaravasenevāti yuttaṃ. Na hi satthāraṃ daṭṭhuṃ āgato sāvako api āyasmā aññātakoṇḍañño satthukappaṃ dhammasenāpatiṃ tattha vasantaṃ adisvāva gacchanako nāma atthi. Divāvihāranti sampadāne upayogavacananti āha ‘‘divāvihāratthāyā’’ti.
257 “前话”是指最初的交谈。“未令住立”是指还没有被发起。后话不生起,就是说后面该说的话没有机会出现。他以所见相印证的方式,询问了七种清净。所谓“智见清净”,就是圣道。因为在这之后还有应当证得的东西,所以说“即使安住在四遍净戒等当中,梵行也还没有达到顶点”。正因为梵行还没有达到顶点,所以他全部拒绝了:连第七个问题也拒绝了,至于其余的问题,根本就不用说了。巴利
257.Purimakathāyāti paṭhamālāpe. Appatiṭṭhitāyāti nappavattitāya. Pacchimakathā na jāyatīti pacchā vattabbakathāya avasaro na hoti. Satta visuddhiyo pucchi diṭṭhasaṃsandanavasena. Ñāṇadassanavisuddhi nāma ariyamaggo. Yasmā tato uttarimpi pattabbaṃ attheva, tasmā ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlādīsu ṭhitassapi brahmacariyavāso matthakaṃ na pāpuṇātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tasmāti brahmacariyavāsassa matthakaṃ appattattā. Sabbaṃ paṭikkhipīti sattamampi pañhaṃ paṭikkhipi, itaresu vattabbameva natthi.
“无因般涅槃”说的是无余涅槃。现在为了用另一种方式说明无取著般涅槃,才说了“二分”等话。其中,“执取之取”指的是坚固执持的那种取,所以说“欲取等”。“缘取”指的是任何一种缘。因为缘会执取自己的果,以执取的方式抓取,所以称为“取”。因此说“所谓缘取……就是诸缘”。依据“无取而心从诸漏解脱”这句话,阿拉汉果被称为无取著般涅槃。而且它不与取相应:既不是与取结合,也不是与取一起生起。也不执取任何法:不以任何法为所缘而执取。已般涅槃:因为它发生在以最上道断除烦恼的般涅槃究竟终点。他们把无取著般涅槃就指为不死界本身;并且说明,正如不死界没有任何缘一样,如此证得者也没有任何缘。为了显示这种意义上的无因般涅槃,说了“此是内”等。接着他又开始提问,想要从自性上确立无取著般涅槃。巴利
Appaccayaparinibbānanti anupādisesanibbānamāha. Idāni pakārantarenapi anupādāparinibbānaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dvedhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha gahaṇūpādānanti daḷhaggahaṇabhūtaṃ upādānaṃ . Tenāha ‘‘kāmupādānādika’’nti. Paccayūpādānanti yaṃ kiñci paccayamāha. So hi attano phalaṃ upādiyati upādānavasena gaṇhatīti upādānanti vuccati. Tenāha ‘‘paccayūpādānaṃ nāma…pe… paccayā’’ti. ‘‘Anupādāya āsavehi cittaṃ vimuccatī’’ti vacanato (mahāva. 28, 30) arahattaphalaṃ anupādāparinibbānanti kathenti. Na ca upādānasampayuttanti upādānehi etaṃ na sahitaṃ nāpi upādānehi saha pavatti hutvā. Na ca kañci dhammaṃ upādiyatīti kassaci dhammassa ārammaṇakaraṇavasena na upādiyati . Parinibbutanteti aggamaggena kātabbakilesaparinibbānapariyosānante jātattā. Amatadhātumeva anupādāparinibbānaṃ kathenti, kathentānañca yathā tassa koci paccayo nāma natthi, evaṃ adhigatopi yathā koci paccayo nāma na hoti, tathā parinibbānaṃ apaccayaparinibbānanti dassento ‘‘ayaṃ anto’’tiādimāha. Puna pucchaṃ ārabhi anupādāparinibbānaṃ sarūpato patiṭṭhāpetukāmo.
258 “在一切转起中”:意思是在一切问答的转起中,也就是在一切问句段落中。“只是有执取的法”:“执取”是指以“这是我的”等方式抓取,与执取一起,就是“有执取”,意思是可被执取的法。由于没有依止于还灭的人存在,他只是随顺轮回而行,所以叫“随顺轮回”。因此说“连四遍净戒的程度都没有”。然而,如果有人安住在以还灭为依止的四种戒上,他也有资格被称为“在这些法之外”。巴利
258.Sabbaparivattesūti sabbesu pañhaparivattanesu, pañhavāresūti attho. Sagahaṇadhammamevāti ‘‘etaṃ mamā’’tiādinā gaṇhatīti gahaṇaṃ, saha gahaṇenāti sagahaṇaṃ, upādāniyanti attho. Vivaṭṭasannissitassa abhāvato vaṭṭameva anugatoti vaṭṭānugato. Tenāha ‘‘catupārisuddhisīlamattassapi abhāvato’’ti. Yo pana catubbidhe vivaṭṭūpanissaye sīle ṭhito, sopi ‘‘aññatra imehi dhammehī’’ti vattabbataṃ arahati.
《七车经》的注释巴利
Sattarathavinītavaṇṇanā
259 这是一个从格表达,就像在“直到下面台阶的身体”等说法里那样。“目的”就是它的用意。在这里,心清净以戒清净为目的,因为戒清净就是它的目标。戒清净的作用可以说已经完成了,因为它能导向定;能导向定的戒清净,才叫作戒清净。“在一切句当中”:也就是在“心清净只是为了见清净”等一切句当中,应该这样理解:安住在见清净的人,心清净的作用就已经完成了,等等。巴利
259.Nissakkavacanametaṃ ‘‘yāva heṭṭhimasopānakaḷevarā’’tiādīsu viya. Atthoti payojanaṃ. Cittavisuddhi hettha sīlavisuddhiṃ payojeti tassa tadatthattā. Sīlavisuddhikiccaṃ kataṃ nāma hoti samādhisaṃvattanato. Samādhisaṃvattanikā hi sīlavisuddhi nāma. Sabbapadesūti ‘‘cittavisuddhi yāvadeva diṭṭhivisuddhatthā’’tiādīsu sabbapadesu, diṭṭhivisuddhiyaṃ ṭhitassa cittavisuddhakiccaṃ kataṃ nāma hotītiādinā yojetabbaṃ.
就像舍卫城必须越过,有身城也必须越过一样;萨祇城必须到达,涅槃城也必须到达一样。就像紧急事务生起的时候,正是必须在第九刹那证得现观之事的生起时刻。正如国王乘第七辆车到了萨祇城的内宫门口下车时,他的事情还不算完成;等到他被亲友眷属围绕,享用美味饮食之后,事情才算完成。同样,当瑜伽行者以知见清净断除烦恼,在成就那些烦恼止息与断除的圣果圆满之时,现观之事才算完成。因此才说:“瑜伽行者的……时刻,应当视为……。”在这里,所谓“五十种以上善法”,是指在一次心识生起中包含的触等五十余种无过法;所谓“于灭之卧处”,是指“于涅槃的安息处”。巴利
Sāvatthinagaraṃ viya sakkāyanagaraṃ atikkamitabbattā. Sāketanagaraṃ viya nibbānanagaraṃ pāpuṇitabbattā . Accāyikassa kiccassa uppādakālo viya navameneva khaṇena pattabbassa abhisamayakiccassa upādakālo. Yathā rañño sattamena rathavinītena sākete antepuradvāre oruḷhassa na tāva kiccaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ nāma hoti, saṃvidhātabbasaṃvidhānaṃ ñātimittagaṇaparivutassa surasabhojanaparibhoge niṭṭhitaṃ nāma siyā, evametaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhiyā kilese khepetvā tesaṃyeva paṭippassaddhipahānasādhakaariyaphalasamaṅgikāle abhisamayakiccaṃ niṭṭhitaṃ nāma hoti. Tenāha ‘‘yogino…pe… kālo daṭṭhabbo’’ti. Tattha paropaṇṇāsa kusaladhammā nāma cittuppādapariyāpannā phassādayo paropaṇṇāsa anavajjadhammā. Nirodhasayaneti nibbānasayane.
“清净”也好,“论事”也好,在意义上是一回事,只是用词不同而已。为了说明它们在意义上没有差别,才以“如此”开头。说“具寿富楼那解答了十个论事”,意思是他在解答七清净的同时也就解答了十个论事,因为两者在意义上并无不同。由此也应知道:法将舍利弗长老询问七清净,就是在询问十个论事——这个道理也已经说到了。结尾的“问题”指的是问句。那么,他是知道了什么才问的呢?他是以清净为切入点来问论事的,究竟是知道了什么才这样问?向这位通达十种论事的长老问清净时,他是在该问的地方发问,也就是在恰当的范围内发问,像一个善于选择渡口的人;还是像一个想喝水却被断崖绝壁挡住、不善择渡口的人,在不该问的地方、不恰当的范围内发问呢?——这是把前后文连起来理解。按照这个思路,在回答的部分也应当这样理解其含义。为了说明展开这番探究的目的,先说了“成为善于选择渡口的人”等话。接着,为了表明即使清净与论事在意义上相同,仍有这样一个差别应当了知,所以说了“然而……”等话。这里的“那”是指前面所说的“简略的、详细的”,应当依照现在所说的这种方式来理解。巴利
‘‘Visuddhiyo’’ti vā ‘‘kathāvatthūnī’’ti vā atthato ekaṃ, byañjanameva nānanti tesaṃ atthato anaññabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘itī’’ti āraddhaṃ. Āyasmā puṇṇo dasa kathāvatthūni vissajjesīti satta visuddhiyo nāma vissajjantopi dasa kathāvatthūni vissajjesi tesaṃ atthato anaññattā. Eteneva dhammasenāpati sāriputtatthero satta visuddhiyo pucchanto dasa kathāvatthūni pucchīti ayampi attho vuttovāti veditabbo. Nti pañhaṃ. Kiṃ jānitvā pucchīti visuddhipariyāyena kathāvatthūni pucchāmīti kiṃ jānitvā pucchi. Dasakathāvatthulābhinaṃ theraṃ visuddhiyo pucchanto pucchitaṭṭhāneyeva pucchanena kiṃ titthakusalo vā pana hutvā visayasmiṃ pucchi, udāhu pānīyatthikamatitthehi chinnataṭehi pātento viya atitthakusalo hutvā apucchitabbaṭṭhāne avisayasmiṃ pucchīti yojanā. Iminā nayena vissajjanapakkhepi atthayojanā veditabbā. Yadatthamassa vicāraṇā āraddhā, taṃ dassentena ‘‘titthakusalo hutvā’’tiādiṃ vatvā visuddhikathāvatthūnaṃ atthato anaññattepi ayaṃ viseso veditabboti dassetuṃ ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tadamināti yaṃ ‘‘saṃkhittaṃ, vitthiṇṇa’’nti ca vuttaṃ, taṃ iminā idāni vuccamānena nayena vidhinā veditabbaṃ.
戒清净是诸清净中单独列出的一项。在十种论事里,有四种论事属于戒清净,因为如果离开了少欲等品质,戒清净就不可能成立。在“少欲论”等当中,是以论题作为标题来统摄十种论事。又或者,因为应当被讲述,所以“事”被称为“论事”。这样看来,从助益的角度或从本质的角度,都应当理解这四种论事被归入戒清净。三种论事被归入心清净,道理也是一样。五种清净就是:名色分别智是见清净,见到有因缘的名色是度疑清净,舍弃观的随烦恼之后生起的观智是道非道智见清净,生灭智等九种智是行道智见清净,圣道智是智见清净——这就是五种清净。巴利
Ekā sīlavisuddhīti visuddhīsu visuṃ ekā sīlavisuddhi. Dasasu kathāvatthūsu cattāri kathāvatthūni hutvā āgatā appicchatādīhi vinā sīlavisuddhiyā asambhavato. Appicchakathātiādīsu kathāsīsena dasakathāvatthu gahitaṃ. Kathetabbattā vā vatthu kathāvatthūti vuttaṃ. Evañca upakārato, sabhāvato vā catunnaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ sīlavisuddhisaṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Tiṇṇaṃ kathāvatthūnaṃ cittavisuddhisaṅgahepi eseva nayo. Pañca visuddhiyoti nāmarūpaparicchedo diṭṭhivisuddhi, sappaccayanāmarūpadassanaṃ kaṅkhāvitaraṇavisuddhi, vipassanupakkilese pahāya uppannaṃ vipassanāñāṇaṃ maggāmaggañāṇadassanavisuddhi, udayabbayañāṇādi navavidhañāṇaṃ paṭipadāñāṇadassanavisuddhi, ariyamaggañāṇaṃ ñāṇadassanavisuddhīti imā pañca visuddhiyo.
260 “欢喜”:是指对紧接着将要宣说的内容感到欢喜。“以非处的计度”:是用不成立的理由作推想,也就是把当时不可能存在的情形设想出来,然后用言语说出来。“常相见者”:是指经常见到的人,意思是必定能见到的人。巴利
260.Sammoditunti anantaraṃ vuccamānena sammodituṃ. Aṭṭhānaparikappenāti akāraṇassa vatthuno parikappanena tadā asambhavantaṃ atthaṃ parikappetvā vacanena. Abhiṇhadassanassāti niccadassanassa, niyatadassanassāti attho.
“抬高”:是因为其功德被宣说,所以加以称扬。“长老的”:指具寿富楼那长老。在这个地方、这个因由下,仅仅这一个词,就成了在声闻的境界中显示他不共他人的功德的标志。现在,为了让这个意思更加清楚明白,才说了“因为大臣们……”等话。“表示恭敬”:就是表达尊重和礼敬。巴利
Ukkhipīti guṇato kathitabhāvena ukkaṃseti. Therassāti āyasmato puṇṇattherassa. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne imasmiṃ kāraṇe ekapadeneva sāvakavisaye anaññasādhāraṇaguṇāvikaraṇanimittaṃ. Idāni tamevatthaṃ pākaṭataraṃ kātuṃ ‘‘amaccañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Apacāyamānoti pūjayanto.
因为经文里说“随着一个一个地询问而问”,所以这里用审察的方式问道:“到底是提问难,还是回答难呢?” “使其成为有因”,就是辨明合理与不合理。“有缘由”,是同一个意思的另一种说法。“提问也是”,意思是像这样依据正法,自己先把握住应当问的含义之后再发问,所以提问也是沉重而困难的。“回答也是”,意思是依据正法来回答也是困难的。因为这样回答,才能让智者的心感到满意。开示就这样顺着相应的理路而圆满结束:因为开示开头显示了具备资具的戒,中间显示了定,最后显示了达到自在境界的慧,所以开示得以圆满完成。巴利
‘‘Anumassa anumassa pucchitā’’ti vuttattā vicāraṇavasenāha ‘‘kiṃ pana pañhassa pucchanaṃ bhāriyaṃ udāhu vissajjana’’nti. Sahetukaṃ katvāti yuttāyuttaṃ katvā. Sakāraṇanti tasseva vevacanaṃ. Pucchanampīti evaṃ sahadhammena pucchitabbamatthaṃ sayaṃ sampādetvā pucchanampi bhāriyaṃ dukkaraṃ. Vissajjanampīti sahadhammena vissajjanampi dukkaraṃ. Evañhi vissajjento viññūnaṃ cittaṃ ārādhetīti. Yathānusandhināva desanā niṭṭhitāādito saparikkhāraṃ sīlaṃ, majjhe samādhiṃ, ante vasībhāvappattaṃ paññaṃ dassetvā desanāya niṭṭhāpitattāti.
第5篇 诱饵经的注释巴利
5. Nivāpasuttavaṇṇanā
261 261. “被撒下”就是诱饵;靠诱饵过活,或者以诱饵为食的,就是设饵者,也就是用诱饵引诱鹿再加以捕获的捕鹿人。“草籽等”指用作诱饵的草籽。“播种处”就像谷物一样,因为具有应当被播下的意义,所以叫播种处。它们会想:“像我们这样,别的还有谁能得到这样的好东西呢?”由此便生起骄慢。“放逸失念的状态”指没有猜疑、没有恐惧的状态。因为畜生在不同种类的强壮畜生所住的地方,往往心怀警惕、恐惧不安而不放逸,尤其是在捕鹿人等人靠近的地方;然而一旦被味爱束缚,它们就会陷入放逸。“此处被撒下”就是诱饵,撒诱饵的地方就是诱饵场。因此经文说“在诱饵场”。为了说明“可以为所欲为”这句话的含义,才说了“传说有一处”等故事。其中,“犹如野粳米林”就像野粳米的聚集一样。所谓野粳米,就是林中自然生长的稻类。“犹如云团”就像云的堆积。“成一块”指像合在一起一样,没有空隙。“走开”指心生猜疑恐惧之后便离开。“摇着耳朵”是为了让那些没有疑心的人看到它们欢喜的样子。“圆形的灌木丛”指呈圆形分布的灌木丛。巴利
261. Nivappatīti nivāpo, nivāpaṃ vatteti, nivāpabhojanaṃ vā etassāti nevāpiko, nivāpena mige palobhetvā gaṇhanakamāgaviko. Tiṇabījānīti nivāpatiṇabījāni. Vappanti sassaṃ viya vapitabbaṭṭhena vappaṃ. ‘‘Mayaṃ viya aññe ke īdisaṃ labhissantī’’ti mānamadaṃ āpajjissanti. Vissaṭṭhasatibhāvanti anussaṅkitaparisaṅkitabhāvaṃ. Tiracchānā hi vijātiyabalavatiracchānavasanaṭṭhānesu sāsaṅkā ubbiggahadayā appamattā honti visesato māgavikādimanussūpacāre, rasataṇhāya pana baddhā pamādaṃ āpajjassanti. Nivapati etthāti nivāpo, nivāpabhūmi nivāpaṭṭhānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘nivāpaṭṭhāne’’ti. ‘‘Yathākāmakaraṇīyā’’ti vuttamatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘ekaṃ kirā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha nīvāravanaṃ viyāti nīvārassa samūho viya. Nīvāro nāma araññe sayaṃjātavīhijāti. Meghamālā viyāti meghaghaṭā viya. Ekagghananti ekajjhaṃ viya aviraṭṭhaṃ. Pakkamantīti āsaṅkaparisaṅkā hutvā pakkamanti. Kaṇṇe cālayamānāti anāsaṅkantānaṃ pahaṭṭhākāradassanaṃ. Maṇḍalagumbanti maṇḍalakākārena ṭhitaṃ gumbaṃ.
262 设想:是以譬喻的方式进行设想。把鹿调伏到能随自己的意愿活动,这种能力就叫自在。这自在本身,从“能成办”的意义上说是神变,从“能彰显”的意义上说是威力。巴利
262.Kappetvāti upamābhāvena parikappetvā. Mige attano vase vattāpanaṃ vasībhāvo. So eva ijjhanaṭṭhena iddhi, pabhāvanaṭṭhena ānubhāvo.
263 263.「因恐惧而受用」:意思是带着恐惧,在恐惧中受用诱饵。「强力精进」:指身体的力量和奋起的精进力。不过在义注中,力本身就是精进。而「力」是指身体的力量,从含义上说,它就是通过作意和心路不断来回流动的风,所以被说为「前后往来流动的风界」。巴利
263.Bhayena bhogatoti bhayena saha sabhayaṃ nivāpaparibhogato. Balavīriyanti kāyabalañca uṭṭhānavīriyañca. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana balameva vīriyaṃ. Balanti ca sarīrabalaṃ, tañca atthato manasikāramaggehi aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇakavātoti vuttaṃ ‘‘aparāparaṃ sañcaraṇavāyodhātū’’ti.
264 “有学诡诈者”:指惯于欺骗的人,也就是骗子。“如同具神通者”:如同拥有威神力的人。“超越常人者”:指超越常人的人,即大人物。因此说“诸夜叉”。“四周有地方”:指四周都有区域,是拥有广大空间的住处。而它之所以有区域,是因为空间广大,所以说“广大的空间”。巴利
264.Sikkhitakerāṭikāti paricitasāṭheyyā, vañcakāti attho. Iddhimanto viya ānubhāvavanto viya. Pacurajanehi parabhūtā jātāti parajanā, mahābhūtā. Tenāha ‘‘yakkhā’’ti. Samantā sappadesanti samantato padesavantaṃ vipulokāsasannivāsaṭṭhānaṃ. Tassa pana sappadesatā mahāokāsatāyāti vuttaṃ ‘‘mahantaṃ okāsa’’nti.
265 他们会撞击:意思是说,以“种种怖畏所生”这样的想生起的方式,让心去思量、让他们害怕。他们会完全舍弃:意思是他们会离欲、放下。年老:指从出生以来就已年老,也就是衰老。衰弱:指因为生病,或者天生就缺乏力气。巴利
265.Ghaṭṭessantīti ‘‘sabhayasamuṭṭhāna’’nti saññādānavasena cittaṃ cetessanti, tāsessantīti attho. Pariccajissantīti nibbisissanti. Mahallakoti jātiyā mahallako jiṇṇo. Dubbaloti byādhivasena, pakatiyā vā balavirahito.
267 267. 或者,因为与诱饵相似,所以叫“诱饵”。又或者,因为它属于世间,会被烦恼所触及,所以叫“世间诱饵”。又或者,因为它在轮回中本身就是诱饵,所以是“轮回诱饵”的。所谓“令其随己意转”,就是说他凭借五欲功德,对那些贪著五欲功德的众生,依着他们那份贪著本身,使他们受自己掌控。因此说:巴利
267. Nivāpasadisatāya nivāpoti vā. Lokapariyāpannaṃ hutvā kilesehi āmasitabbatāya lokāmisānīti vā. Vaṭṭe āmisabhūtattā vaṭṭāmisabhūtānaṃ. Vasaṃ vattetīti kāmaguṇehi kāmaguṇe giddhe satte tasseva gedhassa vasena attano vase vattetīti. Tenāha –
有一个行走在虚空中的套索,那就是到处游走的心。
我要用这个来折磨你,沙门,你逃不出我的手掌心。巴利
‘‘Antalikkhacaro pāso, yvāyaṃ carati mānaso; Tena taṃ bādhayissāmi, na me samaṇa mokkhasī’’ti. (saṃ. ni. 1.151; mahāva. 33);
Ayanti指的是第一个鹿群的譬喻。这是针对林居者虽然已经具足正念出家,却仍携带着妻儿离家出家,心里牵挂着他人所给、他人所施之类的事,而说“带着妻儿出家”。巴利
Ayanti paṭhamamigajātūpamā. Vānapatthassa satova papañcaparadattikādisaputtadāranikkhamanaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘saputtabhariyapabbajjāyā’’ti.
268 268. 这里所说的“心解脱”,特指心从欲乐中解脱出来,所以经文说“所谓心解脱……中略……生起的意乐”。那些舍弃了欲乐之后又重新沉溺其中的人,就是第二类沙门、婆罗门,他们被比喻为第二群鹿。巴利
268. Kāmato cittassa vimutti idha cetovimuttīti adhippetāti āha ‘‘cetovimutti nāma…pe… uppannaajjhāsayo’’ti. Kāme vissajjetvā puna tattha nimuggatāya dutiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇā dutiyamigajātūpamā vuttā.
269 针对第三类沙门婆罗门,他这样问“他们又做了什么?”,用意是:他们像已经舍弃了被限定的诸欲那样,舍弃之后便安住在那种状态,不像第二类那样又沉溺其中。为了指出另一类人虽然没有直接沉溺于欲乐,却以间接的方式沉溺,并且被见网所覆盖,所以说了“村庄、市镇、地方、王都”等。又因为见的罗网是跟随渴爱的罗网而来的,所以他说“被魔的见网包围后”。巴利
269. Tatiyasamaṇabrāhmaṇā yathāpariccatte kāme pariccajitvā evaṃ ṭhitā, na dutiyā viya tattha nimuggāti adhippāyena ‘‘kiṃ pana te akaṃsū’’ti pucchati. Itare kāmaṃ ujukaṃ kāmaguṇesu na nimuggā, pariyāyena pana nimuggā diṭṭhijālena ca ajjhotthaṭāti dassento ‘‘gāmanigamajanapadarājadhāniyo’’tiādimāha. Diṭṭhijālampi taṇhājālānugatamevāti āha ‘‘mārassa pāpimato diṭṭhijālena parikkhipitvā’’ti.
271 271. 应当这样理解:蕴魔、烦恼魔、行作魔、天魔这些魔,在这里都被“魔”这个说法涵盖在内了。“弄瞎眼睛”,就是让魔看不见。因此才说“以观为近因的禅那”等等。虽然魔并不知道任何一位比丘——哪怕是已入禅那的比丘——的心是依着什么所缘在运转,但这里是就所说的这位比丘而言,才说“以观为近因的禅那”。正是通过这个方式,才说“没有弄瞎魔罗的眼睛”等等,也就是前面所说的那种方式。“归于不见”这里也是同样的道理。而“眼所立之处”,这里指的是所缘,因为心执取那个所缘才运转,所以他说“无所立、无所缘”。“彼”就是魔罗。“见已”,是因为见到了。由于通过圣道现观四圣谛,诸漏还没有穷尽。实际上,诸漏是在证果的那个刹那才称为已尽的。巴利
271. Khandhakilesābhisaṅkhāramārā vā idha māraggahaṇena gahitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Akkhīni bhindi daṭṭhuṃ asamatthabhāvāpādanena. Tenāha ‘‘vipassanāpādakajjhāna’’ntiādi. Kiñcāpi māro yaṃ kiñci jhānaṃ samāpannassapi bhikkhuno cittaṃ imaṃ nāma ārammaṇaṃ nissāya vattatīti na jānāti, idhādhippetassa pana bhikkhuno vasena ‘‘vipassanāpādakajjhāna’’nti vuttaṃ. Teneva pariyāyenāti ‘‘na mārassa akkhīni bhindī’’ti evamādinā yathāvuttapariyāyena. Adassanaṃ gatoti etthāpi eseva nayo. Cakkhussa padaṃ patiṭṭhāti ca idha ārammaṇaṃ adhippetaṃ taṃ pariggayha pavattanatoti āha ‘‘appatiṭṭhaṃ nirārammaṇa’’nti. Soti māro. Disvāti dassanahetu. Yasmā maggena catusaccadassanahetu āsavā na parikkhīṇā. Phalakkhaṇe hi te khīṇāti vuccantīti.
所谓“世间”,是指有情世间和行世间。“以执著、系著的状态”:就是以黏着的状态,以及以特别的方式紧紧执取的状态。“或者”等语:这是按照解说的方式来解释“爱”这个词。它指出“爱”这个词。所谓“遍布”:就是广泛散布,在色等三界诸法中以遍满的方式散布。这只是把前面那个词里的字母 t 改成 ṭ 而说出来的。“广大”:就是宽广。“能忍”:就是能到处周旋、能够忍受。因为一个生起贪染的人,即使被贪爱的对象用脚踢,也能忍受。也有人把“退缩”或“悸动”说成是“能忍”。“散乱其心”:就是借着显示种种欲乐中的这样那样的功德,以各种方式把心从趋向出离的运转中拉散、收束起来;或者也可以解释为:“毒”是指苦,它把苦带来、引导给它,所以称为散乱其心者。“欺诳”:因为它让人把无常等执取为常等,所以它是欺诳者。“毒根”:因为它能成为那产生苦的业的因,所以称为毒根;或者,毒也就是苦,苦苦等感受是它的根本,因此称为毒根。“毒果”:因为它是苦的集起,所以苦就是它的果,因此称为毒果。对渴爱来说,它所执取的色等对象,纯粹是对于苦的受用,而不是对于不死的受用,所以说它是“毒受用”。在所有这些解释中,应当知道,都是依靠词源学来成就这些词的含义的。不过,在这里为了显示其中最主要的含义,他又说了“或者,广大的”等等。“已度、超出”:这是通过加上前缀来扩充单词的含义。或者说,毫无剩余地全部度过了,就是“已度”;通过一道道圣道向上完全超脱了,就是“超出”。至于这里在义理上没有加以分析的部分,就很容易理解了。巴利
Loketi sattaloke saṅkhāraloke ca. Sattavisattabhāvenāti laggabhāvena ceva savisesaṃ āsattabhāvena ca. Atha vātiādinā niddesanayavasena (mahāni. 3, cūḷani. mettagūmāṇavapucchāniddesa 22, 23; cūḷani. khaggavisāṇasuttaniddesa 124) visattikāpadaṃ niddisati. Visatāti vitthaṭā rūpādīsu tebhūmakadhammesu byāpanavasena visaṭāti purimavacanameva takārassa ṭakāraṃ katvā vuttaṃ. Visālāti vipulā. Visakkatīti parisakkati sahati. Ratto hi rāgavatthunā pādena tāliyamānopi sahati. Osakkanaṃ, vipphandanaṃ vā visakkanantipi vadanti. Visaṃharatīti yathā tathā kāmesu ānisaṃsaṃ dassentī vividhehi ākārehi nekkhammābhimukhappavattito cittaṃ saṃharati saṅkhipati, visaṃ vā dukkhaṃ, taṃ harati upanetīti attho. Visaṃvādikāti aniccādiṃ niccādito gaṇhāpentī visaṃvādikā hoti. Dukkhanibbattakassa kammassa hetubhāvato visamūlā, visaṃ vā dukkhadukkhādibhūtā vedanā mūlaṃ etissāti visamūlā. Dukkhasamudayattā visaṃ phalaṃ etissāti visaphalā. Taṇhāya rūpādikassa dukkhasseva paribhogo hoti, na amatassāti sā ‘‘visaparibhogā’’ti vuttā. Sabbattha niruttivasena saddasiddhi veditabbā. Yo panettha padhāno attho, taṃ dassetuṃ puna ‘‘visālā vā panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nittiṇṇo uttiṇṇoti upasaggavasena padaṃ vaḍḍhitaṃ. Niravasesato vā tiṇṇo nittiṇṇo. Tena tena maggena uddhamuddhaṃ tiṇṇo uttiṇṇo. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
《陷阱堆经》注释中,对隐晦含义的阐明到这里就结束了。巴利
Nivāpasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
6. 《帕萨罗西经》的注释巴利
6. Pāsarāsisuttavaṇṇanā
272 这里“善哉”一词是请求的意思,不像“善哉,贤友”等处的用法那样表示随喜赞叹等,所以注释者说“请求”。因此经文里才说“愿我们得到”等话。他们为什么不能直接前往?因为诸佛确实极为尊贵,是至高无上的尊贵者、最殊胜的恭敬对象,不能随随便便就去亲近。所以注释者才说“独行的狮子”等话。巴利
272.Sādhumayanti ettha sādhu-saddo āyācanattho, na ‘‘sādhāvuso’’tiādīsu (saṃ. ni. 1.246; su. ni. 182) viya abhinandanādiatthoti āha ‘‘āyācantā’’ti. Tenāha pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘labheyyāmā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na sakkonti, kasmā? Buddhā hi garū honti, paramagarū uttamaṃ gāravaṭṭhānaṃ, na yathā tathā upasaṅkamanīyā. Tenāha ‘‘ekacāriko sīho’’tiādi.
为了详细解释那句简略说出的“明显的行为”,才说了“确实,凡是……”等话。世尊是不是一切时候都这样做呢?并不是一切时候都这样做。为了指出他什么时候这样做,才说了“世尊在初成正觉时”等话。“人身”这个词,是用来说明他作为人的生命形态。意思是,在世尊住世期间,并不存在所谓舍弃财富这回事。巴利
‘‘Pākaṭakiriyāyā’’ti saṅkhepena vuttaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘yaṃ hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Bhagavā sabbakālaṃ kimevamakāsīti? Na sabbakālamevamakāsi. Yadā pana akāsi, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘bhagavā paṭhamabodhiya’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Manussattabhāveti iminā purisattabhāvaṃ ulliṅgeti. Dhanapariccāgo kato nāma natthi bhagavato dharamānakāleti adhippāyo.
枯萎的花环和垃圾,就是枯萎了的花环和尘垢。尘垢不会沾到身上,因为他的皮肤极为清净光洁。经中确实这样说过:“因为皮肤极其细滑,所以尘垢不会沾到身上。”既然这样,世尊为什么还要沐浴呢?注释者回答说:“是为了摄取热量。”巴利
Mālākacavaranti milātamālākacavaraṃ. Rajojallaṃ na upalimpati acchatarachavibhāvato. Vuttañhetaṃ ‘‘sukhumattā chaviyā kāye rajojallaṃ na limpatī’’ti. Yadi evaṃ kasmā bhagavā nahāyatīti āha ‘‘utuggahaṇattha’’nti.
所谓“住处”,就是祇园精舍。他们说,二十优奢那是牛鸣声所及距离的四分之一。“有时”,是指在某一位佛陀出世的时代。“不摇动”,就是不变异、不变成别的样子;不过,床座因为大小不同,床脚所安立的地方确实会有增减。巴利
Vihāroti jetavanavihāro. Vīsatiusabhaṃ gāvutassa catuttho bhāgoti vadanti. Kadācīti kasmiñci buddhuppāde. Acalamevāti aparivattameva anaññabhāvato, mañcānaṃ pana appamahantatāhi pādānaṃ patiṭṭhitaṭṭhānassa hānivaḍḍhiyo hontiyeva.
从那些管道中流出的、充满黄金色液体的水流。“沐浴仪轨”是指,先说明“出家者应当这样沐浴”,以此显示沐浴的规矩。因为世尊的身体色泽如同经过精炼的黄金,手脚和指甲像极为清净的珊瑚一样美丽,头发和体毛如同极纯净的蓝宝石珠串,所以世尊的身体在各处闪耀着天然朱砂般的光彩,上方又覆盖着珍贵的宝石珠串,宛如一座行走的金山山顶,光辉夺目。那时,从十力世尊的身体放出六色光芒,向四面八方奔流散布,遍及周围八十肘的范围,犹如散落了宝石珠串、宝石花环和宝石粉末,犹如展开的宝石彩绘金板,犹如正在浇灌的紫胶汁水流,犹如火炬投落的光点纷繁交错,犹如不断散落的迦尼迦罗花和璎珞花,犹如被风势扬起而染上檀香粉末,犹如帝释弓与闪电光网铺展,遍满那处的虚空与风。因此说“此名色地”等。Attha(义)是指譬喻所喻之义。Upamāya(以譬喻)是指“如此者亦有”等,随其所宜而与之相称的譬喻。Kāraṇāni(诸因由)是指阐明譬喻与所喻关系的诸因由。Pūretvā(圆满)是指使描述圆满。Thāmo(力)应知,因为不可说“跳入无岸处”。巴利
Yantanāḷikāhi paripuṇṇasuvaṇṇarasadhārāhi. Nhānavattanti ‘‘pabbajitena nāma evaṃ nhāyitabba’’nti nahānacārittaṃ dassetvā. Yasmā bhagavato sarīraṃ sudhantacāmīkarasamānavaṇṇaṃ suparisodhitapavāḷarucirakaracaraṇāvaraṃ suvisuddhanīlaratanāvaḷisadisakesatanuruhaṃ, tasmā tahaṃ tahaṃ vinissatajātihiṅgulakarasūpasobhitaṃ upari mahaggharatanāvaḷisañchāditaṃ jaṅgamamiva kanakagirisikharaṃ virocittha. Tasmiñca samaye dasabalassa sarīrato nikkhamitvā chabbaṇṇarasmiyo samantato asītihatthappamāṇe padese ādhāvantī vidhāvantī ratanāvaḷiratanadāma-ratanacuṇṇa-vippakiṇṇaṃ viya, pasāritaratanacittakañcanapaṭṭamiva, āsiñcamānalākhārasadhārā-citamiva , ukkāsatanipātasamākulamiva, nirantaraṃ vippakiṇṇa-kaṇikāra-kiṅkiṇika-pupphamiva, vāyuvegasamuddhata-cinapiṭṭhacuṇṇa-rañjitamiva, indadhanu-vijjulatā-vitānasanthatamiva, gaganatalaṃ taṃ ṭhānaṃ pavanañca sammā pharanti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘vaṇṇabhūmi nāmesā’’tiādi. Atthanti upameyyatthaṃ. Upamāyoti ‘‘īdiso ca hotī’’ti yathārahaṃ tadanucchavikā upamā. Kāraṇānīti upamupameyyasambandhavibhāvanāni kāraṇāni. Pūretvāti vaṇṇanaṃ paripuṇṇaṃ katvā. Thāmo veditabbo ‘‘atitthe pakkhando’’ti avattabbattā.
273 耳饰是指身体上形成的圆状斑点。资具是指上衣和僧伽梨。那么这种方式对诸佛的身体也存在吗?不存在。为了表明这只是为了显示威仪而说的,所以说了“然而诸佛”等话。以行进的方式带动身体,叫行进引导。随顺内心意愿而转动,叫意图发动。巴利
273.Kaṇṇikāti sarīragatabindukatāni maṇḍalāni. Parikkhārabhaṇḍanti uttarāsaṅgaṃ saṅghāṭiñca sandhāya vadati. Kiṃ panāyaṃ nayo buddhānampi sarīre hotīti? Na hoti, vattadassanatthaṃ panetaṃ katanti dassetuṃ ‘‘buddhānaṃ panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Gamanavasena kāyassābhinīharaṇaṃ gamanābhihāro. Yathādhippāyāvattanaṃ adhippāyakopanaṃ.
某一种波罗蜜,就是出离波罗蜜。另一些人说是精进波罗蜜。大出离,是指在最后一生中的伟大出离。因为他舍弃了庞大的财富、众多的亲属圈和转轮王的辉煌,为了天与魔在内的世间获得不可思议、不可衡量的广大利益、福祉与安乐而行动,又因其崇高,所以称为大出离。巴利
Aññatarāya pāramiyāti nekkhammapāramiyā. Vīriyapāramiyāti apare. Mahābhinikkhamanassāti mahantassa carimabhave abhinikkhamanassa. Tañhi mahantaṃ bhogakkhandhaṃ mahantañca ñātiparivaṭṭaṃ mahantañca cakkavattisiriṃ pajahitvā sadevakassa lokassa samārakassa ca acinteyyāparimeyyabhedassa mahato atthāya hitāya sukhāya pavattattā mahanīyatāya ca mahantaṃ abhinikkhamananti vuccati.
“前面”这句话,说的是“你们是为什么话题聚坐在一起呢”这个意思。“Kā ca pana vo”这里的“ca”表示区别,借此点出:所问的那个话题已经被搁在一边、说到一半就中断了。“pana”只是说话上的修饰。比丘们聚坐在一起所谈的那个话题,也就是中途插进来的话题,被搁下之后,又特别重新提出来问。“Aññā”是在解释“antarā”这个词的含义。因为“antarā”这个词,像在“地之间”“时间之间”等用法里一样,是“之间”的意思;或者“antarā”就是“中间”的意思。“依十事论”是指:“什么是戒,怎样圆满它,它的杂染和清净是什么”等,依少欲等、依戒等而说的谈论。“圣”是指无过失。或者说,为利益他人者所应依止,故为圣;或者圣者的所行,故为圣。依修习作意而默然,不像某些外道出家者那样以哑默誓戒而默然。第二禅也是圣默然,因为舍断了语行。“根本业处”是指常依止的业处。“禅”是指第二禅。巴利
Purimoti ‘‘katamāya nu kathāya sannisinnā bhavathā’’ti evaṃ vuttaattho. Kā ca pana voti ettha ca-saddo byatireke. Tena yathāpucchitāya kathāya vakkhamānaṃ vippakatabhāvaṃ joteti. Pana-saddo vacanālaṅkāre. Yāya hi kathāya te bhikkhū sannisinnā, sā eva antarākathābhūtā vippakatā visesena puna pucchīyati. Aññāti antarā-saddassa atthamāha. Aññattho hi ayaṃ antarā-saddo ‘‘bhūmantaraṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. nidānakathā) samayantara’’ntiādīsu viya, antarāti vā vemajjheti attho. Dasakathāvatthunissitāti ‘‘kiṃ sīlaṃ nāma, kathañca pūretabbaṃ, kāni cassa saṃkilesavodānānī’’tiādinā appicchādinissitā sīlādinissitā ca kathā. Ariyoti niddoso. Atha vā atthakāmehi araṇīyoti ariyo, ariyānaṃ ayanti vā ariyoti. Bhāvanāmanasikāravasena tuṇhī bhavanti, na ekaccabāhirakapabbajitā viya mūgabbatasamādānena. Dutiyajjhānampi ariyo tuṇhībhāvo vacīsaṅkhārapahānato. Mūlakammaṭṭhānanti pārihāriya kammaṭṭhānampi. Jhānanti dutiyajjhānaṃ.
274 274. 「比丘们,你们聚集在一起的两者」这句话,是依事件因缘而作的开示。为了显示它与后面开示的连结,论主问:「比丘们,有两种遍求——这有什么连结?」「你们的遍求」:指与大出离相关联的法谈,那就是你们的法遍求、法审察,称为圣求。「邪道」:指带来不利的道路。「打破开示的顺序」:指跳过了开示的次第。「法」这个词:像在「不虚妄法、涅槃」等语句中那样,是本性、同义语。「生起的自性」:就是生起的本性。其余诸词也是同样的道理。巴利
274. ‘‘Sannipatitānaṃ vo, bhikkhave, dvaya’’nti (ma. ni. 1.273; udā. 12, 28, 29) aṭṭhuppattivasena desanā pavattāti tassā uparidesanāya sambandhaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, pariyesanāti ko anusandhī’’ti anusandhiṃ pucchati. Ayaṃ tumhākaṃ pariyesanāti yā mahābhinikkhamanapaṭibaddhā dhammī kathā, sā tumhākaṃ dhammapariyesanā dhammavicāraṇā ariyapariyesanā nāma. Apāyamagganti anatthāvahaṃ maggaṃ. Uddesānukkamaṃ bhinditvāti uddesānupubbiṃ laṅghitvā. Dhamma-saddo ‘‘amosadhammaṃ nibbāna’’ntiādīsu viya pakatipariyāyo. Jāyanasabhāvoti jāyanapakatikoti attho. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo.
“在一切处”是指:就像“子与妻”这个词,按照并列复合词的方式构成一个整体,这个道理也适用于“婢与奴”等所有词。后面没有发生词形变化,任何时候都只是黄金,所以叫黄金,也就是金子。因为它的本性是白色的,能让人贪染,所以叫白银,也就是银钱。但这里除了黄金之外,凡是可供享受、受用的银类物品,都算作银。苦依止于此,所以叫依处。所谓“死殁”,是指在一个生命期内五蕴灭尽的那种死亡;而刹那灭则是每一刹那都在灭。因此说“就像众生一样”。“会染污”是指像毒汁一样染污自身。所以世尊说:“比丘们,有五种是黄金的染污,铁、铜……”等等。 “取垢”是指:因为与那些东西结合而变得污秽,以那些导致污秽的事物为缘而执取垢秽。应当这样连接理解:由于衰变,在衰变法那一节中执取了黄金。至于那些在生法一节中也不读作黄金的人,应当看作:就像其余那些在衰变法一节中,通过执取依处,连尚未以自身面貌出现的依处也一并执取了。再者,若从被执持的事物来说,即使不明显,也可以依生、老、死来连接理解。这里以黄金为代表,应当理解为也包括一切非根所系之物,就像以子、妻等为代表,也包括朋友、同事等。巴利
Sabbatthāti yathā ‘‘puttabhariya’’nti dvandasamāsavasena ekattaṃ, esa nayo sabbattha ‘‘dāsidāsa’’ntiādīsu sabbapadesu. Parato vikāraṃ anāpajjitvā sabbadā jātarūpameva hotīti jātarūpaṃ, suvaṇṇaṃ. Dhavalasabhāvatāya rañjīyatīti rajataṃ, rūpiyaṃ. Idha pana suvaṇṇaṃ ṭhapetvā yaṃ kiñci upabhogaparibhogārahaṃ rajataṃteva gahitaṃ. Upadhīyati ettha dukkhanti upadhayo. Cutīsaṅkhātaṃ maraṇanti ekabhavapariyāpannaṃ khandhanirodhasaṅkhātaṃ maraṇamāha. Khaṇikanirodho pana khaṇe khaṇe. Tenāha ‘‘sattānaṃ viyā’’ti. Saṃkilissatīti dūsavisena viya attānaṃ dūsissati. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘pañcime, bhikkhave, jātarūpassa upakkilesā ayo loha’’ntiādi (a. ni. 5.23). Malaṃ gahetvāti yehi sahayogato malinaṃ hoti, tesaṃ malinabhāvapaccayānaṃ vasena malaṃ gahetvā. Jīraṇato jarādhammavāre jātarūpaṃ gahitanti yojanā. Ye pana jātidhammavārepi jātarūpaṃ na paṭhanti, tesaṃ itaresaṃ viya jīraṇadhammavāre sarūpato anāgatampi upadhiggahaṇena gahitamevāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Pariggahe ṭhitānaṃ pana vasena vuccamāne apākaṭānampi jātijarāmaraṇānaṃ vasena yojanā labbhateva. Jātarūpasīsena cettha sabbassapi anindriyabaddhassa gahaṇaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, puttabhariyādiggahaṇena viya mittāmaccādiggahaṇaṃ.
275 这里显示“圣求”有两种复合词的解释:由诸圣者所行的一种寻求,或者诸圣者的寻求。就像“比丘们,这是……”等经文所表明的那样。巴利
275. Ariyehi pariyesanā, ariyānaṃ pariyesanāti vā ariyapariyesanāti samāsadvayaṃ dasseti ‘‘ayaṃ, bhikkhave’’tiādinā.
276 “从根本开始”是指:从最初看清大出离的根本,也就是看清它的过患,从那里开始。因为那些比丘当时聚在一起谈论大出离的话题,而这个话题又是他们谈到一半被打断的,所以世尊就从根本开始,为他们讲述大出离的事。“我也曾经”这句特别的话,是世尊针对自己在最后一生中,智慧还未成熟时,在三座宫殿里享受三种伎乐眷属围绕,那种如同天界成就一般的大富贵;以及出家之后,以精进苦行折磨身体、使身体疲惫。说“追求非圣求”时,也是同样的道理。“五群比丘也”:他们各自原本沉溺于在家的享乐,后来舍弃那些出家,却停留在苦行上;当老师开演转法轮的教导时,他们也舍弃了苦行,转而追求圣求。巴利
276.Mūlato paṭṭhāyāti yaṃ mahābhinikkhamanassa mūlabhāvesuādīnavadassanaṃ, tato paṭṭhāya. Yasmā te bhikkhū tattha mahābhinikkhamanakathāya sannisinnā, sā ca nesaṃ antarākathā vippakatā, tasmā bhagavā tesaṃ mūlato paṭṭhāya mahābhinikkhamanakathaṃ kathetuṃ ārabhi. Ahampi pubbeti visesavacanaṃ aparipakkañāṇena sayaṃ carimabhave tīsu pāsādesu tividhanāṭakaparivārassa dibbasampattisadisāya mahāsampattiyā anubhavanaṃ, abhinikkhamitvā padhānapadahanavasena attakilamathānuyogañca sandhāyāha. Anariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesinti etthāpi eseva nayo. Pañcavaggiyāpīti yathāsakaṃ gihibhogaṃ anuyuttā taṃ pahāya pabbajitvā attakilamathānuyoge ṭhitā satthu dhammacakkapavattanadesanāya (saṃ. ni. 5.1081; mahāva. 13; paṭi. ma. 2.30) tampi pahāya ariyapariyesanaṃ pariyesiṃsūti.
277 “年轻”这个词,在“年幼、幼稚、仰卧的童子”这句里指的是愚笨的小孩;但后面将要说到“具足殊胜的青年期”,所以这里“年轻”指的是青年阶段,因此说“仅仅是青年”。因为那时是初龄,也就是二十九岁。从出生到三十三岁都属于初龄。表达轻蔑含义时用属格,比如“提婆达多哭着出家”。虽然泣就是哭,用“泣面者”已经说明了这一点,但说了那个之后,再用“哭着”这个词,是为了显示由强烈悲痛引发的号泣情形,所以说“哀泣而哭者”。“什么是善”:是在探寻,也就是怎样完全无过失、唯一导向出离地去寻求。“最胜句”:因为希求解脱轮回苦的人绝对应当选取,所以叫“最胜”;因为应当证得,所以叫“句”。由于身材高长而叫“长”,由于眼睛黄褐色而叫“黄褐”,合起来就是“长黄褐”。“法”指律,“随宜”指义。“听已即执取”:就是仅仅听闻他所说的,便执取,使我完全通晓其言语。巴利
277. Kāmaṃ dahara-saddo ‘‘daharaṃ kumāraṃ mandaṃ uttānaseyyaka’’nti (ma. ni. 1.496) ettha bāladārake āgato, ‘‘bhadrena yobbanena samannāgato’’ti pana vakkhamānattā yuvāvatthā idha dahara-saddena vuttāti āha ‘‘taruṇova samāno’’ti. Paṭhamavayena ekūnatiṃsavayattā. Jātiyā hi yāva tettiṃsavayā paṭhamavayo. Anādaratthe sāmivacanaṃ yathā ‘‘devadattassa rudantassa pabbajī’’ti. Kāmaṃ assumuccanaṃ rodanaṃ, taṃ assumukhānanti iminā pakāsitaṃ, taṃ pana vatvā ‘‘rudantāna’’nti vacanaṃ balavasokasamuṭṭhānaṃ ārodanavatthuṃ pakāsetīti āha ‘‘kanditvā rodamānāna’’nti. Kiṃ kusalanti gavesamānoti kinti sabbaso avajjarahitaṃ ekanta niyyānikaṃ pariyesamāno. Varapadanti vaṭṭadukkhanissaraṇatthikehi ekantena varaṇīyaṭṭhena varaṃ, pajjitabbaṭṭhena padaṃ. Tuṅgasarīratāya dīgho, piṅgalacakkhutāya piṅgaloti dīghapiṅgalo. Dhammoti vinayo, samayoti attho. Sutvāva uggaṇhinti tena vuccamānassa savanamatteneva uggaṇhiṃ vācuggataṃ akāsiṃ.
“只是重复说”就是指再一次只是重复说。“他知”就是智,说智就是“智说”,这里指那种智说。因为经文中用了“我说”,所以注释里按第一人称解释成“我知”。“还有许多其他人”:还有许多其他人也知道我的这种状态,会说“这个人知道这个法”,或者说“因为不动摇,所以是坚固的”。像这样说。“得者”:指他这样知道——通过宣说此法,由于大智慧,“这个人是在宣示自己走过的路,不是靠听别人说的”。这里的“他”指菩萨。“他这样想”:心里生起了“不,阿拉罗·迦蓝……”等念头,也就是在思惟。巴利
Paṭilapanamattakenāti puna lapanamattakena. Jānātīti ñāṇo, ñāṇoti vādo ñāṇavādo, taṃ ñāṇavādaṃ. ‘‘Vadāmī’’ti āgatattā aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘jānāmī’’ti uttamapurisavasena attho vutto. Aññepi bahūti aññepi bahū mama tathābhāvaṃ jānantā ‘‘ayaṃ imaṃ dhammaṃ jānātī’’ti, ‘‘akampanīyatāya thiro’’ti vā evaṃ vadanti. Lābhīti aññāsīti dhammassa uddisanena mahāpaññatāya ‘‘ayaṃ attanā gatamaggaṃ pavedeti, na anussutiko’’ti aññāsi. Assāti bodhisattassa. Etadahosīti etaṃ ‘‘na kho āḷāro kālāmo’’tiādi manasi ahosi, cintesīti attho.
因为不依靠较低的等至,就不可能成就更高的等至,所以他说“他让我知道了七种等至”。“应当努力”的意思是应当专心修习。“这样说”就是像这样说出“贤友,我……”等话,意思是他承认自己证得了七种等至。巴利
Heṭṭhimasamāpattīhi vinā uparimasamāpattīnaṃ sampādanassa asambhavato ‘‘satta samāpattiyo maṃ jānāpesī’’ti āha. Payogaṃ kareyyanti bhāvanaṃ anuyuñjeyyanti attho. Evamāhāti evaṃ ‘‘ahaṃ, āvuso’’tiādimāha, sattannaṃ samāpattīnaṃ adhigamaṃ paccaññāsīti attho.
“无嫉妒”就是不嫉妒。他由此对大人生起了净信。菩萨证得那些等至并安住时,因为过去生的串习和智慧的广大,那些等至的趣向和来世归宿都显现在他心中。于是他断定:“这些都属于轮回。”因此他说:“此法不导向厌离……”等等。有些人虽然修离欲的等至也能超越,但那并非究竟的超越,而且本身还在轮回之内,所以它不导向对轮回的厌离;既然不导向厌离,就不导向离欲;不导向灭除贪等恶法;不导向止息;因此,它不导向证知应证知之法……中间省略……不导向涅槃。巴利
Anusūyakoti anissukī. Tena mahāpurise pasādaṃ pavedesi. Bodhisattassa tā samāpattiyo nibbattetvā ṭhitassa purimajātiparicayena ñāṇassa ca mahantatāya tāsaṃ gati ca abhisamparāyo ca upaṭṭhāsi . Tena ‘‘vaṭṭapariyāpannā evetā’’ti nicchayo udapādi. Tenāha ‘‘nāyaṃ dhammo nibbidāyā’’tiādi. Ekaccānaṃ virāgabhāvanāsamatikkamāvahopi neva tesampi accantāya samatikkamāvaho, sayañca vaṭṭapariyāpannoyeva, tasmā neva vaṭṭe nibbindanatthāya, yadaggena na nibbidāya, tadaggena na virajjanatthāya, rāgādīnaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ na nirujjhanatthāya, na upasamatthāya, tasmā taṃ abhiññeyyadhammaṃ na abhijānanatthāya…pe… saṃvattatīti yojanā.
他只是就七种等至中最高的那一种来说,才说“仅至无所有处再生”。因为努力寻求不死之法,而那个法并没有超越生法,所以大士舍弃了它,于是说“而它导向的那个境界……”等等。“从此以后”:当他了知了等至法的去向和归宿时,从此以后。“如蝇”:因为食物中混有苍蝇的缘故。意思是说,他没有想要吃的心。“以极大的精进”:这是指他几天里在那里专心修习,不像其他人那样做遍作准备等事。因为最后有菩萨要证得等至,并不是什么费力的事。“不认为庄严”:就是一次次反复思量,认为“这没有什么用处”。巴利
Yāvadeva ākiñcaññāyatanupapattiyāti sattasu samāpattīsu ukkaṭṭhaṃ gahetvā vadati. Uṭṭhāya samuṭṭhāya acutidhammaṃ pariyesituṃ yuttattā tañca anatikkantajātidhammamevāti mahāsatto pajahatīti āha ‘‘yañca ṭhānaṃ pāpetī’’tiādi. Tato paṭṭhāyāti yadā samāpattidhammassa gatiñca abhisamparāyañca abbhaññāsi, tato paṭṭhāya. Makkhikāvasenāti bhojanassa makkhikāmissatāvasena. Manaṃ na uppādeti bhuñjitunti adhippāyo. Mahantena ussāhenāti idaṃ katipāhaṃ tattha bhāvanānuyogamattaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, na aññesaṃ viya kasiṇaparikammādikaraṇaṃ. Na hi antimabhavikabodhisattānaṃ samāpattinibbattane bhāriyaṃ nāma. Analaṅkaritvāti anu anu alaṃkatvā punappunaṃ ‘‘iminā na kiñci payojana’’nti katvā.
278 仅仅通过言语就以为已经掌握了,这里的含义应当依照前面所说的方式来理解。巴利
278.Vācāya uggahitamattovāti ettha pubbe vuttanayānusārena attho veditabbo.
279 就像大沙滩一样,因为沙堆广大,所以成了大沙滩岸,这就是它的意思。因此说“大沙堆”的意思。uru、maru、sikatā、vālukā、vaṇṇu、vālikā这些词意义相同,只是字面表达不同。巴利
279. Mahāvelā viya mahāvelā, vipulavālikapuñjatāya mahanto velātaṭo viyāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘mahāvālikarāsīti attho’’ti. Uru maru sikatā vālukā vaṇṇu vālikāti ime saddā samānatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ.
军队来到这里并驻扎下来,所以叫“军镇”,也就是军队驻扎的地方。不过,“军镇”这个名称是后来才有的。这里是为了指出(佛陀)乞食的村落。在上面的经文里,它出现在《大萨遮迦经》中。但在这里,因为讲的是圣求,所以指的是菩提座。巴利
Senā nigacchi nivisi etthāti senānigamo, senāya niviṭṭhaṭṭhānaṃ. Senānigāmoti pana ayaṃ samaññā aparakālikā. Gocaragāmanidassanañcetaṃ. Uparisuttasminti mahāsaccakasutte. Idha pana bodhipallaṅko adhippeto ariyapariyesanāya vuccamānattā.
280 “智与见”这个说法,因为是把两个词合在一起理解,指向一个特殊的智慧,而且没有明确限定它的对象,又加上了“我”,所以它表明的是能够完全通达一切所知的一种特别的智慧,并不是单指智,也不是单指见。因此说:“我的遍知智生起,它能照见一切法。”所谓“不动摇”,是因为已经达到解脱的终点,完全不会被任何相反的烦恼法所动摇。因此说“不被贪等所动摇”。又因为所缘的寂静也有差别,就像说到“不动住”时那样,所以说“也因所缘不动摇”。不仅是遍知智,还有依照已证得的通达法而生的十九种观察智。巴利
280. ‘‘Ñāṇadassana’’nti ca ekajjhaṃ gahitapadadvayavisayavisesassa anāmaṭṭhattā ‘‘me’’ti ca gahitattā anavasesañeyyāvabodhanasamatthameva ñāṇavisesaṃ bodheti, na ñāṇamattaṃ, na dassanamattanti āha ‘‘sabbadhammadassanasamatthañca me sabbaññutaññāṇaṃ udapādī’’ti. Akuppatāyāti vimokkhantatāya sabbaso paṭipakkhadhammehi asaṅkhobhanīyatāya. Tenāha ‘‘rāgādīhina kuppatī’’ti. Ārammaṇasantatāyapi tadārammaṇānaṃ atthi viseso yathā taṃ ‘‘āneñjavihāre’’ti āha ‘‘akuppārammaṇatāya cā’’ti. Paccavekkhaṇañāṇampīti na kevalaṃ sabbaññutaññāṇameva, atha kho yathādhigate paṭivedhasaddhamme ekūnavīsatividhapaccavekkhaṇañāṇampi.
281 已通达:以自生智,通过“这是苦”等说法,以直面洞穿的方式证得,也就是如实觉悟了。甚深:像大海一样,除了那些在别处已经积累并成熟了智慧资粮的人,其他人的智慧无法在其中找到立足点。因此说“这是表示并非浅显的话”。那无法找到立足点的,因为无法潜入,也就无法从本质上看到,所以说“由甚深故难见”。应以苦见:只能由某些人艰难地见到。如果根本无法见到,那么逐步觉悟就根本无从谈起,所以说“由难见故更难觉悟”。由于觉悟极难做到,所以要以艰难的方式觉悟。在这里应该引用这段经文:“诸比丘,你们认为如何,哪一样更难做或更难达到呢?”或者,因为以寂静为所缘,所以是寂静。因为熄灭了一切热恼,所以是寂灭。或者因为达到了殊胜的状态,所以是微妙。以不令人满足之义,就像美味的食物一样,是不满足的。在这里,灭谛是以寂静为所缘,所以是寂静所缘;道谛本身是寂静的,而且以寂静为所缘,所以也是寂静所缘。由于自性不寂静的烦恼和诸行已经不存在,并且因为熄灭了一切热恼,以寂静微妙的状态以及无混杂的纯粹状态,应当了知为不满足。因此说“这两者都是指称出世间而说的”。因为这是最高智慧的对象,不能通过推理而悟入,同时它也是极精微智慧的行境,所以是微细。又因为自性极其微细,所以是细妙;由于不是愚者的境界,唯有智者才能了知,因此是智者所证知。所依:以令人欢喜之义而被受用,也就是五种欲功德。执著:他们以乐著的方式执取、受用这些对象,这就是爱行的境界。他们欢乐,即享受乐趣、嬉戏、游玩。乐于所依就是热衷于所依。巴利
281.Paṭividdhoti (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.64; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.172; sārattha. ṭī. mahāvagga 3.7) sayambhuñāṇena ‘‘idaṃ dukkha’’ntiādinā paṭimukhaṃ nibbijjhanavasena patto, yathābhūtaṃ avabuddhoti attho. Gambhīroti mahāsamuddo viya makasatuṇḍasūciyā aññatra samupacitaparipakkañāṇasambhārehi aññesaṃ ñāṇena alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho. Tenāha ‘‘uttānabhāvapaṭikkhepavacanameta’’nti. Yo alabbhaneyyapatiṭṭho, so ogāhitumasakkuṇeyyatāya sarūpato ca passituṃ na sakkāti āha ‘‘gambhīrattāva duddaso’’ti. Dukkhena daṭṭhabboti kicchena kenacideva daṭṭhabbo. Yaṃ pana daṭṭhumeva na sakkā, tassa ogāhetvā anu anu bujjhane kathā eva natthīti āha ‘‘duddasattāva duranubodho’’ti. Dukkhena avabujjhitabbo avabodhassa dukkarabhāvato. Imasmiṃ ṭhāne – ‘‘taṃ kiṃ maññatha, bhikkhave, katamaṃ nu kho dukkarataraṃ vā durabhisambhavataraṃ vā’’ti suttapadaṃ (saṃ. ni. 5.1115) vattabbaṃ. Santārammaṇatāya vā santo. Nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya nibbuto. Padhānabhāvaṃ nītoti vā paṇīto. Atittikaraṭṭhena atappako sādurasabhojanaṃ viya. Ettha ca nirodhasaccaṃ santaṃ ārammaṇanti santārammaṇaṃ, maggasaccaṃ santaṃ santārammaṇañcāti santārammaṇaṃ. Anupasantasabhāvānaṃ kilesānaṃ saṅkhārānañca abhāvato nibbutasabbapariḷāhatāya santapaṇītabhāveneva ca asecanakatāya atappakatā daṭṭhabbā. Tenāha ‘‘idaṃ dvayaṃ lokuttarameva sandhāya vutta’’nti. Uttamañāṇavisayattā na takkena avacaritabbo, tato eva nipuṇañāṇagocaratāya ca saṇho. Sukhumasabhāvattā ca nipuṇo, bālānaṃ avisayattā paṇḍitehi eva veditabboti paṇḍitavedanīyo. Ālīyanti abhiramitabbaṭṭhena sevīyantīti ālayā, pañca kāmaguṇā. Ālayanti allīyantī abhiramaṇavasena sevantīti ālayā, taṇhāvicaritāni. Ramantīti ratiṃ vindanti kīḷanti laḷanti. Ālayaratāti ālayaniratā.
“就‘处’这个词来说”,是指针对“处”这个说法而说的。但从意义上看,这里所说的“处”,指的其实就是缘起。果依它而存在、依它而运转,所以叫“处”,也就是作为行等法的缘的无明等。“此缘”就是指这些行等的缘,也就是无明等。“此缘性”就像“天就是天神”那样,是指此缘本身;或者说,是指无明等这些此缘对自己的果来说具有缘的性质、具有能生起果的能力。“此缘性”就是这个意思。这样一来,就显示了缘起具有能作缘的特征。“依此而缘生果”,所以叫“缘起”。这两个词都说明了诸法作为缘的意义。因此说“这是行等之缘的名称”。这里是简略说明,详细解释应按照《清净道论大疏》2.572-573所述来理解。巴利
Ṭhānaṃ sandhāyāti ṭhāna-saddaṃ sandhāya. Atthato pana ṭhānanti ca paṭiccasamuppādo eva adhippeto. Tiṭṭhati phalaṃ tadāyattavuttitāyāti ṭhānaṃ, saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayabhūtā avijjādayo. Imesaṃ saṅkhārādīnaṃ paccayāti idappaccayā, avijjādayova. Idappaccayā eva idappaccayatā yathā ‘‘devo eva devatā’’ti, idappaccayānaṃ vā avijjādīnaṃ attano phalaṃ pati paccayabhāvo uppādanasamatthatā idappaccayatā. Tena samatthapaccayalakkhaṇo paṭiccasamuppādo dassito hoti. Paṭicca samuppajjati phalaṃ etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo. Padadvayenapi dhammānaṃ paccayaṭṭho eva vibhāvito. Tenāha ‘‘saṅkhārādipaccayānaṃ etaṃ adhivacana’’nti. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.572-573) vuttanayena veditabbo.
“一切行寂止”等句中的“一切”,是指“一切行寂止”等词所表达的一切内容,从含义上说就是涅槃。现在为了显示它的涅槃性质,所以说了“因为……”等话。“涅槃”(nti nibbānaṃ)。“依止”(āgamma)是指以涅槃为所缘缘,作为圣道的因。“寂止”(sammanti)是指以不再结生的方式而寂灭。如此寂止之后,它们特别地安止下来,所以说“安静下来”(vūpasammanti)。由此表明:一切行在这里寂止,所以称为“一切行寂止”,这就是涅槃。在远离一切有为法的涅槃中,“一切行寂灭”这一同义说法,应当依照前面所说的方式理解。其余的词句也是这样。“已吐弃”(paṭinissaṭṭhā)是指以断除的方式彻底舍弃。“一切爱”(sabbā taṇhā)是指全部分为一百零八种的爱。“一切烦恼贪”(sabbe kilesarāgā)是指一切属于烦恼的贪,如欲贪、色贪等;或者这里“烦恼贪”应当理解为一切烦恼,而不只是贪这一种,因为它们能使心变得变异。正如经中所说:“染污的心变异,嗔恨的心变异,愚痴的心变异。”(波罗 271)“离染”(virajjanti)就是坏灭。巴利
Sabbasaṅkhārasamathotiādi sabbanti sabbasaṅkhārasamathādisaddābhidheyyaṃ sabbaṃ atthato nibbānameva. Idāni tassa nibbānabhāvaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘yasmā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Nti nibbānaṃ. Āgammāti paṭicca ariyamaggassa ārammaṇapaccayabhāvahetu. Sammantīti appaṭisandhikūpasamavasena sammanti. Tathā santā savisesaṃ upasantā nāma hontīti āha ‘‘vūpasammantī’’ti. Etena ‘‘sabbe saṅkhārā sammanti etthāti sabbasaṅkhārasamatho, nibbāna’’nti dasseti. Sabbasaṅkhatavisaṃyutte ca nibbāne sabbasaṅkhāravūpasamapariyāyo heṭṭhā vuttanayeneva veditabbo. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Paṭinissaṭṭhāti samucchedavasena pariccattā honti. Sabbā taṇhāti aṭṭhasatappabhedā sabbāpi taṇhā. Sabbe kilesarāgāti kāmarāgarūparāgādibhedā sabbepi kilesabhūtā rāgā, sabbepi vā kilesā idha ‘‘kilesarāgā’’ti veditabbā, na lobhavisesā eva cittassa vipariṇatabhāvāpādanato . Yathāha ‘‘rattampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, duṭṭhampi cittaṃ vipariṇataṃ, mūḷhampi cittaṃ vipariṇata’’nti (pārā. 271). Virajjantīti palujjanti.
长时间坐着和长时间说话,会导致背脊僵硬、身体疲倦、口干舌燥等,应当知道这就是身体的劳累和身体的不适。不过,这是就那些不了解开示含义的人而说的;对于了解的人来说,即使开示会带来身体上的疲劳,对世尊而言也根本不算疲劳。所以世尊说:“法的事务并不会让我感到疲惫。”(《自说经》10)也正是因为这个,他才说:“为那些不了解的人作开示,那才是我的疲劳。”这里的“两者”,指的是心的疲劳和心的逼迫,这两种情况在诸佛身上完全不存在,因为在菩提树下就已经彻底断除了。巴利
Ciranisajjācirabhāsanehi piṭṭhiāgilāyanatālugalasosādivasena kāyakilamatho ceva kāyavihesā ca veditabbā. Sā ca kho desanāya atthaṃ ajānantānaṃ vasena vuttā, jānantānaṃ pana desanāya kāyaparissamopi satthu aparissamova. Tenāha bhagavā – ‘‘na ca maṃ dhammādhikaraṇaṃ vihesesī’’ti (udā. 10). Tenevāha ‘‘yā ajānantānaṃ desanā nāma, so mama kilamatho assā’’ti. Ubhayanti cittakilamatho ceva cittavihesā cāti ubhayampetaṃ buddhānaṃ natthi bodhimūleyeva samucchinnattā.
“随增”就是汇集。“su”是虚词“apissu”的一部分。“me”因为和“paṭi”这个词结合,按照属格的含义而用了宾格形式,所以说成“我的”。或者,“非寻常”是指已经达到增长的事物。因为前缀“a-”也有增长的意思,比如“无学之法”。应当这样理解:为了对包括天人在内的世间开示正法,在圆满波罗蜜达十万大劫又四阿僧祇劫之后,如今显示出已证得法王之位者的不活跃状态,这就是偈颂意义的非寻常性,以及它的增胜。因为正是通过义的门径,偈颂才显示出非寻常性。“成为行境”,意思是现前。而现前就意味着应当被遍寻,所以说“成为遍寻的状态”。巴利
Anubrūhanaṃ sampiṇḍanaṃ. Soti ‘‘apissū’’ti nipāto. Manti paṭi-saddayogena sāmiatthe upayogavacananti āha ‘‘mamā’’ti. Vuddhippattā vā acchariyā anacchariyā. Vuddhiatthopi hi a-kāro hoti yathā ‘‘asekkhā dhammā’’ti (dha. sa. 11.tikamātikā). Kappānaṃ satasahassaṃ cattāri ca asaṅkhyeyyāni sadevakassa lokassa dhammasaṃvibhāgakaraṇatthameva pāramiyo pūretvā idāni adhigatadhammarajjassa tattha appossukkatāpattidīpanatā, gāthātthassa acchariyatā, tassa vuddhippatti cāti veditabbaṃ. Atthadvārena hi gāthānaṃ anacchariyatā. Gocarā ahesunti upaṭṭhahesuṃ. Upaṭṭhānañca vitakketabbatāti āha ‘‘parivitakkayitabbataṃ pāpuṇiṃsū’’ti.
如果是乐行道本身,那为什么还说它艰难呢?所以解释说“然而在圆满波罗蜜的时候”等等。这是针对布施那些极难舍弃的东西而说的。“ha”是虚词,在这里的意思是“明显”,也有人说它表示“确定”。所谓明显、确定,或者“足够”——意思是,以如此艰难的方式证得的法,这样宣说完全没有用处,这就是句子的连接方式。或者,“hala”和“alaṃ”同义,就像“我说‘hala’”等处所说的那样。“被贪嗔所沾染者”,意思是像被毒蛇的毒液沾染一样,被贪和嗔所沾染、所压倒。“随贪嗔而行者”,意思是被贪和嗔紧紧跟随的人。巴利
Yadi sukhāpaṭipadāva, kathaṃ kicchatāti āha ‘‘pāramīpūraṇakāle panā’’tiādi. Evamādīni duppariccajāni dentassa. Ha-iti vā ‘‘byatta’’nti etasmiṃ atthe nipāto. Ekaṃsattheti keci. Ha byattaṃ, ekaṃsena vā alaṃ nippayojanaṃ evaṃ kicchena adhigatassa dhammassa desitanti yojanā. Halanti vā ‘‘ala’’nti iminā samānatthaṃ padaṃ ‘‘halanti vadāmī’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 2.65; saṃ. ni. ṭī. 1.1.172) viya. Rāgadosapariphuṭṭhehīti phuṭṭhavisena viya sappena rāgena dosena ca samphuṭṭhehi abhibhūtehi. Rāgadosānugatehīti rāgena ca dosena ca anubandhehi.
被欲贪染着、被有贪染着的人,因为被诸盖遮蔽;被见贪染着的人,则因为颠倒执取。他们将不能见,意思是不能如实通达法。这样使他们执取,是想让他们以无常等自性如实了知法。他们被贪嗔所制伏,也正是因为完全处于愚痴的状态,所以说被暗蕴所覆。巴利
Kāmarāgarattā bhavarāgarattā ca nīvaraṇehi nivutatāya, diṭṭhirāgarattā viparītābhinivesena. Na dakkhantīti yāthāvato dhammaṃ na paṭivijjhissanti. Evaṃ gāhāpetunti ‘‘anicca’’ntiādinā sabhāvena yāthāvato dhammaṃ jānāpetuṃ. Rāgadosaparetatāpi nesaṃ sammūḷhabhāvenevāti āha ‘‘tamokhandhena āvuṭā’’ti.
282 282. 为了说明说法时陷入不活跃状态的原因,注释用“那么为什么……”等话,自己主动提出质问。其中,“以未知的形相”是指通过成为这位世尊弟子的方式,以尚未被认出的样子出现。有些注疏者说,这是“以苦行者的形相”。不过,那种形相在证得阿罗汉果时就会消失。不活跃状态的原因有三种:对立面的力量强大、法本身甚深、以及对此法怀有极深的恭敬。为了显示这三点,才开始了“对他而言……”等论述。其中,所谓“对立面”,就是贪欲等烦恼,因为它们会阻碍正确的修行实践。这些烦恼力量强大,又经过长久的反复熏习,深深扎根于众生的心相续中,所以极难清净。它们征服、压倒众生,给众生带来不幸与毁灭,就像醉象对待虚弱的人一样;它们盘踞在纵深数百由旬、结构紧密坚实、布满荆棘的险恶之地。为了显示因为烦恼难以破除、难以断除,所以众生极难被净化,注释说了“而对他……”等话。在这里,内部没有擦洗过、装满酸粥的葫芦,因为长久放置而装满酪浆的缸,因为浸透了油而变得软弱无力的布片,因为沾了油而涂上眼药的手,这些都被说成难以清净。这些是低劣的比喻,因为色法组合存在的时间不长,所以污垢不会持续太久。然而,烦恼的染污才是更加难以清净的,因为它无始以来就存在,又一直潜藏在心中。因此说“极其染污”。正如它更加难以清净一样,它也是甚深、难以看见、难以领悟的,所以这里所说的比喻同样是低劣的比喻。巴利
282. Dhammadesanāya appossukkatāpattiyā kāraṇaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kasmā panā’’tiādinā sayameva codanaṃ samuṭṭhāpeti. Tattha aññātavesenāti imassa bhagavato sāvakabhāvūpagamanena aññātarūpena. Tāpasavesenāti keci. So pana arahattādhigameneva vigaccheyya. Tividhaṃ kāraṇaṃ appossukkatāpattiyā paṭipakkhassa balavabhāvo, dhammassa gambhīratā, tattha ca sātisayaṃ gāravanti, ta dassetuṃ ‘‘tassa hī’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. (Tattha paṭipakkhā nāma rāgādayo kilesā sammāpaṭipattiyā antarāyakarattā. Tesaṃ balavabhāvato ciraparibhāvanāya sattasantānato dubbisodhiyatāya te satte mattahatthino viya dubbalapurisaṃ adhibhavitvā ajjhottharitvā anayabyasanaṃ āpādentā anekasatayojanāyāmavitthāraṃ sunicitaṃ ghanasannivesaṃ kaṇṭakaduggampi adhisenti. Dūrappabhedaducchejjatāhi dubbisodhiyataṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘athassā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ca anto amaṭṭhatāya kañjiyapuṇṇā lābu. Cirapārivāsikatāya takkabharitā cāṭi. Snehatintadubbalabhāvena vasāpītapilotikā. Telamissitatāya añjanamakkhitahattho dubbisodhanīyā vuttā, hīnūpamā cetā rūpapabandhabhāvato acirakālikattā ca malīnatāya, kilesasaṃkileso eva pana dubbisodhanīyataro anādikālikattā anusayitattā ca. Tenāha ‘‘atisaṃkiliṭṭhā’’ti. Yathā ca dubbisodhanīyataratāya, evaṃ gambhīraduddasaduranubodhānampi vuttaupamā hīnūpamāva).
通过去除对立面,即使是甚深的法也能变得非常清楚。而要去除对立面,则离不开正确的修行实践;正确的修行实践又依赖于听闻正法。听闻正法取决于对导师和法的清净信心,而这种信心又以向值得尊敬者祈请为起因。为了说明众生的法随法行是以梵天的祈请为缘,世尊才接着开示了“而且……”等内容。巴利
Paṭipakkhavigamanena gambhīropi dhammo supākaṭo bhaveyya. Paṭipakkhavigamanaṃ pana sammāpaṭipattipaṭibaddhaṃ, sā saddhammassavanādhīnā. Taṃ satthari dhamme ca pasādāyattaṃ, so garuṭṭhāniyānaṃ ajjhesanahetukoti panāḷikāya sattānaṃ dhammasampaṭipattiyā brahmayācanānimittanti taṃ dassento ‘‘apicā’’tiādimāha.
所谓“少尘”,是说作为杂染的贪等尘垢对他们来说很微少;他们具有少尘的本质,所以叫“少尘者”。这里的“眼”就是指慧眼。这个含义已经通过“以慧为体”等说法加以阐明。也可以从词义上这样理解:对他们来说,贪等尘垢很微少,他们具有这样的本质,所以叫“少尘种类者”。把布施等十种福业事,连同皈依和回向利他一起算进来,就成了十二种,因此说“以十二种福业行”。巴利
Upakkilesabhūtaṃ appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ etassāti apparajaṃ, apparajaṃ akkhi paññācakkhu yesaṃ te taṃsabhāvāti katvā apparajakkhajātikāti ayamattho vibhāvito ‘‘paññāmaye’’tiādinā. Appaṃ rāgādirajaṃ yesaṃ taṃsabhāvā apparajakkhajātikāti evampi saddattho sambhavati. Dānādidasapuññakiriyavatthūni saraṇagamanaparahitapariṇāmanehi saddhiṃ (dvādasa hontīti) ‘‘dvādasapuññakiriyavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ.
他们被贪等烦恼垢染所污染,凭六种“导师”身份——即富兰那等外道六师——站在思辨诗人等立场上,靠编造诗文,把由推论反复琢磨出来、经过审察思择、纯凭自己灵感构想的东西当成法。据说,他们听到佛陀出世的传闻后心生好奇,为了欺骗世人,便装作有修行功德的样子,自称遍知一切,把任何非法都宣说成是法。因此经文说:“他们确实在更早的时候就出现了……”等等。“打开吧!”这句的意思是:自从迦叶世尊的教法隐没以来,通往涅槃大城的巨大城门——也就是圣道——一直紧闭着;世尊以宣说正法之手,将它打开、敞开。巴利
Rāgādimalena samalehi pūraṇādīhi chahi satthārehi satthupaṭiññehi kabbaracanāvasena cintākaviādibhāve ṭhatvā takkapariyāhataṃ vīmaṃsānucaritaṃ sayaṃpaṭibhānaṃ cintito. Te kira buddhakolāhalānussavena sañjātakutūhalaṃ lokaṃ vañcetvā kohaññe ṭhatvā sabbaññutaṃ paṭijānantā yaṃ kiñci adhammaṃyeva dhammoti dīpesuṃ. Tenāha ‘‘te hi puretaraṃ uppajjitvā’’tiādi. Apāpuretanti etaṃ kassapassa bhagavato sāsanantaradhānato pabhuti pihitaṃ nibbānanagarassa mahādvāraṃ ariyamaggaṃ saddhammadesanāhatthena apāpura vivara.
岩石山又高又稳固,不像土山或杂石山那样,所以经文说“如同在岩石的山顶上”。“法所成的宫殿”,指的是出世间法。因为它能在一切方面带来清净信心,又因为超越一切法而高高耸立的含义,所以与宫殿相似。或者,这里“法”这个词是“慧”的同义词。因为慧也以高高耸立的含义,在《阿毗达摩》的《法集论》注中被说为“宫殿”。同样地,经文也说:巴利
Selapabbato ucco hoti thiro ca, na paṃsupabbato missakapabbato cāti āha ‘‘sele yathā pabbatamuddhanī’’ti. Dhammamayaṃ pāsādanti lokuttaradhammamāha. So hi sabbaso pasādāvaho, sabbadhamme atikkamma abbhuggataṭṭhena pāsādasadiso ca. Paññāpariyāyo vā idha dhamma-saddo. Sā hi abbhuggataṭṭhena ‘‘pāsādo’’ti abhidhamme (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 16) niddiṭṭhā. Tathā cāha –
登上智慧的高楼,无忧无虑,俯视着满心忧愁的众生;
就像站在山上的人俯视站在地面上的人,智者也是这样看待愚者。巴利
‘‘Paññāpāsādamāruyha, asoko sokiniṃ pajaṃ; Pabbataṭṭhova bhūmaṭṭhe, dhīro bāle avekkhatī’’ti. (dha. pa. 28);
或者,“起来吧!”的意思是:从那种被称为“对说法不热心”的退缩状态中,从疲惫不振的状态中,奋起。巴利
Uṭṭhehīti vā dhammadesanāya appossukkatāsaṅkhātasaṅkocāpattito kilāsubhāvato uṭṭhaha.
283 283. 恭敬地亲近值得敬重的人之后,为了追求更殊胜的利益而心生希求、开口请求,这从含义上说就是恳求,所以论中说“祈请就是恳求”。这种知见并不局限于某个特定范围,而是诸佛独有的,因此这两种智被称为“佛眼”,所以论中说“事实上,这两种智就名为佛眼”。所谓“三种道智”,是指较低的三层道智,因为它们只是照见四圣谛之法,所以名为“法眼”。由于这些智被形容为像闪电一样,而最高道智的智慧作用已经达到顶点,不只是照见而已,所以不称为“法眼”,因此它被形容为像金刚杵一样。所谓“依照前面所说的方式”,就是依照“少尘垢者”那段所说的方式。因为烦恼微薄的人被称为“少尘垢者”,所以应当知道烦恼深重的人就是“多尘垢者”。能够摧毁对立面的,就是锐利、勇健、清净的;与这些相反的,就是柔软的。所谓“信等行相”,说的是信等的作用方式。“善妙的”就是良善的。《分别论注》中说:“那些心性倾向等部分善妙的人,是‘具妙行者’;相反的情况,就是‘具劣行者’。”应当知道,这与本注释的含义是完全一致、相吻合的。所谓“因”,就是缘起的方式,或者就是诸谛。巴利
283. Garuṭṭhāniyaṃ payirupāsitvā garutaraṃ payojanaṃ uddissa abhipatthanā ajjhesanā, sāpi atthato yācanāva hotīti āha ‘‘ajjhesananti yācana’’nti. Padesavisayaṃ ñāṇadassanaṃ ahutvā buddhānaṃyeva āveṇikabhāvato idaṃ ñāṇadvayaṃ ‘‘buddhacakkhū’’ti vuccatīti āha ‘‘imesañhi dvinnaṃ ñāṇānaṃ buddhacakkhūti nāma’’nti. Tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānanti heṭṭhimānaṃ tiṇṇaṃ maggañāṇānaṃ ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti nāmaṃ catusaccadhammadassanamattabhāvato. Yato tāni ñāṇāni vijjūpamabhāvena vuttāni, aggamaggañāṇaṃ pana ñāṇakiccassa sikhāppattiyā na dassanamattaṃ hotīti ‘‘dhammacakkhū’’ti na vuccati, tato taṃ vajirūpamabhāvena vuttaṃ. Vuttanayenāti ‘‘apparajakkhā’’ti ettha vuttanayena. Yasmā mandakilesā ‘‘apparajakkhā’’ti vuttā, tasmā bahalakilesā ‘‘mahārajakkhā’’ti veditabbā. Paṭipakkhavidhamanasamatthatāya tikkhāni sūrāni visadāni, vuttavipariyāyena mudūni. Saddhādayo ākārāti saddahanādippakāre vadati. Sundarāti kalyāṇā. Sammohavinodaniyaṃ (vibha. aṭṭha. 814) pana ‘‘yesaṃ āsayādayo koṭṭhāsā sundarā, te svākārā, viparītā dvākārā’’ti vuttaṃ, taṃ imāya atthavaṇṇanāya aññadatthu saṃsandati sametīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Kāraṇaṃ nāma paccayākāro, saccāni vā.
这里,“而在此的经文”是指:在解释“少尘者”等词的含义时,这段经文就是用来阐明这个含义的。信等能成熟解脱的诸法之所以力量强大,正是因为与它们对立的恶法力量薄弱;而那些恶法之所以力量强大,也正是因为信等诸法力量薄弱。因此,经文依据能成熟解脱的诸法存在或不存在,分别说明了少尘、多尘等状态。五蕴等,仅以坏灭、离散之义,就是“世间”。作为成就与存在的世间,是“成就存在世间”,也就是被称为善趣的投生存在。“成就由此而生起”,所以是“成就所生世间”,即能引生善趣的业有。被称为恶趣的投生存在,以及能引生恶趣的业有,就是“败坏存在世间”和“败坏所生世间”。巴利
Ayaṃ panettha pāḷīti ettha apparajakkhādipadānaṃ atthavibhāvane ayaṃ tassatthassa vibhāvanī pāḷi. Saddhādīnaṃ vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ balavabhāvo tappaṭipakkhānaṃ pāpadhammānaṃ dubbalabhāveneva hoti, tesañca balavabhāvo saddhādīnaṃ dubbalabhāvenāti vimuttiparipācakadhammānaṃ atthitānatthitāvasena apparajakkhamahārajakkhatādayo pāḷiyaṃ vibhajitvā dassitā. Khandhādayo eva lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena loko. Sampattibhavabhūto loko sampattibhavaloko, sugatisaṅkhāto upapattibhavo. Sampatti sambhavati etenāti sampattisambhavaloko. Sugatisaṃvattaniyo kammabhavo. Duggati saṅkhātaupapattibhavaduggati saṃvattaniyakammabhavā vipattibhavalokavipattisambhavalokā.
接着,为了用“一个世界”等分类方式来区分世间,所以说了“一个世界”等。就像依食而住的众生一样,那些依食而住的诸行,因为具有坏灭、离散的意义,所以称为“世界”。这里说“一个世界:一切众生依食而住”,这是基于个人的说法,它说明了一切诸行都依赖条件而存在。因此,一切诸行就是一个世界,只有一种,因为没有别的类别。“两个世界”等的含义,也应当按这个方法来理解。这里用“名”来列举时,没有把涅槃包括进去,因为涅槃不具有世间的性质。有人会问:既然“依食而住”说明依赖条件而存在,那道果不也成了世间吗?不会。因为这里所说的“世界”,特指应当被彻底了知的苦谛诸法。或者也可以这样理解:凡是不坏灭、不离散的,就不叫世间;那些出世间法远离了执取,所以没有世间性。取蕴就是作为执取对象的蕴。“十处”指十种色处。这里其余的部分很容易理解。巴利
Puna ekakadukādivasena lokaṃ vibhajitvā dassetuṃ ‘‘eko loko’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Āhārādayo viya hi āhāraṭṭhitikā saṅkhārā lujjanapalujjanaṭṭhena lokoti. Ettha eko loko sabbe sattā āhāraṭṭhitikāti yāyaṃ puggalādhiṭṭhānāya kathāya sabbasaṅkhārānaṃ paccayāyattavutti, tāya sabbe saṅkhārā ekova loko ekavidho pakārantarassa abhāvato. Dve lokātiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo. Nāmaggahaṇena cettha nibbānassa aggahaṇaṃ tassa alokasabhāvattā. Nanu ca āhāraṭṭhitikāti ettha paccayāyattavuttitāya maggaphalānampi lokatā āpajjatīti? Nāpajjati pariññeyyānaṃ dukkhasaccadhammānaṃ idha ‘‘loko’’ti adhippetattā. Atha vā na lujjati na palujjatīti yo gahito tathā na hoti, so lokoti taṃ-gahaṇarahitānaṃ lokuttarānaṃ natthi lokatā. Upādānānaṃ ārammaṇabhūtā khandhā upādānakkhandhā. Dasāyatanānīti dasa rūpāyatanāni. Sesamettha suviññeyyameva.
因为心向出离者的意乐被认为就是如此,而对他来说,一切三界之业都呈现为应受呵责、应予舍弃的,所以说“一切行是过失,一切趣向有之业是过失”。在少尘、多尘等五对中,每一对各有十种,如此合成五十种行相,所以说“以五十种行相了知这五根”。或者也可以说,这是通过顺观和逆观,了知信等诸根的上中下差别,所以才那样说。在这里,当世尊以少尘、多尘以及堪任引导者等行相作意时,那些众生是成批成堆地现在他面前的,并不是一个一个地现起。巴利
Vivaṭṭajjhāsayassa adhippetattā tassa ca sabbaṃ tebhūmakakammaṃ garahitabbaṃ vajjitabbañca hutvā upaṭṭhātīti vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbe abhisaṅkhārā vajjaṃ, sabbe bhavagāmikammā vajja’’nti. Apparajakkhamahārajakkhādīsu pañcasu dukesu ekekasmiṃ dasa dasa katvā ‘‘paññāsāya ākārehi imāni pañcindriyāni jānātī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atha vā anvayato byatirekato ca saddhādīnaṃ indriyānaṃ paropariyattaṃ jānātīti katvā tathā vuttaṃ. Ettha ca apparajakkhādibhabbādivasena āvajjentassa bhagavato te sattā puñjapuñjāva hutvā upaṭṭhahanti, na ekekā.
这里因为有优钵罗花,所以叫优钵罗池;这个词既可以指花丛,也可以指池塘,但这里指的是池塘,所以说“在优钵罗林中”。那些完全沉在水中,在水下生长、开放的,就是“内沉生长者”。“已开示的”,是指在注释书中已经说明的,或者就是在这里用“其他的”等说法所讲的。巴利
Uppalāni ettha santīti uppalinī, gacchopi jalāsayopi, idha pana jalāsayo adhippetoti āha ‘‘uppalavane’’ti. Yāni udakassa anto nimuggāneva hutvā pusanti vaḍḍhanti, tāni antonimuggaposīni. Dīpitānīti aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pakāsitāni, idheva vā ‘‘aññānipī’’tiādinā bhāsitāni.
略开知者:所谓“略开”,是指智慧的开启,智慧刚一开启就能了知,这就是它的意思。广开知者:了知已经详细展开、充分解释的义理,就是广开知者。应被引导者:要通过总说等来引导,就是应被引导者。就在举例之时:就是在举例说明的当下。法现观:以智慧与四圣谛之法一起现观。此所谓:以简略方式安立论母,比如按“四念处”等这样的方式开示时,能随开示运用智慧而证得阿罗汉果的人,就称为“略开知者”。此所谓:简略安立论母后,在详细分析义理时能证得阿罗汉果的人,就称为“广开知者”。由于总说:以总说为因,也就是正在开示或请人开示的意思。由于遍问:为了义理而处处询问。次第法现观:按次第一步步证得阿罗汉果。于彼生中无法现观:以那一期生命的身心,连禅那或观都无法生起,更不用说道或果了。此人称为句最胜者:这个人把音节文字本身当作最高极限,所以称为句最胜者。巴利
Ugghaṭitaññūti ugghaṭitaṃ nāma ñāṇugghaṭanaṃ, ñāṇe ugghaṭitamatte eva jānātīti attho. Vipañcitaṃ vitthāritameva atthaṃ jānātīti vipañcitaññū. Uddesādīhi netabboti neyyo. Saha udāhaṭavelāyāti udāhāre udāhaṭamatteyeva. Dhammābhisamayoti catusaccadhammassa ñāṇena saddhiṃ abhisamayo. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ ‘‘cattāro satipaṭṭhānā’’tiādinā nayena saṃkhittena mātikāya ṭhapiyamānāya desanānusārena ñāṇaṃ pesetvā arahattaṃ gaṇhituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘ugghaṭitaññū’’ti vuccati. Ayaṃ vuccatīti ayaṃ saṃkhittena mātikaṃ ṭhapetvā vitthārena atthe vibhajiyamāne arahattaṃ pāpuṇituṃ samattho puggalo ‘‘vipañcitaññū’’ti vuccati. Uddesatoti uddesahetu, uddisantassa, uddisāpentassa vāti attho. Paripucchatoti atthaṃ paripucchantassa. Anupubbena dhammābhisamayo hotīti anukkamena arahattappatti hoti. Na tāya jātiyā dhammābhisamayo hotīti tena attabhāvena maggaṃ vā phalaṃ vā antamaso jhānaṃ vā vipassanaṃ vā nibbattetuṃ na sakkoti. Ayaṃ vuccati puggalo padaparamoti ayaṃ puggalo byañjanapadameva paramaṃ assāti padaparamoti vuccati.
“业障”是指五种无间业。“异熟障”是指无因结生。然而,因为二因者也无法证悟圣道,所以二因结生也应被理解为“异熟障”。“烦恼障”是指决定性的邪见。“无信”是指对佛陀等没有信心。“无欲”是指没有行善的意愿。北俱卢洲的人就处于无欲的状态。“劣慧”是指缺少有分慧。即使有分慧已经圆满,但如果他的有分不能成为出世间的缘,那他也仍然叫作“劣慧”。“不能入决定”是指在善法中不能进入、不能证得被称为“正性决定”的道。“非业障”等则应按前面所说的相反方式来理解。巴利
Kammāvaraṇenāti (vibha. aṭṭha. 826) pañcavidhena ānantariyakammena. Vipākāvaraṇenāti ahetukapaṭisandhiyā. Yasmā pana duhetukānampi ariyamaggapaṭivedho natthi, tasmā duhetukā paṭisandhipi ‘‘vipākāvaraṇamevā’’ti veditabbā. Kilesāvaraṇenāti niyatamicchādiṭṭhiyā. Assaddhāti buddhādīsu saddhārahitā. Acchandikāti kattukamyatākusalacchandarahitā. Uttarakurukā manussā acchandikaṭṭhānaṃ paviṭṭhā. Duppaññāti bhavaṅgapaññāya parihīnā. Bhavaṅgapaññāya pana paripuṇṇāyapi yassa bhavaṅgaṃ lokuttarassa paccayo na hoti, sopi duppañño eva nāma. Abhabbā niyāmaṃ okkamituṃ kusalesu dhammesu sammattanti kusalesu dhammesu sammattaniyāmasaṅkhātaṃ maggaṃ okkamituṃ adhigantuṃ abhabbā. Na kammāvaraṇenātiādīni vuttavipariyāyena veditabbāni.
涅槃之门,就是进入涅槃的道路。它被打开并安立下来,是因为世尊以大悲为依托,以自生智证得了它。所谓“让他们释放信心”,意思是让他们把自己的信心投入进去,也就是把信解的样貌呈现出来。所谓“善转”,是说它容易运转、没有困难地生起。“我没有说,我也不会说”——他这样思惟。巴利
Nibbānassa dvāraṃ pavisanamaggo. Vivaritvā ṭhapito mahākaruṇūpanissayena sayambhuñāṇena adhigatattā. Saddhaṃ pamuñcantūti attano saddhaṃ pavesentu, saddahanākāraṃ upaṭṭhapentūti attho. Sukhena akicchena pavattanīyatāya suppavattitaṃ. Na bhāsiṃ na bhāsissāmīti cintesiṃ.
284 “我将说法”这个与说法相应的寻,是在第七个七日之后、就在第八个七日里生起的,所以说“在第八个七日”。并不像其他几个七日那样,这个第八个七日并没有一个被确定标记为固定作用的、名为“第八七日”的实际阶段在运转。巴利
284. Dhammaṃ desessāmīti evaṃ pavattitadhammadesanāpaṭisaṃyuttassa vitakkassa sattamasattāhato paraṃ aṭṭhamasattāheyeva uppannattā vuttaṃ ‘‘aṭṭhame sattāhe’’ti. Na itarasattāhāni viya paṭiniyatakiccalakkhitassa aṭṭhamasattāhassa nāma pavattitassa sabbhāvā.
天人们以天众的形象显现,就像人在睡眠中舒展四肢那样清楚分明,意思是广泛地显现出来。因为菩萨生起了“若未证得佛果,我绝不再回来”这一极强的思惟,所以示现了名为“转地塔”的塔。以释迦、拘利、马喇三个王族而言,共有三个王国。在树下,就是在榕树下。她说完就离开了;当她离开时,菩萨为了接受金钵而摆出姿态,她说:“那已经是施给您的了。”说完便离去了。巴利
Vivaṭanti devatāviggahena vivaṭaaṅgapaccaṅganiddāya janānaṃ pākaṭaṃ vippakāranti attho. ‘‘Buddhattaṃ anadhigantvā na paccāgamissāmī’’ti uppannavitakkātisayahetukena pathavīparivattanacetiyaṃ nāma dassetvā. Sākiyakoliyamallarajjavasena tīṇi rajjāni. Rukkhamūleti nigrodhamūle. Vatvā pakkāmi, pakkamantiyā cassā mahāsatto ākāraṃ dassesi suvaṇṇathālaggahaṇāya, sā ‘‘tumhākaṃ taṃ pariccattamevā’’ti pakkāmi.
白天住处完成后,意思是:通过进入各种等至而度过白天。他按照经中说的方式——“宁可让皮肤、筋和骨头都留下来,让身体里的血肉干枯”——下定决心,发起四种精进。巴利
Divāvihāraṃ katvāti nānāsamāpattiyo samāpajjanena divāvihāraṃ viharitvā. ‘‘Kāmaṃ taco ca nhāru ca, aṭṭhi ca avasissatu, upasussatu sarīre maṃsalohita’’ntiādinā sutte (ma. ni. 2.184; saṃ. ni. 2.237; a. ni. 2.5; 8.13; mahāni. 17, 196) āgatanayena caturaṅgavīriyaṃ adhiṭṭhahitvā.
“九由旬”是从高度上说的;从宽度说是十二由旬;从长度说,他们说一直延伸到铁围山那么长。魔罗张开身体逼近,说:“起来,悉达多!我才是适合这个金刚座的人。”说完,就在那里让自己的证人出场,并指了指自己的随从。他们一下子齐声吵嚷起来:“这个才适合!这个才适合!”大士听到后……伸出手来。针对这件事,有这样的说法:巴利
Navayojananti ubbedhato vuttaṃ, puthulato dvādasayojanā, dīghato yāva cakkavāḷā āyatāti vadanti. Ajjhottharanto upasaṅkamitvā – ‘‘uṭṭhehi so, siddhattha, ahaṃ imassa pallaṅkassa anucchaviko’’ti vatvā tattha sakkhiṃ otārento attano parisaṃ niddisi. Ekappahāreneva – ‘‘ayameva anucchaviko, ayameva anucchaviko’’ti kolāhalamakāsi, taṃ sutvā mahāsatto…pe… hatthaṃ pasāreti. Yaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ –
这大地没有心识,也不知道乐与苦;
它也凭着我的布施之力,震动了七次。巴利
‘‘Acetanāyaṃ pathavī, aviññāya sukhaṃ dukhaṃ; Sāpi dānabalā mayhaṃ, sattakkhattuṃ pakampathā’’ti. (cariyā. 1.124);
把宿住随念智净化之后,再引出来连接上下文,这是用狮子回顾的方式来说的。思择轮回与还灭,是就四谛作意而说的。为了这个结跏趺坐,是以结跏趺坐的殊胜来显示他所证得的成果。因为在那里,他不舍弃已达顶点的解脱之乐,同时又在中间阶段作意缘起支,就这样以一坐结跏趺坐而坐。一些天众,是指除了那些已证得道、现证灭、并在一定程度上了知佛陀功德的天众之外的其他天众。还有其他能成就佛陀性的法,意思是:从毗舍佉月月圆日开始,日日夜夜如此,由于恒常入定的因缘,在那些佛陀功德之上,是否还有其他能让人了知“这是佛陀”、并向他人表明佛陀本性的法呢?巴利
Pubbenivāsañāṇaṃ visodhetvāti ānetvā sambandho sīhāvalokanañāyena. Vaṭṭavivaṭṭaṃ sammasitvāti catusaccamanasikāraṃ sandhāyāha. Imassa pallaṅkassa atthāyāti pallaṅkasīsena adhigatavisesaṃ dasseti. Tattha hi sikhāppattavimuttisukhaṃ avijahanto antarantarā ca paṭiccasamuppādaṅgaṃ manasikaronto ekapallaṅkena nisīdi. Ekaccānanti yā adhigatamaggā sacchikatanirodhā ekadesena ca buddhaguṇe jānanti, tā ṭhapetvā tadaññesaṃ devatānaṃ. Aññepi buddhattakarāti visākhāpuṇṇamato paṭṭhāya rattindivaṃ evaṃ niccasamāhitabhāvahetukānaṃ buddhaguṇānaṃ upari aññepi buddhattasādhakā, ‘‘ayaṃ buddho’’ti buddhabhāvassa paresaṃ vibhāvanā dhammā kiṃ nu kho atthīti yojanā.
“不眨眼”是指:因为法喜遍满,净信舒展,安住不动,所以不眨眼。“宝经行处”是指:由天神们所化现的宝石经行处。由于在那里对七部论宝以及具足无量理趣的法宝进行思择,他们说这个地方也因此得名为“宝屋塔庙”。“如此”是指下文将要讲述的方式。“六色光芒从齿间放出,犹如六牙象族”,这是用作比喻的说法。巴利
Animisehīti dhammapītivipphāravasena pasādavikasitaniccalatāya nimesarahitehi. Ratanacaṅkameti devatāhi māpite ratanamayacaṅkame. Ratanabhūtānaṃ sattannaṃ pakaraṇānaṃ tattha ca anantanayassa dhammaratanassa sammasanena taṃ ṭhānaṃ ratanagharacetiyaṃ nāma jātantipi vadanti. Evanti vakkhamānākārena. Chabbaṇṇānaṃ rasmīnaṃ dantehi nikkhamanato chaddantanāgakulaṃ viyāti nidassanaṃ vuttaṃ.
“在铜殿下方,大小与铜殿相同”:是指九层楼中最早建成的那座铜殿的下方,范围与铜殿相当。不过《犍度注》里说,那里“大小相当于宝库房”。巴利
Heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇoti navabhūmakassa sabbapaṭhamassa lohapāsādassa heṭṭhā lohapāsādappamāṇo. Khandhakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (mahāva. aṭṭha. 5) pana tattha ‘‘bhaṇḍāgāragabbhappamāṇa’’nti vuttaṃ.
“新的”是指崭新的。有人说,因为每一种都价格昂贵,所以叫“新的”,这并不妥当。因为诸佛世尊不会接受或享用昂贵的东西。这里的“团食”,是指炒面糕和蜜丸。“这个思惟”是指:“我应当先为谁说法呢?”这样的寻思。巴利
Paccaggheti abhinave. Paccekaṃ mahagghatāya paccaggheti keci, taṃ na sundaraṃ. Na hi buddhā bhagavanto mahagghaṃ paṭiggaṇhanti paribhuñjanti vā. Piṇḍapātanti ettha manthañca madhupiṇḍikañca sandhāya vadati. Ayaṃ vitakkoti – ‘‘kassa nu kho ahaṃ paṭhamaṃ dhammaṃ deseyya’’nti ayaṃ parivitakko.
“以博学”是指通过获得禅定而成就、以证悟和多闻为特征的智者素质。“以聪慧”是指以获得禅定为条件、以守护慧为特征的聪敏。“有智慧者”是指具备三因结生慧,以及在各事上知道该做不该做的慧;这里的含义应当这样理解。“大损失者”是指遭受重大损失的人。连来的足迹都没有,这句话应当先说;然后再说:我即使去了那里,纵然去了、听了为他开示的法,连耳净色也没有。那么,世尊难道不能以自己的佛陀威神力让他们了知法吗?是的,不能。因为如果没有从他人口中听法这个条件,声闻弟子就不可能现观法;否则,即使不具其他条件,也该能现观法,但事实并非如此。确实有这样的话:“比丘们,有两种缘能令正见生起:从他人口中听法,以及自己如理作意。”巴利圣典中只提到罗摩证得禅定,没有提到优陀迦,那是就菩萨与他相遇的那段时间而说的。因为优陀迦此前也在那里精勤修行,当他听说那位大士很快就成就了那些禅定时,便心生警策,对那位大士感到厌离而离开,随后努力精进,不久就成就了八种禅定。因此说“看见他投生在非想非非想处”。这八位婆罗门,是这里的关联。具六支,是指了知六支的人。咒文,是指咒语章句。“思惟之后”是省略的说法,意思是念诵之后。他们解说,意思是他们说了。巴利
Paṇḍiccenāti samāpattipaṭilābhasaṃsiddhena adhigamabāhusaccasaṅkhātena paṇḍitabhāvena. Veyyattiyenāti samāpattipaṭilābhapaccayena pārihāriyapaññāsaṅkhātena byattabhāvena. Medhāvīti tihetukapaṭisandhipaññāsaṅkhātāya taṃtaṃitikattabbatāpaññāsaṅkhātāya ca medhāya samannāgatoti evampettha attho daṭṭhabbo. Mahājāniyoti mahāparihāniko. Āgamanapādāpi natthīti idaṃ paṭhamaṃ vattabbaṃ, athāhaṃ tattha gaccheyyaṃ, gantvā desiyamānaṃ dhammampissa sotuṃ sotapasādopi natthīti yojanā. Kiṃ pana bhagavatā attano buddhānubhāvena te dhammaṃ ñāpetuṃ na sakkāti? Āma, na sakkā. Na hi parato ghosaṃ antarena sāvakānaṃ dhammābhisamayo sambhavati, aññathā itarapaccayarahitassapi dhammābhisamayena bhavitabbaṃ, na ca taṃ atthi. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘dveme, bhikkhave, paccayā sammādiṭṭhiyā uppādāya parato ca ghoso ajjhattañca yonisomanasikāro’’ti (a. ni. 2.127). Pāḷiyaṃ rāmasseva samāpattilābhitā āgatā, na udakassa, taṃ tassa bodhisattena samāgatakālavasena vuttaṃ . So hi pubbepi tattha yuttappayutto viharanto mahāpurisena khippaññeva samāpattīnaṃ nibbattitabhāvaṃ sutvā saṃvegajāto mahāsatte tato nibbijja pakkante ghaṭento vāyamanto nacirasseva aṭṭha samāpattiyo nibbattesi. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘nevasaññānāsaññāyatane nibbattoti addasā’’ti. Ete aṭṭha brāhmaṇāti sambandho. Chaḷaṅgavāti chaḷaṅgaviduno. Mantanti mantapadaṃ. ‘‘Nijjhāyitvā’’ti vacanaseso, mantetvāti attho. Viyākariṃsūti kathesuṃ.
“随咒文”是指与称为相咒的吠陀语句相符。“来到”是指依此而行。那些婆罗门无法按照“只有两种趣向,别无其他”这一经中所说的规则来确定决断,于是只遵行既有的说法,并不期待这位伟人成佛。然而,以憍陈如为首的这五位,因为早已确信“他必定会成佛”,所以超越了咒文。“满钵”是指因满足而作的布施。“无疑惑”是指没有犹豫,不在两种可能之间摇摆。巴利
Yathāmantapadanti lakkhaṇamantasaṅkhātavedavacanānurūpaṃ. Gatāti paṭipannā. ‘‘Dveva gatiyo bhavanti anaññā’’ti (dī. ni. 2.33; 3.199-200; ma. ni. 2.384, 398) vuttaniyāmena nicchinituṃ asakkontā brāhmaṇā vuttameva paṭipajjiṃsu, na mahāpurisassa buddhabhāvappattiṃ paccāsīsiṃsu. Ime pana koṇḍaññādayo pañca ‘‘ekaṃsato buddho bhavissatī’’ti jātanicchayattā mantapadaṃ atikkantā. Puṇṇapattanti tuṭṭhidānaṃ. Nibbitakkāti nibbikappā, na dvedhā takkā.
“播种时”就是播种的时节。为了播种而取出种子时,从中先取最优的那一份来布施,这叫“种子先施”。“刈获先施”等等也是同样的道理。谷物果实还没有完全成熟、还处在嫩苗阶段的时候,就是“普塔卡时”。“刈获时”就是收割庄稼的时候。把割下来的庄稼用手拢成一把,再按一握一握的方式扎起来,这叫“束扎”。接着,按照一个人能背负的重量把几束捆在一起,就叫“捆”。在打谷场堆放这些禾捆的那天,先取出一份来布施,就是“打谷场先施”。把稻谷碾实之后,在米粒堆成堆的那天,先取出一份来布施,就是“物先施”。把谷物放进仓库的那天所行的布施,就是“仓先施”。“取出”是指从打谷场把谷物取出来。说“已经布施了九种最先的施舍”,这是为了随顺他成为久修者中最尊贵者的心愿,在修习声闻波罗蜜达到顶点时所行的作为。因为三位菩萨在各自的波罗蜜修行达到最高点时,所造作的无论是福业还是非福业,都会带来极重的果报;而且,如果不先亲自证悟法,又怎么能成就久修者中最尊贵的地位呢?至于说“这五比丘确实帮助很大”,这只是忆念他们曾给予的帮助而已,就像因为长久相处而忆念起阿罗罗与优陀迦一样。巴利
Vappakāleti vapanakāle. Vapanatthaṃ bījāni nīharaṇantena tattha aggaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ bījaggadānaṃ nāma. Lāyanaggādīsupi eseva nayo. Dhaññaphalassa nātipariṇatakāle puthukakāle. Lāyaneti sassalāyane. Yathā lūnaṃ hatthakaṃ katvā veṇivasena bandhanaṃ veṇikaraṇaṃ. Veṇiyo pana purisabhāravasena bandhanaṃ kalāpo. Khale kalāpānaṃ ṭhapanadivase aggaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ khalaggaṃ. Madditvā vīhīnaṃ rāsikaraṇadivase aggaṃ gahetvā dānaṃ bhaṇḍaggaṃ. Koṭṭhāgāre dhaññassa pakkhipanadivase dānaṃ koṭṭhaggaṃ. Uddharitvāti khalato dhaññassa uddharitvā. Navannaṃ aggadānānaṃ dinnattāti idaṃ tassa rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvatthāya katābhinīhārānurūpaṃ pavattitasāvakapāramiyā ciṇṇante pavattitattā vuttaṃ. Tiṇṇampi hi bodhisattānaṃ taṃtaṃpāramiyā sikhāppattakāle pavattitaṃ puññaṃ apuññaṃ vā garutaravipākameva hoti, dhammassa ca sabbapaṭhamaṃ sacchikiriyāya vinā kathaṃ rattaññūnaṃ aggabhāvasiddhīti. Bahukārā kho ime pañcavaggiyāti idaṃ pana upakārānussaraṇamattakameva paricayavasena āḷārudakānussaraṇaṃ viya.
285 把“中间”分开来说。因此说“在三牛呼之间的地方”。在还没有连接组合的时候,用不了业格;因为与“之间”这个词结合时,按语境需要的是业格,所以属格就用不上。因此说“然而由于和‘之间’这个词结合,就用了业格”。巴利
285.Vivareti majjhe. Tenāha ‘‘tigāvutantare ṭhāne’’ti. Ayojiyamāne upayogavacanaṃ na pāpuṇāti sāmivacanassa pasaṅge antarā-saddayogena upayogavacanassa icchitattā. Tenāha ‘‘antarāsaddena pana yuttattā upayogavacanaṃ kata’’nti.
他以遍知通达的方式超越并征服了一切三地法。对于四地法,由于彻底断除了所知障,他以一切知智了知了毫无遗漏的一切应知之法。以染着、嗔恚、愚痴等烦恼——那些善法和无记法虽然本身不是所断的,但因为平息了与它们相应的烦恼,所以也说是已被断除,因此说“舍弃一切三地法而安住”。关于所缘方面,是以作为所缘的方式。巴利
Sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ abhibhavitvā pariññābhisamayavasena atikkamitvā. Catubhūmakadhammaṃ anavasesaṃ ñeyyaṃ sabbaso ñeyyāvaraṇassa pahīnattā sabbaññutaññāṇena avediṃ. Rajjanadussanamuyhanādinā kilesena. Appahātabbampi kusalābyākataṃ tappaṭibaddhakilesamathanena pahīnattā na hotīti āha ‘‘sabbaṃ tebhūmakadhammaṃ jahitvā ṭhito’’ti. Ārammaṇatoti ārammaṇakaraṇavasena.
虽然对世间法来说,世间之主的证悟方式也不是靠别人的教导,但在出世间法上,他连一点点靠别人教导的影子都没有,所以说“在出世间法上,我根本没有老师”。所谓“对等人”,是指在戒等功德上能与之相当的人。所谓“有因”,是指与法相应、具备神变等特质。所谓“以方式”,是指以自证等特定的方法。说到“四圣谛”,是因为除了这些之外,再没有别的应知之法需要开示,所以才这样说。“自悟者”,是指完全靠自己、以自生的智慧而觉悟。因为彻底远离了烦恼的热恼,所以达到清凉,也因此获得寂静。“将击”,意思是将要击响。为了引导应受调伏的众生证得不死,世尊先作宣告等,因此世尊的说法被称为不死的大鼓。巴利
Kiñcāpi lokiyadhammānampi yādiso lokanāthassa adhigamo, na tādiso adhigamo parūpadeso atthi, lokuttaradhamme panassa lesopi natthīti āha ‘‘lokuttaradhamme mayhaṃ ācariyo nāma natthī’’ti. Paṭibhāgapuggaloti sīlādīhi guṇehi paṭinidhibhūto puggalo. Sahetunāti sahadhammena sapāṭihīrakatāya. Nayenāti abhijānanatādividhinā. Cattāri saccānīti idaṃ tabbinimuttassa ñeyyassa abhāvato vuttaṃ. Sayaṃ buddhoti sayameva sayambhuñāṇena buddho. Vigatapariḷāhatāya sītibhūto. Tato eva nibbuto. Āhañchanti āhanissāmi. Veneyyānaṃ amatādhigamāya ugghosanādiṃ katvā satthu dhammadesanā amatadundubhīti vuttā.
拥有无边智慧、已经战胜烦恼,所以叫“无边胜者”。意思是说:即使这样称呼也可以成立;对于像色宝一样珍贵的人,就应该具备这样的智慧。这正是他出家的原因,而且他早已积累了足够的修行功德。事实上,世尊就是为了和他相见,才亲自步行走上了那条路。巴利
Anantañāṇo jitakilesoti anantajino. Evampi nāma bhaveyyāti evaṃvidhe nāma rūparatane īdisena ñāṇena bhavitabbanti adhippāyo. Ayaṃ hissa pabbajjāya paccayo jāto, katādhikāro cesa. Tathā hi bhagavā tena samāgamatthaṃ padasāva taṃ maggaṃ paṭipajji.
具足各部分,就是指具足被称为肢节与分支的各个组成部分。感到厌恶,就是变得苦恼,意思是内心生起了忧恼。巴利
Koṭṭhāsasampannāti aṅgapaccaṅgasaṅkhātaavayavasampannā. Aṭṭīyatīti aṭṭo hoti, domanassaṃ āpajjatīti attho.
「投生在无烦天」是指他们出生在无烦天。「解脱」是指以最高果位的解脱而解脱。他们舍弃了人的身体,达到与天相应——这是说优波迦等人舍弃了人的身体,因为断除了下分结而刚投生在无烦天,就凭着证得最高的道果,超越了与天相应,也就是超越了上分结。巴利
Avihaṃ upapannāseti avihesu nibbattā. Vimuttāti aggaphalavimuttiyā vimuttā. Te hitvā mānusaṃ dehaṃ, dibbayogaṃ upajjhagunti te upakā dayo mānusaṃ attabhāvaṃ jahitvā orambhāgiyasaṃyojanappahānena avihesu nibbattamattāva aggamaggādhigamena dibbayogaṃ uddhambhāgiyasaṃyojanaṃ samatikkamiṃsu.
286 他们制定了规矩,做出“不应礼敬”之类的行为规范(参见律藏大品12),因此说“他们制定了规定”。关于“从精勤”:是因为过去曾不间断地修持那些难行的苦行。关于“显扬”:指言语的生起,也就是把话说出来。他们说“他不会证得任何殊胜”,是为了不让他心中懊丧。“我们可能会去往任何地方”——不要生起这种念头。“光”:指观智的光明。“相”:指禅修业处的相。“仅以一句话”:就是仅凭这一句话。忆念起“他从前也从未说过任何虚妄之言”,因此记起了此事。“如实说者”:因为这样,大众便对他生起了恭敬。巴利
286.Saṇṭhapesunti ‘‘neva abhivādetabbo’’tiādinā (mahāva. 12) saṇṭhaṃ kiriyākāraṃ akaṃsu. Tenāha ‘‘katikaṃ akaṃsū’’ti. Padhānatoti pubbe anuṭṭhitadukkaracaraṇato. Pabhāvitanti vācāsamuṭṭhānaṃ, vacīnicchāraṇanti attho. ‘‘Ayaṃ na kiñci visesaṃ adhigamissatī’’ti anukkaṇṭhanatthaṃ. ‘‘Mayaṃ yattha katthaci gamissāmā’’ti mā vitakkayittha. Obhāsoti vipassanobhāso. Nimittanti kammaṭṭhānanimittaṃ. Ekapadenevāti ekavacaneneva. ‘‘Anena pubbepi na kiñci micchā vuttapubba’’nti satiṃ labhitvā. Yathābhūtavādīti uppannagāravā.
那位年轻的王子一直待在寺院里,如同幼童一般,由那些比丘们照顾着。「垢」是指内心的杂染。从村里由比丘们取来献上的食物是属于他的,所以称他为「受献食者」,而世尊就是那位受献食者。所谓「这段说法之道」,是指从「诸比丘,有两种遍求」开始,一直到「如今不再有后有」这一句为止,这整段就是开示的范围。在这里,注疏中说:「你们也登上了我和五群比丘所走的道路,圣遍求就是你们的遍求。」然而,从「诸比丘,我自己是生法……证得了无上轭安稳涅槃」,到「诸比丘,五群比丘这样被我教导……证得无上轭安稳涅槃……如今不再有后有」,这一段正是在阐明同一句经文的意义。因此才说:「世尊先前所说『你们也登上了我和五群比丘的道路,圣遍求就是你们的遍求』,正是为了显示这唯一的关联而引出的。」巴利
Antovihāreyeva ahosi daharakumāro viya tehi bhikkhūhi pariharito. Maleti saṃkilese. Gāmato bhikkhūhi nīhaṭaṃ upanītaṃ bhattaṃ etassāti nīhaṭabhatto, tena nīhaṭabhattena bhagavatā. Ettakaṃ kathāmagganti – ‘‘dvemā, bhikkhave, pariyesanā’’ti ārabhitvā yāva – ‘‘natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti padaṃ, ettakaṃ desanāmaggaṃ. Kāmañcettha – ‘‘tumhepi mamañceva pañcavaggiyānañca maggaṃ ārūḷhā, ariyapariyesanā tumhākaṃ pariyesanā’’ti aṭṭhakathāvacanaṃ. Tena pana – ‘‘so kho ahaṃ, bhikkhave, attanā jātidhammo samāno…pe… asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ ajjhagamanti, atha kho, bhikkhave, pañcavaggiyā bhikkhū mayā evaṃ ovadiyamānā…pe… anuttaraṃ yogakkhemaṃ nibbānaṃ ajjhagamaṃsu…pe… natthi dāni punabbhavo’’ti imasseva suttapadassa attho vibhāvitoti katvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhagavā yaṃ pubbe avaca tumhepi mamañceva pañcavaggiyānañca maggaṃ āruḷhā, ariyapariyesanā tumhākaṃ pariyesanāti. Imaṃ ekameva anusandhiṃ dassento āharī’’ti.
287 对出家众也是如此,指的是对出家人。以五种欲乐为目标,用贪著等方式去受用,就成了非圣者的遍求。以邪命为生也属于非圣者的遍求,为了把这一点区分开来,所以特别说“以五种欲乐”,因为这里指的是带着欲贪的受用。现在,为了在四种资具中确定对欲乐的贪著,所以说“其中”等。“受用味”:指以受用资具为缘而生起的喜悦和心悦。不过这是就近似意义而称为“味”,并不是从本质上说的。若从本质上说,喜悦和心悦的所缘可能是法所缘,而不是味所缘。“无省思受用”:指缺乏省思的受用,意思是不依观照,而以贪婪、粘着等方式去受用。“贪著”:指被渴爱所系缚。“迷乱”:指陷入迷痴与放逸。“沉溺”:指深深陷入,进入并粘着于每一个所缘上。“不见过患”:指不知道带着欲贪受用的过患。以无省思受用为因等的过患,由此而超越、越过,因此称为“出离”,即省思智。巴利
287.Anagāriyānampīti pabbajitānampi. Pañcakāmaguṇavasena anariyapariyesanā hoti gadhitādibhāvena paribhuñjanato. Micchājīvavasenapi anariyapariyesanā hotīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘pañcakāmaguṇavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ sacchandarāgaparibhogassa adhippetattā. Idāni catūsu paccayesu kāmaguṇe niddhāretuṃ ‘‘tatthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Paribhogarasoti paribhogapaccayapītisomanassaṃ. Ayaṃ pana rasasamānatāvasena gahaṇaṃ upādāya ‘‘raso’’ti vutto, na sabhāvato. Sabhāvena gahaṇaṃ upādāya pītisomanassaṃ dhammārammaṇaṃ siyā, na rasārammaṇaṃ. Appaccavekkhaṇaparibhogoti paccavekkhaṇarahito paribhogo, idamatthitaṃ anissāya gadhitādibhāvena paribhogoti attho. Gadhitāti taṇhāya baddhā. Mucchitāti mucchaṃ mohaṃ pamādaṃ āpannā. Ajjhogāḷhāti adhiogāḷhā, taṃ taṃ ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā ṭhitā. Ādīnavaṃ apassantāti sacchandarāgaparibhoge dosaṃ ajānantā. Apaccavekkhitaparibhogahetuādīnavaṃ nissarati atikkamati etenāti nissaraṇaṃ, paccavekkhaṇañāṇaṃ.
罗网堆,就是指罗网的聚集。猎人张设罗网时,不会只设一张,也不会只设在一个地方,而是先观察各种野兽来走的路线,然后在各处一一设下许多罗网。因此,心里把它们整体合在一起,就说成罗网堆。又或者,因为网具的网眼很多,所以说罗网堆。巴利
Pāsarāsinti pāsasamudāyaṃ. Luddako hi pāsaṃ oḍḍento na ekaṃyeva, na ca ekasmiṃyeva ṭhāne oḍḍeti, atha kho taṃtaṃmigānaṃ āgamanamaggaṃ sallakkhetvā tattha tattha oḍḍento bahūyeva oḍḍeti, tasmā te cittena ekato gahetvā ‘‘pāsarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ. Vāgurassa vā pāsapadesānaṃ bahubhāvato ‘‘pāsarāsī’’ti vuttaṃ.
7. 《小象迹喻经》的注释巴利
7. Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā
288 白伞盖:就是白色覆盖、白色装饰的意思。不过前面把“白色装饰”理解成马的装饰,这里则是指在车轮、车框、车轭等战车部件上所做的装饰。所谓“如此被说”:就是指在《相应部·大品》里以“以白……”这种方式所说的那些内容。这是为了在不太大的战场上方便策马行动。“车兵、御者”:指这两者,或者再加上持武器的人,共为三者。巴利
288.Setaparivāroti setapaṭicchado, setavaṇṇālaṅkāroti attho. Pubbe pana ‘‘setālaṅkārā’’ti assālaṅkāro gahito, idha cakkapañjarakubbarādirathāvayavesu kātabbālaṅkāro. Evaṃ vuttenāti evaṃ ‘‘setāya suda’’ntiādinā pakārena saṃyuttamahāvagge (saṃ. ni. 5.4) vuttena. Nātimahā yuddhamaṇḍale sañcārasukhatthaṃ. Yodho sārathīti dvinnaṃ, paharaṇadāyakena saddhiṃ tiṇṇaṃ vā.
他绕着城市右旋而行,是为了让城市显得庄严。据说,这是那位婆罗门生闻在继位之后,依照族姓传统世代相传下来的习俗。所以经文才说“从这些天以来”等等。由于这个习俗的影响,城里的居民也照着各自的方式去做。所谓“吉祥者”,是指那些专门宣说吉祥祝祷之论的人。所谓“瑞相者”,是为了求得善的瑞祥。“等”这个字,把礼赞之类的行为也都包括进去了。所谓“繁荣吉祥成就”,是指声誉的成就和吉祥的成就,以及眷属的成就和富有光辉的成就,这就是它的意思。巴利
Nagaraṃ padakkhiṇaṃ karoti nagarasobhanatthaṃ. Idaṃ kira tassa brāhmaṇassa jāṇussoṇiṭṭhānantaraṃ jātisiddhaṃ paramparāgataṃ cārittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ito ettakehi divasehī’’tiādi. Cārittavasena nagaravāsinopi tathā tathā paṭipajjanti. Puññavādimaṅgalakathane niyuttā māṅgalikā. Suvatthipattanāya sovatthikā. Ādi-saddena vandīādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Yasasirisampattiyāti yasasampattiyā sirisampattiyā ca, parivārasampattiyā ceva vibhavasobhāsampattiyā cāti attho.
他在自己该去乞食的时间,朝着城市的方向走去。在“以为智者”这个说法里,“以为”是一个不变词,和“认为”意思相同。为了说明它的含义,把引述词“iti”引进来,就解释成“认为是智者”。这是用征求对方同意的方式说出来的,所以他才说“还是不是呢”。当再次承接“尊者婆蹉姓认为沙门乔达摩智辩明达吗”这个已经说过的内容时,他就说“以为智者”。因此这里的意思是:“尊者婆蹉姓,您认为沙门乔达摩是智者,还是不这么认为?您觉得怎样合适,就照那样说。”巴利
Nagarābhimukhopāyāsi attano bhikkhācāravelāya. Paṇḍito maññeti ettha maññeti idaṃ ‘‘maññatī’’ti iminā samānatthaṃ nipātapadaṃ. Tassa iti-saddaṃ ānetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘paṇḍitoti maññatī’’ti āha. Anumatipucchāvasena cetaṃ vuttaṃ. Tenevāha ‘‘udāhu no’’ti. ‘‘Taṃ kiṃ maññati bhavaṃ vacchāyano samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiya’’nti hi vuttamevatthaṃ puna gaṇhanto ‘‘paṇḍito maññe’’ti āha. Tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘bhavaṃ vacchāyano, samaṇaṃ gotamaṃ paṇḍitoti maññati, udāhu no’’ti, yathā te khameyya, tathā naṃ kathehīti adhippāyo.
这是在说明:“我算什么呢?这根本不是我所能了解的境界。”接着问“是谁”,因为在表示缺少原因时用的是代词独立式,所以解释说“从哪里知道呢?”同样,这里的意思是:“我凭什么理由能知道呢?能让我了解沙门乔达摩智慧明达的那个理由,在我身上并不存在。”只有佛陀才能知道,不是佛陀的人无论如何都无法了解佛陀智慧的力量。经中确实这样说:“比丘们,这不过是微不足道的一点点戒行罢了,凡夫凭这一点称赞如来时,也只能说到这个程度。比丘们,还有另外一些甚深、难见、难觉悟的法……比丘们,只有用这些法,才能真正如实地正确称赞如来。”这里“他必定也是那样的人吧”这一句中的“被称赞”,意思是:他凭自身的功德而受到那些值得称赞者的称赞,不是因为名声,而是因为他本身就值得赞美,所以接着说“具足一切功德”等等。“摩尼宝珠”指转轮圣王的摩尼宝。为了说明在包括天神在内的世间中,他是一切值得赞美者中最值得赞美的,所以采用了“或被称赞者”这第二种解释。巴利
Ahaṃ ko nāma, mama avisayo esoti dasseti. Ko cāti hetunissakke paccattavacananti āha ‘‘kuto cā’’ti. Tathā cāha ‘‘kena kāraṇena jānissāmī’’ti, yena kāraṇena samaṇassa gotamassa paññāveyyattiyaṃ jāneyyaṃ, taṃ kāraṇaṃ mayi natthīti adhippāyo. Buddhoyeva bhaveyya, abuddhassa sabbathā buddhañāṇānubhāvaṃ jānituṃ na sakkāti. Vuttañhetaṃ – ‘‘appamattakaṃ kho panetaṃ, bhikkhave, oramattakaṃ sīlamattakaṃ, yena puthujjano tathāgatassa vaṇṇaṃ vadamāno vadeyya (dī. ni. 1.7), atthi, bhikkhave, aññeva dhammā gambhīrā duddasā duranubodhā …pe… yehi tathāgatassa yathābhuccaṃ vaṇṇaṃ sammā vadamāno vadeyyā’’ti (dī. ni. 1.28) ca. Etthāti ‘‘sopi nūnassa tādisovā’’ti etasmiṃ pade. Pasattha pasatthoti pasatthehi attano guṇeheva so pasattho, na tassa kittinā, pasaṃsāsabhāveneva pāsaṃsoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘sabbaguṇāna’’ntiādi. Maṇiratananti cakkavattino maṇiratanaṃ. Sadevake loke pāsaṃsānampi pāsaṃsoti dassetuṃ ‘‘pasatthehi vā’’ti dutiyavikappo gahito.
“义利”是指能够被达成的东西,它本身就是“住”,所以叫“义住”,也就是某种努力所带来的果报利益,因此说“义住就是义利”。或者,“义”就是前面说的那个特征,这个义以“住”的方式存在于其中,所以“义住”就是指原因、理由。“住在象林里的人”,是指住在大象游荡的森林中、为了捕捉大象的人。“没有学过技艺的人”,就是没学过驯象技术的人,他们只看到宽大散开的足迹,就下结论说:“哇,这真是头大象啊!”后面那部分则是世尊所开示的内容。“学过技艺的人”,是指作为捕象林务员而来的人,他了解宽大足迹和那些高大受用处境的不可靠,不会凭那么一点迹象就下结论,直到亲眼看见那头巨大的雄象,才做出最终判断。“智的足迹”,是说智慧在这里显现出来,也就是刹帝利贤者等人,因为已在法与律中被调伏,所以证得了禅那等境界。这些正是如来这头香象用说法的智慧所踏下的足迹。说“四种”,是因为这里只取了所调伏众生中按刹帝利贤者等分出的四类。巴利
Araṇīyato attho, so eva vasatīti vasoti atthavaso, tassa tassa payogassa ānisaṃsabhūtaṃ phalanti āha ‘‘atthavasanti atthānisaṃsa’’nti. Attho vā vuttalakkhaṇo vaso etassāti atthavaso, kāraṇaṃ. Nāgavanavāsikoti hatthināgānaṃ vicaraṇavane tesaṃ gahaṇatthaṃ vasanako. Anuggahitasippoti asikkhitahatthisippo āyatavitthatassa padamattassa dassanena ‘‘mahā vata, bho nāgo’’ti niṭṭhāgamanato. Parato pana bhagavatā vuttaṭṭhāne. Uggahitasippo puriso nāgavanikoti āgato āyatavitthatassa padassa uccassa ca nisevitassa byabhicārabhāvaṃ ñatvā tattakena niṭṭhaṃ agantvā mahāhatthiṃ disvāva niṭṭhāgamanato. Ñāṇaṃ pajjati etthāti ñāṇapadāni, khattiyapaṇḍitādīnaṃ dhammavinaye vinītattā vinayehi adhigatajjhānādīni. Tāni hi tathāgatagandhahatthino desanāñāṇena akkantaṭṭhānāni. Cattārīti pana vineyyānaṃ idha khattiyapaṇḍitādivasena catubbidhānaṃyeva gahitattā.
289 在众人当中,智慧敏锐而被称为智者,这只是就他能看透微细的义理而言,所以说“能通达微细义理”。“所作”这个词在这里是“已成就”的意思。“外道之论”:他人依此而说,或由此而说,所以叫外道之论,也就是外道的教义。为他人所宣说,就是外道之论;用争论性的话语摧破他论,就是破他说。把这两者合在一起,经中就说“了悟外道之论,以及与他人辩论中已成练达”,意思是于外道教义和摧破他论两方面都已纯熟。“如能贯穿毛发者”:就像能贯穿毛发的弓箭手一样,所以说“犹如贯穿毛发的弓箭手”。“毛”就是被多方分裂的细丝,也就是称为微缕的毛发。“如击破一般”:就像用杵等击破瓦罐等物而了知其形状,意思是彻底破斥种种恶见。为了显示他们心中盘算“我们要把义理隐藏、遮蔽之后再发问”,即提出构造好的文字之问,才说了“乃至两句”等。用以宣说者,名为“说”,这里指过失;所问之对象,名为“问”,这里指义理;发问之工具,也叫问,这里指音声。把这两者合起来,就说“如是问”等;又说“应如是问、应如是答”,显示问答已达极致。“最胜”:最上、最胜的利益,就是其意趣。巴利
289. Puggalesu paññāya ca nipuṇatā paṇḍitasamaññā nipuṇatthassa dassanasamatthatāvasenevāti āha ‘‘sukhumaatthantarapaṭivijjhanasamatthe’’ti. Kata-saddo idha nipphannapariyāyo. Pare pavadanti ettha, etenāti parappavādo, parasamayo. Parehi pavadanaṃ parappavādo, viggāhikakathāya paravādamaddanaṃ. Tadubhayampi ekato katvā pāḷiyaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘viññātaparappavāde ceva parehi saddhiṃ katavādaparicaye cā’’ti, parasamayesu paravādamaddanesu ca nipphanneti attho. Vālavedhirūpeti vālavedhipatirūpe. Tenāha ‘‘vālavedhidhanuggahasadise’’ti. Vālanti anekadhā bhinnassa vālassa aṃsusaṅkhātaṃ vālaṃ. Bhindantā viyāti ghaṭādiṃ saviggahaṃ muggarādinā bhindantā viya, diṭṭhigatāni ekaṃsato bhindantāti adhippāyo. ‘‘Atthaṃ guyhaṃ paṭicchannaṃ katvā pucchissāmā’’ti saṅkhataṃ padapañhaṃ pucchantīti dassetuṃ ‘‘dupadampī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Vadanti etenāti vādo, doso. Pucchīyatīti pañho, attho. Pucchati etenāti pañho, saddo. Tadubhayaṃ ekato gahetvā āha ‘‘evarūpe pañhe’’tiādi. ‘‘Evaṃ puccheyya, evaṃ vissajjeyyā’’ti ca pucchāvissajjanānaṃ sikhāvagamanaṃ dasseti. Seyyoti uttamo, paramo lābhoti adhippāyo.
像这样说明“其他人因为害怕自己的论点被驳倒,所以不敢向世尊提问”之后,现在为了表明他们即使没有这种害怕,也还是不敢提问,就开始了“再者”等这一段。心变得清净生信,其他人甚至愿意把自己的身体都放心地交托出去,因为那位修慈者的慈心,就像遍满限定范围的慈心一样。具足见,意思是由于具备值得被看见的殊胜品质,因为这是无上的见,所以意思是极为可观、非常值得瞻仰。巴利
Evaṃ attano vādavidhamanabhayenapi pare bhagavantaṃ pañhaṃ pucchituṃ na visahantīti vatvā idāni vādavidhamanena vināpi na visahanti evāti dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi āraddhaṃ. Cittaṃ pasīdati pare attano attabhāvampi vissatthaṃ niyyādetukāmā honti odhisakamettāpharaṇasadisattā tassa mettāyanassa. Dassanasampannāti daṭṭhabbatāya sampannā dassanānuttariyabhāvato, ativiya dassanīyāti attho.
以皈依而成为声闻:通过世间的皈依而成为声闻;至于通过出世间的皈依而成就声闻的身份,后面会讲到,而且那是就出家的情况来说的。这里则是就在家的情况来说。不论在家还是出家,都应该理解为通过皈依而成为声闻。因为那些善男子是见到来世的过患而生起恐惧的人,那些有戒行的善男子也同样如此。“以少许”这个词,是在说明“我们差点毁灭了”这句话的意思。巴利
Saraṇagamanavasenasāvakāti lokiyasaraṇagamanena sāvakā, lokuttarasaraṇagamanena pana sāvakattaṃ parato āgamissati, tañca pabbajitavasena vuccati, idha gahaṭṭhavasena, ubhayatthāpi saraṇagamanena sāvakattaṃ veditabbaṃ. Te hi paralokavajjabhayadassāvino kulaputtā, ācārakulaputtāpi tādisā bhavanti. Thokenāti iminā ‘‘manaṃ anassāmā’’ti padassatthaṃ vadati.
290 290. “因喜悦与激动而被诵出”——或者说,这样被诵出的言语就是感兴语。因此说“诵出了感兴语”。“此法”:指以行道正法为先导的证悟正法。“此”,就是正以象迹喻的方式被宣说的法。“至此”:仅凭那位游方者所说的那套说辞。诚然,即使通过他所说的那套说辞,以象迹喻方式被宣说的法,由于它是在证得阿拉汉果之后才被开示的,所以本身已经是圆满的;但那只是简略地说,并非详细地说,因此才说“至此,还没有通过详细宣说而成为圆满”。如果有人质难说:既然到了详细宣说时象迹喻才圆满,相应的开示已经开始了,那为什么不说那位比丘是“善巧的”呢?这就是质难。巴利
290. Udāharīyati ubbegapītivasenāti, tathā vā udāharaṇaṃ udānaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘udāhāraṃ udāharī’’ti. Assa dhammassāti assa paṭipattisaddhammapubbakassa paṭivedhasaddhammassa. Soti hatthipadopamo hatthipadopamabhāvena vuccamāno dhammo. Ettāvatāti ettakena paribbājakena vuttakathāmaggamattena. Kāmaṃ tena vuttakathāmaggenapi hatthipadopamabhāvena vuccamāno dhammo paripuṇṇova arahattaṃ pāpetvā paveditattā, so ca kho saṅkhepato, na vitthāratoti āha ‘‘na ettāvatā vitthārena paripūro hotī’’ti. Yadi yathā vitthārena hatthipadopamo paripūro hoti, tathā desanā āraddhā, atha kasmā kusaloti na vuttoti codanā.
291 291.“就长度而言”这句话里的“pi”字,也用来表示在高度上短小,因为她们的身体确实矮。矮小的身体就是“矮”;高的就是“高”。“依靠处”,或者说是“在这里依靠”,这里指的是为了止痒而摩擦。“依靠”在这里就是为了消除痒感而摩擦。因此说“在身体部位上摩擦的地方”。“高”就是不高,意思是具有高度。“黑齿女”就是牙齿稀疏、牙齿不整齐,意思是牙齿参差不齐。因此说“牙齿”等话。“因为齿疏”就是因为稀疏。“被描画者”,就是被涂染,像是被刻画过一般。“因为象鼻状”就是因为形状像花苞。这里“ayaṃ vā”中的“vā”字表示疑惑和确定之意,正如在其他地方也有“这个或是这些沙门婆罗门中最愚笨、最痴迷的”等说法。巴利
291.Āyāmatopīti pi-saddena ubbedhenapi rassāti dasseti. Nīcakāyā hi tā honti. Uccāti uccakā. Nisevanaṃ, nisevati etthāti vā nisevitaṃ. Nisevanañcettha kaṇḍuyitavinodanatthaṃ ghaṃsanaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘khandhappadese ghaṃsitaṭṭhāna’’nti. Uccāti anīcā, ubbedhavantiyoti attho. Kāḷārikāti viraḷadantā, visaṅgatadantāti attho. Tenāha ‘‘dantāna’’ntiādi. Kaḷāratāyāti viraḷatāya. Ārañjitānīti rañjitāni, vilikhitānīti attho. Kaṇerutāyāti kuṭumalasaṇṭhānatāya. Ayaṃ vāti ettha vā-saddo saṃsayitanicchayattho yathā aññatthāpi ‘‘ayaṃ vā imesaṃ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sabbabālo sabbamūḷho’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. 1.181).
就像象林一样:大象、矮象等留下脚印的地方,就是象林。从开头一直到断除五盖的那段说法,对如来来说,也像外道游方者等人留下脚印的地方一样。从开头开始,就是从“你听这个”这句话开始。就像善巧的象林住者,修行的人通过寻求来把握标准。站在顶端,就是站在这部经的结尾。同样在这里,也就是在“正是这样,婆罗门们”等用譬喻来说明所比喻之义的地方。巴利
Nāgavanaṃviyāti mahāhatthino vāmanikādīnañca padadassanaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ nāgavanaṃ viya. Ādito paṭṭhāya yāva nīvaraṇappahānā dhammadesanā tathāgatassa bāhiraparibbājakādīnañca padadassanabhāvato. Ādito paṭṭhāyāti ca ‘‘taṃ suṇāhī’’ti padato paṭṭhāya. Kusalo nāgavaniko viya yogāvacaro pariyesanavasena pamāṇaggahaṇato. Matthake ṭhatvāti imassa suttassa pariyosāne ṭhatvā. Imasmimpi ṭhāneti ‘‘evameva kho brāhmaṇā’’tiādinā upameyyassa atthassa upaññāsanaṭṭhānepi.
“此”这个说法,只是取了“此”这个词本身,并不是要拿它去限定什么特别的东西。后面会这样说:“在某些地方,它只是用来补足句子罢了。”说“世间”,是依着世间而说的,因为它和“世间”这个词指的是同一个对象。至于另外两个词,则应当理解为:只是因为它们紧挨着别的词,才依着各自所指的对象而说。“处”是指某个地方,这里特指因陀娑罗窟。这里也只是用来补足句子,因为并不存在所谓“处等所造”的东西。巴利
Svāyanti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.190) idha-saddamattaṃ gaṇhāti, na yathāvisesitabbaṃ idha-saddaṃ. Tathā hi vakkhati ‘‘katthaci padapūraṇamattamevā’’ti. Lokaṃ upādāya vuccati loka-saddena samānādhikaraṇabhāvena vuttattā. Sesapadadvaye pana saddantarasannidhānamattena taṃ taṃ upādāya vuttatā daṭṭhabbā. Okāsanti kañci padesaṃ indasālaguhāya adhippetattā. Padapūraṇamattameva okāsāpadisanassapi asambhavato.
“如来”等词的特殊含义,在《根本法门经注》(中部注1.12)和《清净道论》的复注里已经讲过了。因为如来属于众生之中,所以先说了“这里指的是众生世间”,接着为了说明他在哪一类众生中、在哪个地方出现,又说了“即使出现在众生世间”等等。其中,“就在这个轮围界中”意思就是“就在这一个世界界中”。经文里说:“诸比丘,这是不可能的,没有这个机会:在一个世界界中,会有两位阿罗汉、正自觉者,不分先后地出现。”(长部3.161;中部3.129;增支部1.278;导论57;弥兰陀问经5.1.1)在这里,作为出生之处的十千世界界被称为“一个世界界”。而本段则是针对这一个世界界,说“就在这个轮围界中”。因为在经过三次结集的三藏佛语中,虽然安立了行境、令境、生境这三种境,但没有任何经典说佛在其他轮围界出现,反而有经文说佛不会在其他地方出现。怎么说呢?世尊立足于这个世界界而说:“我没有老师,没有与我同等的人”(中部1.285;2.341;大品11;论事405;弥兰陀问经4.5.11),“我是唯一的正自觉者”(中部1.285;2.341;论事405;大品11)——说了这类话之后,有人问:“那么,贤友舍利弗,现在除了世尊之外,还有别的沙门或婆罗门与世尊同等正觉吗?”我回答说:“没有,尊者。”为了说明其中的道理,法将(舍利弗)又举出这段经文:“这是不可能的,没有这个机会:在一个世界界中,会有两位阿罗汉、正自觉者。”这样一来,就是立足于佛出现之处——这个世界界,而说佛不会出现在别处。巴利
Tathāgata-saddādīnaṃ atthaviseso mūlapariyāyaṭṭhakathā(ma. ni. aṭṭha. 1.12) visuddhimaggasaṃvaṇṇanāsu vutto eva. Tathāgatassa sattanikāyantogadhatāya ‘‘idha pana sattaloko adhippeto’’ti vatvā tatthāyaṃ yasmiṃ sattanikāye, yasmiñca okāse uppajjati, taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘sattaloke uppajjamānopi cā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷeti imissā eva lokadhātuyā. ‘‘Aṭṭhānametaṃ, bhikkhave, anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddho apubbaṃ acarimaṃ uppajjeyyu’’nti (dī. ni. 3.161; ma. ni. 3.129; a. ni. 1.278; netti. 57; mi. pa. 5.1.1) ettha jātikhettabhūtā dasasahassilokadhātu ‘‘ekissā lokadhātuyā’’ti vuttā. Idha pana imaṃyeva lokadhātuṃ sandhāya ‘‘imasmiṃyeva cakkavāḷe’’ti vuttaṃ. Tisso hi saṅgītiyo āruḷhe tepiṭake buddhavacane visayakhettaṃ āṇākhettaṃ jātikhettanti tividhe khette ṭhapetvā imaṃ cakkavāḷaṃ aññasmiṃ cakkavāḷe buddhā uppajjantīti suttaṃ natthi, na uppajjantīti pana atthi. Kathaṃ? ‘‘Na me ācariyo atthi, sadiso me na vijjati (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; mahāva. 11; kathā. 405; mi. pa. 4.5.11), ekomhi sammāsambuddho’’ti (ma. ni. 1.285; 2.341; kathā. 405; mahāva. 11) evamādīni imissā lokadhātuyā ṭhatvā vadantena bhagavatā – ‘‘kiṃ panāvuso, sāriputta, atthetarahi añño samaṇo vā brāhmaṇo vā bhagavatā samasamo sambodhiyanti evaṃ puṭṭhāhaṃ, bhante, noti vadeyya’’nti vatvā tassa kāraṇaṃ dassetuṃ – ‘‘aṭṭhānametaṃ anavakāso, yaṃ ekissā lokadhātuyā dve arahanto sammāsambuddhā’’ti imaṃ suttaṃ dassentena dhammasenāpatinā ca buddhānaṃ uppattiṭṭhānabhūtaṃ imaṃ lokadhātuṃ ṭhapetvā aññattha anuppatti vuttā hotīti.
在依“善生女”等所说的四种选项中,第一种是为了显示最接近成佛的修行而说的。因为安住在最接近的修行中的人,由于出现是必然的,所以被称为“出现”,更何况已安住在修行顶端的人呢。第二种是为了显示从能引向成佛的出家开始,就已接近修行;第三种是为了显示从圆满成佛之法开始,就在修习趋向成佛的修行。因为大士们自从往生兜率天之后,就不再累积菩提资粮了。第四种是为了显示从开始准备成佛之法起。自从获得决定成正觉的地位起,智者就能说“佛出现了”,因为出现是必然的。然而,就像“群山耸立,众河流淌”那样,由于耸立、流动等动作持续不断,便用现在时来表达;同样地,基于为了出现而修行这件事持续不断,所以在四种选项中都说是“出现”。所谓“最先出现之状态”,是指在随后要讲述的一切殊胜之中,最首先显示出的如来出现这一存在上的殊异。巴利
Sujātāyātiādinā vuttesu catūsu vikappesu paṭhamo vikappo buddhabhāvāya āsannatarapaṭipattidassanavasena vutto. Āsannatarāya hi paṭipattiyaṃ ṭhito ‘‘uppajjatī’’ti vuccati uppādassa ekantikattā, pageva paṭipattiyā matthake ṭhito. Dutiyo buddhabhāvāvahapabbajjato paṭṭhāya āsannapaṭipattidassanavasena, tatiyo buddhakaradhammapāripūrito paṭṭhāya buddhabhāvāya paṭipattidassanavasena. Na hi mahāsattānaṃ tusitabhavūpapattito paṭṭhāya bodhisambhārasambharaṇaṃ nāma atthi. Catuttho buddhakaradhammasamārambhato paṭṭhāya. Bodhiyā niyatabhāvāpattito pabhuti hi viññūhi ‘‘buddho uppajjatī’’ti vattuṃ sakkā uppādassa ekantikattā, yathā pana ‘‘tiṭṭhanti pabbatā, sandanti nadiyo’’ti tiṭṭhanasandanakiriyānaṃ avicchedamupādāya vattamānapayogo, evaṃ uppādatthāya paṭipajjanakiriyāya avicchedamupādāya catūsu vikappesu ‘‘uppajjati nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ. Sabbapaṭhamaṃ uppannabhāvanti sabbehi upari vuccamānehi visesehi paṭhamaṃ tathāgatassa uppannatāsaṅkhātaṃ atthitāvisesaṃ.
所谓“世尊”,就是那位以“如来、应供”等功德而被称扬的觉者,他就是世尊。说到“此世间”,并不是只指眼前大众所面对的这个世间,而是要把一切毫无剩余地全部包含进来;为了说明这一点,才说了“含天神的”等话。因此论中说“现在要显示应当说明的内容”。“因被生”,是说由于各自的业和烦恼而被生出来。这里举出五欲界天,是用排除的方式来理解,因为其余的天已经被别的词涵盖了。“含天神的”这个词,可以按拆分的方式理解,整体是一个依主释复合词。举出六欲界天,是就邻近关联来说的,因为那位(魔)就生在那里,也住在那里。“梵众天等梵天”的举出,也是同样的道理。举出“敌人、怨敌、沙门、婆罗门”,这只是举例而已,因为“含沙门婆罗门”这个说法,已经把非敌人以及尚未完全断尽罪恶的沙门、婆罗门都包括进去了。虽然从“含天神的”等修饰语来看,可以知道“世间”一词是以有情为所指对象,因为这些修饰语有共同的关联对象;但在“有毛的”“有翼的”这类说法里,即使关联对象不同,这种复合词也照样成立。为了显示这一点,所以说“以众生一词摄取了众生世间”。巴利
So bhagavāti (a. ni. ṭī. 2.3.64) yo ‘‘tathāgato araha’’ntiādinā kittitaguṇo, so bhagavā. Imaṃ lokanti nayidaṃ mahājanassa sammukhāmattaṃ lokaṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ, atha kho anavasesaṃ pariyādāyāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘idāni vattabbaṃ nidassetī’’ti. Pajātattāti yathāsakaṃ kammakilesehi nibbattattā. Pañcakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ pārisesañāyena itaresaṃ padantarehi saṅgahitattā. Sadevakanti ca avayavena viggaho samudāyo samāsattho. Chaṭṭhakāmāvacaradevaggahaṇaṃ paccāsattiñāyena. Tattha hi so jāto tannivāsī ca. Brahmakāyikādibrahmaggahaṇanti etthāpi eseva nayo. Paccatthikapaccāmittasamaṇabrāhmaṇaggahaṇanti nidassanamattametaṃ apaccatthikānaṃ asamitābāhitapāpānañca samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṃ sassamaṇabrāhmaṇivacanena gahitattā. Kāmaṃ ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādivisesanānaṃ vasena sattavisayo loka-saddoti viññāyati tulyayogavisayattā tesaṃ, ‘‘salomako sapakkhako’’tiādīsu pana atulyayogepi ayaṃ samāso labbhatīti byabhicāradassanato pajāgahaṇanti āha ‘‘pajāvacanena sattalokaggahaṇa’’nti.
无色界的有情安住于自己不动摇的境界时,也能得到“因为闪耀光辉所以叫天”这个词源解释。所以说“以‘含天神’一词,已经摄入了无色界的天世间”。因此又说“与往生空无边处天的诸天为伴”(增支部3.117)。以“含魔罗”一词,摄入了六欲界的天世间,因为那些天特别处在魔罗的控制之下。有色梵天世间已被摄入,因为无色梵天世间是另外单独摄入的。“就四众而言”,是指刹帝利等四众。其余四众则已经由“含魔罗”等词涵盖。剩下的一切众生世间,就是龙、金翅鸟等各类众生。巴利
Arūpino sattā attano āneñjavihārena viharantā ‘‘dibbantīti devā’’ti imaṃ nibbacanaṃ labhantīti āha ‘‘sadevakaggahaṇena arūpāvacaradevaloko gahito’’ti. Tenevāha ‘‘ākāsānañcāyatanūpagānaṃ devānaṃ sahabyata’’nti (a. ni. 3.117). Samārakaggahaṇena chakāmāvacaradevaloko gahito tassa savisesaṃ mārassa vase vattanato. Rūpī brahmaloko gahito arūpībrahmalokassa visuṃ gahitattā. Catuparisavasenāti khattiyādicatuparisavasena. Itarā pana catasso parisā samārakādiggahaṇena gahitā evāti. Avasesasabbasattaloko nāgagaruḷādibhedo.
到这里,已经按部分取世间并显示句义连结;现在要以各种差别,不按部分而整体取世间并显示句义连结,所以说“再者,于此”等语。其中,“以最胜为限”,是以最上的认知来判别。因为在五趣中,只有天界最殊胜;而在天界中,无色界又因为“远离烦恼之苦、具有寂静微妙不动的安住、寿命极其长久”等殊胜之处,远远胜过其他,最为高胜。“梵天有大神力”等语,是就一万世界中的大梵天而说,因为前面说了“以最胜为限”。“无上”是指最殊胜的九种出世间法。所说的次第,是依状态、随顺听者的意乐而说“含天神”等词语的顺序。所谓“以三种方式”,即具有含天、含魔罗、含梵天这三种状况的方式。所谓“在三处”,即在“含天神”等三个短语中。以如是种种方式——即以含天神等方式——便完全含摄了三界。古代的论师们正是这样进行关联的。巴利
Ettāvatā bhāgaso lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetvā idāni tena tena visesena abhāgasova lokaṃ gahetvā yojanaṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicetthā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ukkaṭṭhaparicchedatoti ukkaṃsagabhivijānanena. Pañcasu hi gatīsu devalokova seṭṭho. Tatthāpi arūpino ‘‘dūrasamussāritakilesadukkhatāya, santapaṇītaāneñjavihārasamaṅgitāya, ativiya dīghāyukatāyā’’ti evamādīhi visesehi ativiya itarehi ukkaṭṭhā. Brahmā mahānubhāvotiādiṃ dasasahassiyaṃ mahābrahmuno vasena vadati. ‘‘Ukkaṭṭhaparicchedato’’ti hi vuttaṃ. Anuttaranti seṭṭhaṃ navalokuttaraṃ. Bhāvānukkamo bhāvavasena paresaṃ ajjhāsayavasena ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīnaṃ padānaṃ anukkamo. Tīhākārehīti devamārabrahmasahitatāsaṅkhātehi tīhi pakārehi. Tīsu padesūti ‘‘sadevaka’’ntiādīsu tīsu padesu. Tena tenākārenāti sadevakattādinā tena tena pakārena. Tedhātukameva pariyādinnanti porāṇā panāhūti yojanā.
“证智”这个说法省略了ya音,意思是“已经证知了”,所以说“以证智,即以超胜的智慧了知”。“遮遣推测等”,就是排除推测、譬喻、义准等途径,因为只有现前亲证才是唯一可靠的标准。诸佛世尊在一切处都能现前亲证,正是因为他们于一切处都具有无碍的智慧行境。“无上离乐”指的是果等至之乐。世尊即使伴随着这种乐,有时也会说法,所以说“即便舍弃”。世尊说法时,当某一刻大众喝彩,或者大众随所听闻的法义加以审察,他便以前分限定那一刹那,进入果等至;从等至出定后,就从站立之处开始,按所限定的时间继续说法。巴利
Abhiññāti ya-kāralopenāyaṃ niddeso, abhijānitvāti ayamettha atthoti āha ‘‘abhiññāya, adhikena ñāṇena ñatvā’’ti. Anumānādipaṭikkhepoti anumānaupamānaatthāpattiādipaṭikkhepo ekappamāṇattā. Sabbattha appaṭihatañāṇācāratāya hi sabbapaccakkhā buddhā bhagavanto. Anuttaraṃ vivekasukhanti phalasamāpattisukhaṃ. Tena vītimissāpi kadāci bhagavato dhammadesanā hotīti āha ‘‘hitvāpī’’ti. Bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento yasmiṃ khaṇe parisā sādhukāraṃ vā deti, yathāsutaṃ vā dhammaṃ paccavekkhati, taṃ khaṇaṃ pubbabhāgena paricchinditvā phalasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, yathāparicchedañca samāpattito vuṭṭhāya ṭhitaṭṭhānato paṭṭhāya dhammaṃ deseti.
“开示”是说法者以交代规则等方式所作的超越性宣说,能使人觉悟。这应当从教法方面来理解,所以文中说“首先,开示就是一首四句偈”等等。而“教诫”则是针对应当受教的人,按照他们各自的过失等情况,以应当受教的方式,通过彼分断除等方法加以调伏,这应当从行道之法方面来理解,所以文中说“以戒、定、观”等等。“于诸善法”,是指道的善法,或者是指没有过失的法。这样一来,果法也被包含在内了。戒和见是“最初”,因为它们是超越人法的基础。对于每一种含义,以偈颂方式或经典方式组织起来的文句之流,就是教法,也就是这里所说的“开示”。而它的含义特别是指戒等,所以说“世尊在开示法时……中略……开示涅槃”。其中,“开示了戒”是以戒这个词涵盖了连同资具在内的戒。“开示了道”同样包含了道连同资具,通过这两者便毫无遗漏地涵盖了教法的全部含义。通过开示戒等,此处所说的“最初善妙”等性质,是就含义而说的,正是含义所要表达的。所谓“说法者的安立”,意思是透过说法的方式,使说法者的形态得以确立。巴利
Desakāyattena āṇādividhinā atisajjanaṃ pabodhanaṃ desanāti sā pariyattidhammavasena veditabbāti āha ‘‘desanāya tāva catuppadikāyapi gāthāyā’’tiādi. Sāsitabbapuggalagatena yathāparādhādisāsitabbabhāvena anusāsanaṃ tadaṅgavinayādivasena vinayanaṃ sāsananti taṃ paṭipattidhammavasena veditabbanti āha ‘‘sīlasamādhivipassanā’’tiādi. Kusalānanti maggakusalānaṃ, kusalānanti vā anavajjānaṃ. Tena phaladhammānampi saṅgaho siddho hoti. Ādibhāvo sīladiṭṭhīnaṃ tammūlakattā uttarimanussadhammānaṃ. Tasmiṃ tasmiṃ atthe kathāvadhisaddappabandho gāthāvasena suttavasena ca vavatthito pariyattidhammo, yo idheva ‘‘desanā’’ti vutto. Tassa pana attho visesena sīlādi evāti āha ‘‘bhagavā hi dhammaṃ desento…pe… nibbānaṃ dassetī’’ti. Tattha sīlaṃ dassetvāti sīlaggahaṇena sasambhāraṃ sīlaṃ gahitaṃ. Tathā maggaggahaṇena sasambhāro maggoti tadubhayena anavasesato pariyattiatthaṃ pariyādiyati. Tenāti sīlādidassanena. Atthavasena hi idha desanāya ādikalyāṇādibhāvo adhippeto. Kathikasaṇṭhitīti kathikassa saṇṭhānaṃ kathanavasena samavaṭṭhānaṃ.
他并不是在宣说有意义的教法,因为那种说法缺少能导向解脱的意义。或者说“与单一音节等相应”,是指在松音等各种音节中,只用一种方式、或只用两种方式与音节结合,就像泰米尔语那样。又或者,由于在一切处都要把音收住来说,所以是一切音节都收住的,就像吉拉塔语那样。又或者,由于在一切处都要与送气音结合,所以是一切音节都带送气音的,就像耶槃那语那样。又或者,由于在一切处都要伴随鼻音,所以是一切音节都带鼻音的,就像波斯语等蔑戾车语那样。所有这些,都只是依部分音节而转起,因此是音节不圆满的,所以说为“无音节(abyañjanā)”。“不涂抹”即不删去、不破坏,或者是不令消失之义。巴利
Na so sātthaṃ deseti niyyānatthavirahato tassā desanāya. Ekabyañjanādiyuttā vāti sithilādibhedesu byañjanesu ekappakāreneva, dvippakāreneva vā byañjanena yuttā vā damiḷabhāsā viya. Sabbattha niroṭṭhaṃ katvā vattabbatāya sabbaniroṭṭhabyañjanā vā kirātabhāsā viya. Sabbattheva vissajjanīyayuttatāya sabbavissaṭṭhabyañjanā vā yavanabhāsā viya. Sabbattheva sānusāratāya sabbaniggahitabyañjanā vā pārasikādimilakkhabhāsā viya. Sabbāpesā ekadesabyañjanavaseneva pavattiyā aparipuṇṇabyañjanāti katvā ‘‘abyañjanā’’ti vuttā. Amakkhetvāti apalicchetvā avināsetvā, ahāpetvāti vā attho.
世尊为了让人明白某个义理,哪怕只讲一首偈、一句话,也会通过那次说法把那个义理完全讲得圆满无缺,所以说“哪怕只是一部分的教导,也没有不圆满的”。“以拔济为本性而安住的心”,意思是心立足于从杂染一边和轮回之苦中拔济出来的本性。“因此”,是因为这里把包含三学的全部教法都认定为“梵行”,所以说“因此”。对于“梵行”这个词,把与它同格的各个词连接起来显示其含义,于是说“他开示法……乃至……阐扬。这里应当这样理解其含义。”巴利
Bhagavā yamatthaṃ ñāpetuṃ ekagāthampi ekavākyampi deseti, tamatthaṃ tāya desanāya sabbaso paripuṇṇameva katvā deseti, evaṃ sabbatthāti āha ‘‘ekadesanāpi aparipuṇṇā natthī’’ti. Ullumpanasabhāvasaṇṭhitenāti saṃkilesapakkhato vaṭṭadukkhato ca uddharaṇasabhāvāvaṭṭhitena cittena. Tasmāti yasmā sikkhāttayasaṅgahaṃ sakalaṃ sāsanaṃ idha ‘‘brahmacariya’’nti adhippetaṃ, tasmā. Brahmacariyanti iminā samānādhikaraṇāni sabbapadāni yojetvā atthaṃ dassento ‘‘so dhammaṃ deseti…pe… pakāsetīti evamettha attho daṭṭhabbo’’ti āha.
只有彻底舍离了慢心的人,才能在教法中正确地修行,有慢心的人则不能,所以说“已摧慢故”。“因慢增胜故”,是说慢频繁现起。以财物、健康等为根据的迷醉,因为所缘不固定,还比较容易断除;种姓迷醉和学问迷醉就不是这样。即使是刹帝利、婆罗门这些高种姓出身的人,乃至已经出家的人,也还是会依凭种姓和学问而生起慢,这种慢极难舍弃,所以说“大多数人……都生起慢”。“因劣种姓故”,就是由于种姓低劣。“不能安住”,是说不作清净持戒而住,不能守护戒;因为依戒才能在教法中安住。或者说“不能安住”,是指不能以证悟圣谛而安住于出世间的住处。因为大多数人都是具足近依善根、出身良善者,而非出身低劣者。巴利
Dūrasamussāritamānasseva sāsane sammāpaṭipatti sambhavati, na māna jātikassāti āha ‘‘nihatamānattā’’ti. Ussannattāti bahulabhāvato. Bhogārogyādivatthukā madā suppaheyyā honti nimittassa anavaṭṭhānato’ na tathā kulavijjāmadāti khattiyabrāhmaṇakulīnānaṃ pabbajitānampi jātivijjā nissāya mānajappanaṃ duppajahanti āha ‘‘yebhuyyena hi…pe… mānaṃ karontī’’ti . Vijātitāyāti nihīnajātitāya. Patiṭṭhātuṃ na sakkontīti suvisuddhiṃ katvā sīlaṃ rakkhituṃ na sakkonti. Sīlavasena hi sāsane patiṭṭhāti. Patiṭṭhātunti vā saccapaṭivedhena lokuttarāya patiṭṭhāya patiṭṭhātuṃ. Yebhuyyena hi upanissayasampannā sujātā eva honti, na dujjātā.
“清净”:因为显示了贪等烦恼被彻底断除,所以是以没有随烦恼而完全清净。“获得信”:就是以凡夫的信而相信。有智慧的人先把握法的成就,信才成立,因为他们以法为标准、依法而生净信。“夫妻居住”:说到“夫妻”,一般只理解为家主和主妇两人。但如果一个男人有多个妻子,那又该怎么说?为了显示即使只和一位妻子同住也是拥挤的,所以特别说“二”。贪等有执取的意思,田宅等有障碍的意思。贪尘垢等的来处和生起处也是一样,所以两种解释是同一含义,只是文字不同。“以不执著之义”:即不粘着之义、无所系缚的状态。这样,以不善与善生起的处所之义显示了在家与出家两者的拥挤与宽敞之后,现在为了以善生起本身的不应处与应处之义来显示它们那一点,所以说“然而”等语。巴利
Parisuddhanti rāgādīnaṃ accantameva pahānadīpanato nirupakkilesatāya sabbaso visuddhaṃ. Saddhaṃ paṭilabhatīti pothujjanikasaddhāvasena saddahati. Viññujātikānañhi dhammasampattigahaṇapubbikā saddhāsiddhi dhammapamāṇadhammappasannabhāvato. Jāyampatikā vasantīti kāmaṃ ‘‘jāyampatikā’’ti vutte gharasāmikagharasāminivasena dvinnaṃyeva gahaṇaṃ viññāyati. Yassa pana purisassa anekā pajāpatiyo honti, tattha kiṃ vattabbaṃ? Ekāyapi tāya vāso sambādhoti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dve’’ti vuttaṃ. Rāgādinā sakiñcanaṭṭhena, khettavatthuādinā sapalibodhaṭṭhena. Rāgarajādīnaṃ āgamanapathatāpi uppajjanaṭṭhānatā evāti dvepi vaṇṇanā ekatthā, byañjanameva nānaṃ. Alagganaṭṭhenāti asajjanaṭṭhena appaṭibaddhabhāvena. Evaṃ akusalakusalappavattīnaṃ ṭhānabhāvena gharāvāsapabbajjānaṃ sambādhabbhokāsataṃ dassetvā idāni kusalappavattiyā eva aṭṭhānaṭhānabhāvena tesaṃ taṃ dassetuṃ ‘‘apicā’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
略说:不逐一拆开词句,而是概括地解释含义。即使一日:哪怕只有一天那么短的时间。令无缺:连最轻微的恶作罪都不犯,使戒行完整没有缺损。不被烦恼垢染污:不被贪爱等烦恼垢所染污。穿着:指下身穿好、上身穿好。居家:是“agāra”一词省略后分音节而成的词,指能带来居家增长的利益。财聚:指财富的堆积和聚集。以系缚之义:因为对儿子、孙子等的爱著而形成有界限的联结,这就是系缚的意思。亲戚:指那些被认为“这些是我们的人”的人。轮转:如同祖父、父亲、儿子这般相继流转,这就是轮转之义。巴利
Saṅkhepakathāti visuṃ visuṃ paduddhāraṃ akatvā saṅkhepato atthavaṇṇanā. Ekampi divasanti ekadivasamattampi. Akhaṇḍaṃ katvāti dukkaṭamattassapi anāpajjanena akhaṇḍitaṃ katvā. Kilesamalena amalīnanti taṇhāsaṃkilesādivasena asaṃkiliṭṭhaṃ katvā. Paridahitvāti nivāsetvā ceva pārupitvā ca. Agāravāso agāraṃ uttarapadalopena, tassa vaḍḍhiāvahaṃ agārassa hitaṃ. Bhogakkhandhoti bhogarāsi bhogasamudāyo. Ābandhanaṭṭhenāti ‘‘putto nattā’’tiādinā pemavasena saparicchedaṃ sambandhanaṭṭhena. ‘‘Amhākamete’’ti ñāyantīti ñātī. Pitāmahapituputtādivasena parivattanaṭṭhena parivaṭṭo.
292 292. 「学」这个词虽然是通用词,但因为它紧挨着「共活命」一词,又要顾及下文将要说明的差别含义,所以它就被确定为特指的词。因此说:「诸比丘的、名为增上戒的学。」「学」:从应当学习的意义上说,就是学。「共活命」:在这里一起活命,就是共活命。「以修学的状态」:指以修学以及共活命的修学状态。「圆满学者」:指圆满戒律防护的人。「不违越共活命」:意思是不违越世尊所说的教语,即「名身、句身、字身、音节身」。这两者就被称为「修学」。其中,不违越共活命是圆满学处的因缘,因为依靠它,从最初一直到证得道果之前,学处才能圆满。巴利
292. Sāmaññavācīpi sikkhā-saddo sājīva-saddasannidhānato upari vuccamānavisesāpekkhāya ca visesaniviṭṭhova hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yā bhikkhūnaṃ adhisīlasaṅkhātā sikkhā’’ti. Sikkhitabbaṭṭhena sikkhā. Saha ājīvanti etthāti sājīvo. Sikkhanabhāvenāti sikkhāya sājīve ca sikkhanabhāvena. Sikkhaṃ paripūrentoti sīlasaṃvaraṃ paripūrento. Sājīvañca avītikkamantoti – ‘‘nāmakāyo padakāyo niruttikāyo byañjanakāyo’’ti (pārā. aṭṭha. 39) vuttasikkhāpadaṃ bhagavato vacanaṃ avītikkamanto hutvāti attho. Idameva ca dvayaṃ ‘‘sikkhana’’nti vuttaṃ. Tattha sājīvānatikkamo sikkhāpāripūriyā paccayo. Tato hi yāva maggā sikkhāpāripūrī hotīti.
舍弃了,是指通过受持而彻底放下。从已舍断的时候开始……乃至……“远离了”,这个说法显示出:舍断和远离是同一时间发生的。如果是这样,那为什么“舍弃了”被说成是先前的时间呢?这是依据应当如此理解的方式来表述的。因为对于诸法,当考察缘与缘所生法的状态时,即使是同时俱生的法,以缘和缘所生法的状态来把握,其把握的展现本身就是以前后次第的方式进行的。因此,对于作为缘的惭、愧、智等法,舍断的作用被说为前时;对于作为缘所生的诸远离,远离的作用被说为后时。所以说“舍弃了而后远离”。或者,“舍弃了”是依受持的那一时刻而说,“远离”是依后来不再违犯的事物和合的那一时刻而说。或者,“舍弃了”是——巴利
Pajahitvāti samādānavasena pariccajitvā. Pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya…pe… viratovāti etena pahānassa viratiyā ca samānakālataṃ dasseti . Yadi evaṃ ‘‘pahāyā’’ti kathaṃ purimakālaniddesoti? Tathā gahetabbataṃ upādāya. Dhammānañhi paccayapaccayuppannabhāve apekkhite sahajātānampi paccayapaccayuppannabhāvena gahaṇaṃ purimapacchimabhāveneva hotīti gahaṇapavattiākāravasena paccayabhūtesu hirottappañāṇādīsu pahānakiriyāya purimakālavohāro, paccayuppannāsu ca viratīsu viramaṇakiriyāya aparakālavohāro ca hotīti ‘‘pahāya paṭivirato hotī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pahāyāti vā samādānakālavasena vuttaṃ, pacchā vītikkamitabbavatthusamāyogavasena paṭiviratoti. Pahāyāti vā –
摧毁了黑暗的聚集,这太阳升起来了;
以光耀的光辉照亮,光辉闪耀而升起。巴利
‘‘Nihantvāna tamokhandhaṃ, uditoyaṃ divākaro; Vaṇṇapabhāya bhāseti, obhāsetvā samuggato’’ti ca. (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 2.578) –
像这一类情况,应当理解为同一时间发生。或者也可以这样理解:因为通过它来杀害众生,所以叫杀生;它是导致杀害众生的原因,以无惭、无愧、瞋恚、愚痴、害意等为先导,是以思心所为主的杂染法。通过受持戒律来舍断它。从那时起……只是远离——这个限定词表明,这种远离在时间等方面是没有限制的。就像其他受持远离戒的人,因为心不坚定,为了利养、活命等原因,还是会破坏自己所受持的戒,但这个人不会这样。他从舍断的那一刻起,就是内在的远离者。对于“舍断不与取”等句子,也应当按这个方式来理解其含义。巴利
Evamādīsu viya samānakālavasena veditabbo. Atha vā pāṇo atipātīyati etenāti pāṇātipāto, pāṇaghātahetubhūto ahirikānottappadosamohavihiṃ sādiko cetanāpadhāno saṃkilesadhammo, taṃ samādānavasena pahāya. Tato…pe… viratova hotīti avadhāraṇena tassā viratiyā kālādivasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Yathā hi aññe samādinnaviratikāpi anavaṭṭhitacittatāya lābhajīvikādihetu samādānaṃ bhindanteva, na evamayaṃ. Ayaṃ pana pahīnakālato paṭṭhāya orato viratoti. Adinnādānaṃ pahāyātiādīsupi iminā nayena attho veditabbo.
杖就是杖击、杖打。这里,杵等打击器具的特殊种类也被理解为打击的特殊种类。因此说“除了杖,其余一切器具”。为了说明远离名为“杖”的伤害他人之行,经中说到舍弃杖与刀,所以他说“为了伤害他人”等语。因为那是恼害的状态,也就是侵害的状态。关于“有惭耻心”这一说法,应当知道,这里提到惭时,愧也已经被包含在内了。因为,如果没有对恶的厌离和对罪的怖畏,就不可能有惭耻。或者说,对于因尊重法、以法为依止而成为以自己为增上的人,他会履行惭的作用;这样的人自然也以世间为增上的愧来起作用,这是不必多说的,因此只说“有惭耻心”。为什么说“具足慈心”?难道“悲悯”一词不是在“无悲悯者”等语境中用来指悲吗?确实如此。不过,这里的“悲悯”一词,在含摄“保护”之意而起用时,既用于慈也用于悲;而在此处,是就其在慈上的运用而说的。能柔软、能亲和,这就是慈;他有这个,所以叫有慈;他有慈心,所以叫有慈心;那种状态就是有慈心性,意思就是慈。巴利
Daṇḍanaṃ daṇḍanipātanaṃ daṇḍo. Muggarādipaharaṇavisesopi idha paharaṇavisesoti adhippeto. Tenāha ‘‘ṭhapetvā daṇḍaṃ sabbampi avasesaṃ upakaraṇa’’nti. Daṇḍanasaṅkhātassa paraviheṭhanassa parivajjitabhāvadīpanatthaṃ daṇḍasatthānaṃ nikkhepavacananti āha ‘‘parūpaghātatthāyā’’tiādi. Vihiṃsanabhāvatoti vibādhanabhāvato. Lajjīti ettha vuttalajjāya ottappampi vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Na hi pāpajigucchanapāputtāsarahitaṃ, pāpabhayaṃ vā alajjanaṃ atthi. Yassa vā dhammagarutāya dhammassa ca attādhīnattā attādhipatibhūtā lajjākiccakārī, tassa lokādhipatibhūtaṃ ottappaṃ kiccakaranti vattabbameva natthīti ‘‘lajjī’’icceva vuttaṃ. Dayaṃ mettacittataṃ āpannoti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu dayā-saddo ‘‘adayāpanno’’tiādīsu karuṇāya vattatīti? Saccametaṃ, ayaṃ pana dayā-saddo anurakkhaṇatthaṃ antonītaṃ katvā pavattamāno mettāya ca karuṇāya ca pavattatīti idha mettāya pavattamāno vutto. Mijjati siniyhatīti mettā, sā etassa atthīti mettaṃ, mettaṃ cittaṃ etassa atthīti mettacitto, tassa bhāvo mettacittatā, mettāicceva attho.
“悲悯一切众生”这句话,是用有情作为对象,来说明这种远离是没有界限的。“众生”就是指有生命的一类。“悲悯者”就是有悲心的人。不过,因为慈是悲的殊胜条件,所以才说“就是以那种具有悲悯的状态”。这样一来,就显示了使远离杀生得以成就的那些法——惭、慈、悲等——的具备,应当知道这是连同《鹧鸪本生》中的相关法一起看的。这里有人问:为什么“离杀生”用的是单数说法?难道这里指的不是远离对一切无余众生的杀害吗?经文确实说“悲悯一切众生而住”。正因为如此,注释书里才用复数说法“以利益悲悯一切众生”。这话没错。不过,在经文中,由于“有生命”这一共性,开头用了单数;而“一切”这个词一出现,复数含义其实已经可以理解了,所以注释书没有用共性表述,而是为了显示分别说的意趣,才用复数来解释含义。还有更进一步的原因:从共性上说,是受持防护;从各自差别上说,是防护的不同种类。为了显示这种差别,才有了这里单数和复数的用词不同,应当这样理解。“而住”是说:成为上面所说的那种状态后,在一种威仪姿势中生起的苦,通过另一种威仪姿势来中断,从而维持、延续这个身体。因此说“行持、守护”。巴利
Sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampīti etena tassā viratiyā sattavasena apariyantataṃ dasseti. Pāṇabhūteti pāṇajāte. Anukampakoti karuṇāyanako. Yasmā pana mettā karuṇāya visesapaccayo hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘tāya eva dayāpannatāyā’’ti. Evaṃ yehi dhammehi pāṇātipātā virati sampajjati, tehi lajjāmettākaruṇādhammehi samaṅgibhāvo dassito, saddhiṃ piṭṭhivaṭṭakadhammehīti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Etthāha – kasmā ‘‘pāṇātipātaṃ pahāyā’’ti ekavacananiddeso kato, nanu niravasesānaṃ pāṇānaṃ atipātato virati idhādhippetā? Tathā hi vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbapāṇabhūtahitānukampī viharatī’’ti. Teneva hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sabbe pāṇabhūte hitena anukampako’’ti puthuvacananiddesoti? Saccametaṃ, pāṇabhāvasāmaññavasena panettha pāḷiyaṃ ādito ekavacananiddeso kato, sabbasaddasannidhānena puthuttaṃ viññāyamānamevāti sāmaññaniddesaṃ akatvā bhedavacanicchāvasena dassetuṃ aṭṭhakathāyaṃ bahuvacanavasena attho vutto. Kiñca bhiyyo – sāmaññato saṃvarasamādānaṃ, tabbisesato saṃvarabhedoti imassa visesassa dassanatthaṃ ayaṃ vacanabhedo katoti veditabbaṃ. Viharatīti vuttappakāro hutvā ekasmiṃ iriyāpathe uppannaṃ dukkhaṃ aññena iriyāpathena vicchinditvā attabhāvaṃ harati pavattetīti attho. Tenāha ‘‘iriyati pāletī’’ti.
不只是通过身体和语言的行为才算不与取,为了说明连内心对舍弃之物的贪求和执取对象也要放下,所以经文说“甚至以心”等等。所谓“盗”,就是做偷盗之事的人,也就是贼。所谓“成为清净者”,在这里,“清净”是因为当前讨论的主题以及跟邻近词语的关联,指的是远离偷盗的杂染,所以说“正是由于不偷盗而成为清净者”。这里虽然经文没有直接说“有惭耻心、有悲悯”等等,但要知道,从主题的关联上或者从意义上,其实已经说到了。就像惭、愧等法是断除杀生的殊胜条件一样,它们对于断除不与取也是殊胜条件,所以也应该把相关经文引来说明。这个道理对于后面的各项也同样适用。或者也可以这样理解:“成为清净者”这句话本身就已经表达了具备惭、愧等品质,以及断除了无惭等不善法,因此才没有另外说“有惭耻心”等等。巴利
Na kevalaṃ kāyavacīpayogavasena ādānameva, atha kho ākaṅkhapissa pariccattavatthuvisayāvāti dassetuṃ ‘‘cittenapī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Theneti theyyaṃ karotīti theno, coro. Sucibhūtenāti ettha sucibhāvo adhikārato saddantarasannidhānato ca theyyasaṃkilesaviramaṇanti āha ‘‘athenattāyeva sucibhūtenā’’ti. Kāmañcettha ‘‘lajjī dayāpanno’’tiādi na vuttaṃ, adhikāravasena pana atthato vā vuttamevāti veditabbaṃ. Yathā hi lajjādayo pāṇātipātapahānassa visesapaccayo, evaṃ adinnādānapahānassapīti, tasmā sāpi pāḷi ānetvā vattabbā. Esa nayo ito paresupi. Atha vā sucibhūtenāti etena hirottappādīhi samannāgamo, ahirikādīnañca pahānaṃ vuttamevāti ‘‘lajjī’’tiādi na vuttanti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
非圣行,就是指非圣者的行为,或者不是殊胜的行为。所谓淫欲,是指像前文所说的那样,类似于成双配对的行为,称为“成对”,也就是前面所说的恶行。远离淫欲,由此应当知道,这里也显示了远离经中所说的七种淫欲结合。也就是像这样说的:“婆罗门,在这里,有些人……他确实不与女人成就二二交会,但却接受对女人的涂油、按摩、沐浴、揉捏,对此爱乐、希求,并由此获得满足”等等。巴利
Aseṭṭhacariyanti aseṭṭhānaṃ cariyaṃ, aseṭṭhaṃ vā cariyaṃ. Mithunānaṃ vuttākārena sadisabhūtānaṃ ayanti mithuno, yathāvutto durācāro. Ārācārī methunāti etena – ‘‘idha brāhmaṇa, ekacco…pe… na heva kho mātugāmena saddhiṃ dvayaṃdvayasamāpattiṃ samāpajjati, apica kho mātugāmassa ucchādanaparimaddananhāpanasambāhanaṃ sādiyati, so tadassādeti, taṃ nikāmeti, tena ca vittiṃ āpajjatī’’tiādinā (a. ni. 7.50) vuttā sattavidhamethunasaṃyogāpi paṭivirati dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ.
以真实连接真实:用前面那句真实语,把后面那句真实语连接起来;因为一旦不真实,就会中断。所以经文说“因为那个人……”等等。像姜黄的颜色一样,这里应当理解为不稳固;也就是说,由于他的言论立场不稳固,才说像姜黄的颜色,而不是说这个人本身像姜黄的颜色。如同石刻一般,这里的道理也是一样。信:因为信在这里活动、运作,所以叫“信处”;“信处”本身就是“可信的”,就像“应被调伏的”这个说法一样;或者说,应当由信去亲近的,就是“可信的”,意思是“值得相信的”。这里的意思是,他落到必须为自己所说的话负责的地步,也就是成了说虚诳语的人。巴利
Saccena saccanti purimena vacīsaccena pacchimaṃ vacīsaccaṃ sandahati asaccena anantarikattā. Tenāha ‘‘yo hī’’tiādi. Haliddirāgo viya na thirakato hotīti ettha kathāya anavaṭṭhitabhāvena haliddirāgasadisatā veditabbā, na puggalassa. Pāsāṇalekhā viyāti etthāpi eseva nayo. Saddhā ayati pavattati etthāti saddhāyo, saddhāyo eva saddhāyiko yathā ‘‘venayiko’’ti (ma. ni. 1.246; a. ni. 8.11; pārā. 8), saddhāya vā ayitabbo saddhāyiko, saddheyyoti attho. Vattabbataṃ āpajjativisaṃvādanatoti adhippāyo.
所谓“随助者”,就是随力给予帮助的人,或者以随顺的方式给予帮助的人。那么,是随顺什么、给予什么呢?由于经文说“和合者”,就可以知道这是针对连结而说的。因此说“连结的随助者”。因为以随顺的方式给予连结,就是安立、守护或使之坚固,所以才说“看见两人和合”等。
“园”:人们在这里欢喜游乐,也就是值得欢喜游乐的地方。不过,即使没有前缀“ā-”,这个意思也能成立,因此说“‘乐于和合者’也是经文,在这里意思相同”。巴利
Anuppadātāti (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9; a. ni. ṭī. 2.4.198) anubalappadātā, anuvattanavasena vā padātā. Kassa pana anuvattanaṃ padānañcāti? ‘‘Sahitāna’’nti vuttattā sandhānassāti viññāyati. Tenāha ‘‘sandhānānuppadātā’’ti. Yasmā pana anuvattanavasena sandhānassa padānaṃ ādhānaṃ, rakkhaṇaṃ vā daḷhīkaraṇaṃ hoti. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘dve jane samagge disvā’’tiādi. Āramanti etthāti ārāmo, ramitabbaṭṭhānaṃ. Yasmā pana ā-kārena vināpi ayamattho labbhati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘samaggarāmotipi pāḷi, ayamevettha attho’’ti.
这辆车没有瑕疵的部件,以白色为顶盖,只有一根辐条,它正在行驶。
看那无恼者走来,他已截断渴爱之流,不再受束缚。巴利
‘‘Nelaṅgo setapacchādo, ekāro vattatī ratho; Anīghaṃ passa āyantaṃ, chinnasotaṃ abandhana’’nti. (saṃ. ni. 4.347; udā. 65; peṭako. 25;dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9) –
在这首偈颂里,“戒”被说成“无过失之肢”。正因为这样,质多居士才说:“尊者,‘无过失之肢’正是戒的别名。”
“柔和”:因为不粗硬,所以柔软。
“属于城者”:这里的“城”一词,应当理解为指住在城里的人,就像“村庄来了”这类说法一样。因此注释里说“城市居民的”。
“可意”:能使心满意、令心增长,所以叫可意。因此解释为“令心增长的”。巴利
Imissā gāthāya. Sīlañhettha ‘‘nelaṅga’’nti vuttaṃ. Tenevāha – citto gahapati, ‘‘nelaṅganti kho, bhante, sīlānametaṃ adhivacana’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.347; dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9). Sukumārāti apharusatāya mudukā. Purassa esāti ettha pura-saddo tannivāsīvācako daṭṭhabbo ‘‘gāmo āgato’’tiādīsu (dī. ni. ṭī. 1.9) viya. Tenevāha ‘‘nagaravāsīna’’nti. Manaṃ appāyati vaḍḍhetīti manāpā. Tena vuttaṃ ‘‘cittavuddhikarā’’ti.
“适时说者”等语,是为了显示远离杂秽语者的修行方式。因为即使是有意义的话,如果说的时机不对,也可能带来不了利益,所以这就等同于在传达无意义的话,因此舍弃杂秽语的人应当避免不合时宜地说话,所以说“适时说者”。即使在适当的时候说话,也要避免说虚假不实的话,因为虚假会带来两种损害,所以说“真实说者”。说真实的话时,也应当只说那些能带来此世和他世利益的话,为了显示这一点,所以说“有义说者”。说有利益的话时,也不应只依据世间法来说,而应依据出世间法来说,为了显示这一点,所以说“法说者”。为了显示这种利益如何依据出世间法,所以说“律说者”。因为依据五种防护律和五种断律所说的利益,是证得涅槃的因,所以它依据出世间法。如此,只有具备这些功德特质的说法,在拥有说法善巧时才会显得美好,才能起作用,否则就不是这样,为了显示这一点,所以说“说有价值之语”。现在,为了阐明这种说法善巧,接着说了“应时”等。也就是说,以提问等方式,在面对言谈对象时,审察一向记等记答的差别,建立原因的例证,比较等,依各适当时机阐明,以有限、确定的形式,广泛、深奥、殊胜、究竟义的详细含摄之语,随顺智慧之力,令他人如实安立于法中,故称“说法善巧”,应当如此了解这里的文义连结。巴利
Kālavādītiādi samphappalāpāpaṭiviratassa paṭipattidassanaṃ. Atthasaṃhitāpi hi vācā ayuttakālapayogena atthāvahā na siyāti anatthaviññāpanavācaṃ anulometi, tasmā samphappalāpaṃ pajahantena akālavāditā pariharitabbāti vuttaṃ ‘‘kālavādī’’ti. Kāle vadantenapi ubhayānatthasādhanato abhūtaṃ parivajjetabbanti āha ‘‘bhūtavādī’’ti. Bhūtañca vadantena yaṃ idhaloka-paraloka-hitasampādakaṃ, tadeva vattabbanti dassetuṃ ‘‘atthavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Atthaṃ vadantenapi lokiyadhammasannissitameva avatvā lokuttaradhammasannissitaṃ katvā vattabbanti dassanatthaṃ ‘‘dhammavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Yathā ca attho lokuttaradhammasannissito hoti, taṃdassanatthaṃ ‘‘vinayavādī’’ti vuttaṃ. Pañcannañhi saṃvaravinayānaṃ, pañcannañca pahānavinayānaṃ vasena vuccamāno attho nibbānādhigamahetubhāvato lokuttaradhammasannissito hotīti. Evaṃ guṇavisesayuttova attho vuccamāno desanākosalle sati sobhati, kiccakaro ca hoti, na aññathāti dassetuṃ ‘‘nidhānavatiṃ vācaṃ bhāsitā’’ti vuttaṃ. Idāni taṃ desanākosallaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘kālenā’’tiādimāha. Pucchādivasena hi otiṇṇavācāvatthusmiṃ ekaṃsādibyākaraṇavibhāgaṃ sallakkhetvā ṭhapanāhetuudāharaṇaṃ saṃsandanādiṃ taṃtaṃkālānurūpaṃ vibhāventiyā parimitaparicchinnarūpāya vipulatara-gambhīrodāra-paramattha-vitthārasaṅgāhikāya kathāya ñāṇabalānurūpaṃ pare yāthāvato dhamme patiṭṭhāpento ‘‘desanākusalo’’ti vuccatīti evamettha atthayojanā veditabbā.
293 293. 这样按顺序讲清楚七条根本学处之后,虽然还有断除贪欲、守护根门、具足正念正知、精勤警醒等后续开示内容需要阐明,但这里先搁置那些,只从分析行仪戒的角度来让圣典文句展开。为了解释这个含义,就说了“伤害种子村和已生村”等话。其中,种子的集合、群体,就是种子村。已生、已长成、已出现的树、灌木、藤等植物的群体,就是已生村。不过,树木等因为没有心,所以不是有命之物;没有心这一点,可以从它们没有动作、被砍断后还能再长、种类各不相同、不属于四生这些方面来了解。但增长也见于珊瑚、石头、盐等,所以增长并不能证明它们有命。它们对境界的执取也只是一种假想,就像梦中的想象一样,同样还有渴望等也是如此。既然如此,为什么要求远离伤害种子村和已生村呢?因为这与沙门身份相称,也是为了保护住在那些树木等之中的有情。因此他说:“愚人对树有命想……”巴利
293. Evaṃ paṭipāṭiyā satta mūlasikkhāpadāni vibhāvetvā satipi abhijjhādipahānaindriyasaṃvarasatisampajaññajāgariyānuyogādike uttaradesanāyaṃ vibhāvetuṃ taṃ pariharitvā ācārasīlasseva vibhajanavasena pāḷi pavattāti tadatthaṃ vivarituṃ ‘‘bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha bījānaṃ gāmo samūho bījagāmo. Bhūtānaṃ jātānaṃ nibbattānaṃ rukkhagacchalatādīnaṃ samūho bhūtagāmo. Nanu ca rukkhādayo cittarahitatāya na jīvā, cittarahitatā ca paripphandābhāvato chinne viruhanato visadisajātikabhāvato catuyoniapariyāpannato ca veditabbā, vuḍḍhi pana pavāḷasilālavaṇānampi vijjatīti na tesaṃ jīvabhāve kāraṇaṃ, visayaggahaṇañca nesaṃ parikappanāmattaṃ supanaṃ viya ciñcādenaṃ, tathā dohaḷādayo, tattha kasmā bījagāmabhūtagāmasamārambhā paṭivirati icchitāti? Samaṇasāruppato tannivāsisattānurakkhaṇato ca. Tenevāha – ‘‘jīvasaññino hi moghapurisa manussā rukkhasmi’’ntiādi (pāci. 89).
根本本身就是种子,所以叫根种子;或者,因为它是根的种子,所以也叫根种子。其余几项也是同样的道理。枝干种子就是节种子。当各种条件聚合在一起时,因为能产生相似的果实,成为特殊的原因,所以“种子”这个词就用在了能生长、有坚实果核的事物上。由于这个意义成立,“种子”一词也用在某些根等事物上。为了排除把根等直接当作种子,就再加一个“种子”来区分,说成“种子种子”,就像说“色色”“苦苦”那样。那么,为什么在这里除去“种子村和已生村”之后,只指出“种子村”呢?不应该这样理解。我们不是说过吗:“根本本身就是种子,所以叫根种子;或者,因为它是根的种子,所以也叫根种子。”其中,前一部分指出的是种子村,后一部分指出的是已生村。这二者——根种子和有根种子者——应当知道,是通过共同名称来说明,或者是以单存余法的方式来指示的。因此他说“五种”等。青草、树木等,就是指新鲜的草和新鲜的树木等。用“等”字,还包括药草、灌木、藤蔓等。巴利
Mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlabījaṃ etassātipi mūlabījaṃ. Sesesupi eseva nayo. Phaḷubījanti pabbabījaṃ. Paccayantarasamavāye sadisaphaluppattiyā visesakāraṇabhāvato viruhaṇasamatthe sāraphale niruḷho bījasaddo tadatthasaṃsiddhiyā mūlādīsupi kesuci pavattatīti mūlādito nivattanatthaṃ ekena bīja-saddena visesetvā vuttaṃ ‘‘bījabīja’’nti ‘‘rūparūpaṃ (visuddhi. 2.449), dukkhadukkha’’nti (saṃ. ni. 4.327; 5.165; netti. 11) ca yathā. Kasmā panettha bījagāmabhūtagāmaṃ uddharitvā bījagāmo eva niddiṭṭhoti? Na kho panetaṃ evaṃ daṭṭhabbaṃ, nanu avocumha – ‘‘mūlameva bījaṃ mūlabījaṃ, mūlabījaṃ etassātipi mūlabīja’’nti. Tattha purimena bījagāmo niddiṭṭho, dutiyena bhūtagāmo, duvidhopesa mūlabījañca mūlabījañca mūlabījanti sāmaññaniddesena, ekasesanayena vā uddiṭṭhoti veditabbo. Tenevāha ‘‘pañcavidhassā’’tiādi. Nīlatiṇarukkhādikassāti allatiṇassa ceva allarukkhādikassa ca. Ādi-saddena osadhigacchalatādīnaṃ saṅgaho.
一食就是一餐饭,他有这一餐饭,所以叫一食者。但他可能也吃夜食,为了排除这种情况,所以说禁夜食。即使这样,他也可能在午后吃东西而仍然算一食者,为了排除这种情况,所以说远离非时食。从曙光出现到正午这段时间,是佛陀等圣者们一向惯行的进食时间,除此之外就叫非时。不过在注释书里,因为第二个词已经遮止了夜食,所以特别说:过了正午以后,直到日落之间所吃的食物,就叫非时食。巴利
Ekaṃ bhattaṃ ekabhattaṃ, taṃ assa atthīti ekabhattiko. So pana rattibhojanenapi siyāti tannivattanatthaṃ āha ‘‘rattūparato’’ti. Evampi aparaṇhabhojīpi siyā ekabhattikoti tannivattanatthaṃ ‘‘virato vikālabhojanā’’ti vuttaṃ. Aruṇuggamanakālato paṭṭhāya yāva majjhanhikā ayaṃ buddhādīnaṃ ariyānaṃ āciṇṇasamāciṇṇo bhojanassa kālo nāma, tadañño vikālo. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana dutiyapadena rattibhojanassa paṭikkhittattā ‘‘atikkante majjhanhike yāva sūriyatthaṅgamanā bhojanaṃ vikālabhojanaṃ nāmā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“诸恶莫作”等一整套教法,是世尊的教导。它跟内心生起强烈贪染时看跳舞等情形并不相应,所以说“与教法不相应”。自己跳的舞,和让别人跳的舞,因为都属于跳舞这一类,在巴利圣典里就用一个“舞”字涵盖了;同样也用“歌”“乐”这些字涵盖,所以说“以跳舞、令人跳舞等方式”。这个“等”字,还包括自己唱、令他人唱、自己奏、令他人奏。在这里,“看”也涵盖了“听”,这是用部分代表整体的方式。或者,因为五识各自取境时都有觉知的特点,听的作用也可以用“看”来概括,所以就只说“看”。因此说“以五识不能了知任何法,除了单纯的接触”。听不颠倒的歌有时是允许的,所以说“颠倒的看”。正如《胜义灯》小部注释里说的:“与法相应的歌可以,与歌相应的法不可以。”无论什么花,不论编成花环还是没编,都不允许。香类,就是有香气的东西。对这也说“无论什么”,就表示不论是捣碎的还是没捣碎的,任何涂香之类都不允许。巴利
‘‘Sabbapāpassa akaraṇa’’ntiādinayappavattaṃ (dī. ni. 2.90; dha. pa. 183; netti. 30, 50, 116, 124) bhagavato sāsanaṃ accantarāguppattiyā naccādidassanaṃ na anulometīti āha ‘‘sāsanassa ananulomattā’’ti. Attanā payojiyamānaṃ, parehi payojāpiyamānañca naccaṃ naccabhāvasāmaññena pāḷiyaṃ ekeneva nacca-saddena gahitaṃ, tathā gītavādita-saddena cāti āha ‘‘naccananaccāpanādivasenā’’ti. Ādi-saddena gāyanagāyāpanavādanavādāpanāni saṅgayhanti. Dassanena cettha savanampi saṅgahitaṃ virūpekasesanayena . Yathāsakaṃ visayassa ālocanasabhāvatāya vā pañcannaṃ viññāṇānaṃ savanakiriyāyapi dassanasaṅkhepasabbhāvato ‘‘dassanā’’icceva vuttaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘pañcahi viññāṇehi na kañci dhammaṃ paṭivijānāti aññatra abhinipātamattā’’ti. Avisūkabhūtassa gītassa savanaṃ kadāci vaṭṭatīti āha ‘‘visūkabhūtā dassanā’’ti. Tathā hi vuttaṃ paramatthajotikāyaṃ khuddakaṭṭhakathāyaṃ (khu. pā. aṭṭha. 2.pacchimapañcasikkhāpadavaṇṇanā) ‘‘dhammūpasaṃhitaṃ gītaṃ vaṭṭati, gītūpasaṃhito dhammo na vaṭṭatī’’ti. Yaṃ kiñcīti ganthitaṃ vā aganthitaṃ vā yaṃ kiñci pupphaṃ. Gandhajātanti gandhajātikaṃ. Tassapi ‘‘yaṃ kiñcī’’ti vacanato pisitassa apisitassapi yassa kassaci vilepanādi na vaṭṭatīti dasseti.
“高”这个词,是用“高”这个音来表示另一个同义的词。“床”的意思是“躺卧于此”。所谓高床与大床,指的是不符合沙门身份的床铺,所以说“超出规定尺寸、不可使用的铺卧之物”。这里应当知道,坐具也被床所包含。因为所依之处被禁止时,依止于该处的行为也就被禁止了,所以只说了“高床大床”;但从实际含义来看,应当知道这是指远离受用这类床座的坐卧行为。或者,“高床大床”和“高床大床”和“高床大床”在这个意思上,是用省略重复的方式来做此表述的,就像“以名色为缘而有六处”那样;又或者,因为坐的行为在卧的行为之前,所以通过“床”这个词,坐具也被包含在内了。巴利
Uccāti ucca-saddena samānatthaṃ ekaṃ saddantaraṃ. Seti etthāti sayanaṃ. Uccāsayanaṃ mahāsayanañca samaṇasārupparahitaṃ adhippetanti āha ‘‘pamāṇātikkantaṃ akappiyattharaṇa’’nti. Āsanañcettha sayaneneva saṅgahitanti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Yasmā pana ādhāre paṭikkhitte tadādhārā kiriyā paṭikkhittāva hoti, tasmā ‘‘uccāsayanamahāsayanā’’icceva vuttaṃ, atthato pana tadupabhogabhūtanisajjānipajjanehi virati dassitāti daṭṭhabbaṃ. Atha vā uccāsayanamahāsayanañca uccāsayanamahāsayanañca uccāsayanamahāsayananti etasmiṃ atthe ekasesena ayaṃ niddeso kato yathā ‘‘nāmarūpapaccayā saḷāyatana’’nti (ma. ni. 3.126; saṃ. ni. 2.1; udā. 1), āsanakiriyāpubbakattā vā sayanakiriyāya sayanaggahaṇena āsanampi gahitanti veditabbaṃ.
“木钱”这类东西,是指那些在交易中流通使用的。这里用“等”这个字,就是在显示这一类东西。从让别人拿取、以及对放置的东西表示接受这两件事上,就能看出“接受”的含义,所以说“他不自己拿取,不让人拿取,不接受放置的东西”。另一种说法是,接受有三种:通过身体、通过言语、通过心意。其中,通过身体接受就是自己拿取,通过言语接受就是让别人拿取,通过心意接受就是表示满意。把这三种接受合在一起,就叫做“接受”,因此说“他不自己拿取……”等等。这个道理也适用于“接受生谷”等处。因为野麦等副谷已经被包含在稻谷等主谷之中,所以说“七种”。世尊说过:“比丘们,我允许五种兽药:熊脂、鱼脂、鳄鱼脂、猪脂、驴脂”,这是特别开许的。但对于这些,因为世尊说“应时接受”,所以接受是允许的。在有因缘的情况下,所以说“除了特别开许的”。巴利
Dārumāsakoti ye vohāraṃ gacchantīti iti-saddena evaṃpakāre dasseti. Aññehi gāhāpane upanikkhittasādiyane ca paṭiggahaṇattho labbhatīti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhāti, na uggaṇhāpeti, na upanikkhittaṃ sādiyatī’’ti. Atha vā tividhaṃ paṭiggahaṇaṃ kāyena vācāya manasāti. Tattha kāyena paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggaṇhanaṃ, vācāya paṭiggahaṇaṃ uggahāpanaṃ, manasā paṭiggahaṇaṃ sādiyananti tividhampi paṭiggahaṇaṃ ekajjhaṃ gahetvā ‘‘paṭiggahaṇā’’ti vuttanti āha ‘‘neva naṃ uggaṇhātī’’tiādi. Esa nayo āmakadhaññapaṭiggahaṇātiādīsupi. Nīvārādiupadhaññassa sāliādimūladhaññantogadhattā vuttaṃ ‘‘sattavidhassā’’ti. ‘‘Anujānāmi, bhikkhave, pañca vasāni bhesajjāni acchavasaṃ macchavasaṃ susukāvasaṃ sukaravasaṃ gadrabhavasa’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā idaṃ odissa anuññātaṃ nāma, tassa pana ‘‘kāle paṭiggahita’’nti (mahāva. 262) vuttattā paṭiggahaṇaṃ vaṭṭati. Sati paccayeti āha ‘‘aññatra odissa anuññātā’’ti.
用相似的外表来骗人,叫色欺;这句话的意思是,靠逼真的样子来欺骗。用自己身体的某个部分来骗人,叫肢欺。用执取的方式来骗人,叫执欺。藏起来骗人,叫覆藏欺。压迫就是挤压;在前面阶段压迫,要联系上下文来理解。巴利
Sarūpena vañcanaṃ rūpakūṭaṃ, patirūpena vañcanāti attho. Aṅgena attano sarīrāvayavena vañcanaṃ aṅgakūṭaṃ. Gahaṇavasena vañcanaṃ gahaṇakūṭaṃ. Paṭicchannaṃ katvā vañcanaṃ paṭicchannakūṭaṃ. Akkamatīti nippīḷeti, pubbabhāge akkamatīti sambandho.
“心”是指管状量器等量具的内部。用管状量器等量具量芝麻等东西的时候,堆起来高出的尖峰就是“峰”。“峰的差别”是指把那个尖峰拂掉。巴利
Hadayanti nāḷiādīnaṃ mānabhājanānaṃ abbhantaraṃ. Tilādīnaṃ nāḷiādīhi minanakāle ussāpitasikhāyeva sikhā. Sikhābhedo tassāhāpanaṃ.
有些老师认为“杀”是指《心要略》的老师们和北寺的住众说的。“杀”是指用拳头打、用鞭子抽等种种折磨伤害,意思就是恼害。因为“杀”这个词也确实有恼害的含义,比如在“自己打自己、打了一次又一次而哭泣”这类说法里就是这样。就好比,虽然出家人普遍都不该执取财物,但为了说明出家人不该执取的东西有哪些类别,还是分别列出了妇女、少女、婢女、奴隶等等;同样,虽然从别人那里拿东西都属于不与取,但为了显示不与取的各种具体情况,还是分别列出了秤上作弊等等。可是对于和杀生同义的“杀”这个词,就没有必要再这样细分了。因为在杀生那里是自己动手,在这里是让别人动手,不能说是一回事,正如经中所说“由身、语、意发动的思就是六种业”。所以,前面所说的义理才是恰当的。不过注释书里说“杀就是杀害”,那也可以理解为是针对殴打等行为说的,因为“杀害”这个词也有恼害的用法。巴利
Kecīti sārasamāsācariyā, uttaravihāravāsino ca. Vadhoti muṭṭhipahārakasātāḷanādīhi vihesanaṃ, vibādhananti attho. Viheṭhanatthopi hi vadha-saddo dissati ‘‘attānaṃvadhitvā vadhitvā rodatī’’tiādīsu (pāci. 879, 881). Yathā hi apariggahabhāvasāmaññe satipi pabbajitehi appaṭiggahitabbavatthuvibhāgasandassanatthaṃ itthikumāridāsidāsādayo vibhāgena vuttā. Evaṃ parassa haraṇabhāvato adinnādānabhāvasāmaññe satipi tulākūṭādayo adinnādānavisesabhāvadassanatthaṃ vibhāgena vuttā, na evaṃ pāṇātipātapariyāyassa vadhassa puna gahaṇe payojanaṃ atthi, tattha sayaṃkāro, idha paraṃkāroti ca na sakkā vattuṃ ‘‘kāyavacīpayogasamuṭṭhāpikā cetanā chappayogā’’ti vacanato. Tasmā yathāvutto evettha attho yutto. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana ‘‘vadhoti māraṇa’’nti vuttaṃ, tampi pothanameva sandhāyāti ca sakkā viññātuṃ māraṇa-saddassapi vihiṃsane dissanato.
294 294. 为了说明衣服和钵食依次只是为了养护身体和腹部,并且总体显示它们能用于八种资具,所以说了“那一切……”等话。这些(穿粪扫衣者等)也都是少欲、知足的。因为依靠这些而生活的人,不会有多欲或不满足。巴利
294. Cīvarapiṇḍapātānaṃ yathākkamaṃ kāyakucchipariharaṇamattajotanāyaṃ avisesato aṭṭhannaṃ parikkhārānaṃ antare tappayojanatā sambhavatīti dassento ‘‘te sabbepī’’tiādimāha. Etepīti navaparikkhārikādayopi appicchāva santuṭṭhāva. Na hi tatthakena mahicchatā, asantuṭṭhitā vā hotīti.
他安乐地住在四方,因此四方本身就是他安乐居住的地方,所以叫“四方者”。其中,他对众生或诸行都不因畏惧而受到阻碍,所以叫“无碍者”。他依十二种知足而满足,安住在知足中,所以叫“知足者”。“以任何所获”是指不论好坏优劣。因为他能克服种种怖畏——外在的如狮子、老虎等,内在的如欲贪等身心厄难——所以叫“能忍怖畏者”。因为没有令身心僵硬的畏惧,所以叫“无畏”。他独自一人,没有伴侣,因此就像犀牛角一样独行,这就是这句话的意思。巴利
Catūsu disāsu sukhaṃ viharati, tato eva sukhavihāraṭṭhānabhūtā catasso disā assa santīti vā cātuddiso. Tattha cāyaṃ satte vā saṅkhāre vā bhayena na paṭihaññatīti appaṭigho. Dvādasavidhassa santosassa vasena santussanako santussamāno. Itarītarenāti uccāvacena. Parissayānaṃ bāhirānaṃ sīhabyagghādīnaṃ, abbhantarānañca kāmacchandādīnaṃ kāyacittupaddavānaṃ abhibhavanato parissayānaṃ sahitā. Thaddhabhāvakarabhayābhāvena acchambhī. Eko asahāyo. Tato eva khaggamigasiṅgasadisatāya khaggavisāṇakappo careyyāti attho.
翅膀折断或者还没长出翅膀的鸟飞不起来,所以经里用“有翼的”这个词来限定,特指能飞的鸟,因此说“有翼的鸟”。为了说明这样一位比丘——他没有为了囤积而受用东西,也没有出于期待而存放什么——就说“这里面的简要含义是”等等。“圣”:因为过失从那里离去,或者因为远离那些过失,所以称为“圣”,也就是没有过失的人。“内”:指在自己身上。“没有过失的快乐”:指不依赖感官欲望的快乐,因为已经远离了烦恼和过失。巴利
Chinnapakkho , asañjātapakkho vā sakuṇo gantuṃ na sakkotīti ‘‘pakkhī sakuṇo’’ti pakkhi-saddena visesetvā sakuṇo pāḷiyaṃ vuttoti āha ‘‘pakkhayutto sakuṇo’’ti. Yassa sannidhikāraparibhogo kiñci ṭhapetabbaṃ sāpekkhāya ṭhapanañca natthi, tādiso ayaṃ bhikkhūti dassento ‘‘ayaṃ panettha saṅkhepattho’’tiādimāha. Ariyanti apenti tato dosā, tehi vā ārakāti ariyoti āha ‘‘ariyenāti niddosenā’’ti. Ajjhattanti attani. Niddosasukhanti nirāmisasukhaṃ kilesavajjarahitattā.
295 295. 只有在前面所说的戒律仪中站稳了,才谈得上根律仪,因为根律仪以戒律仪为依止,而且戒律仪本身就是守护根律仪的。所以经文说“这位比丘具备这种圣者的戒蕴”。至于其余那些句子,就是指“不执取相……”等段落。因为《清净道论》(1.15)里已经讲过,所以应当按照《显扬深义》(1.15)中解释《清净道论》的那个方式来理解。根律仪的特征就是避免执取色等对象的相和细相,因此说它具有不被烦恼沾染的快乐,以及不散乱的快乐。巴利
295. Yathāvutte sīlasaṃvare patiṭṭhitasseva indriyasaṃvaro icchitabbo tadadhiṭṭhānato, tassa ca paripālakabhāvatoti vuttaṃ ‘‘so iminā ariyena sīlakkhandhena samannāgato bhikkhū’’ti. Sesapadesūti ‘‘na nimittaggāhī hotī’’tiādīsu padesu. Yasmā visuddhimagge (visuddhi. 1.15) vuttaṃ, tasmā tassa līnatthappakāsiniyaṃ saṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ (visuddhi. mahāṭī. 1.15) vuttanayeneva veditabbaṃ. Rūpādīsu nimittādiggāhaparivajjanalakkhaṇattā indriyasaṃvarassa kilesehi anavasittasukhatā avikiṇṇasukhatā cassa vuttā.
296 资具成就是指资具圆满。这四种——戒律仪、知足、根律仪、正念正知——是住林野者的资粮。否则就会落到被畜生议论的地步,就像伊私升迦的父亲等人那样。林栖的女人发出恐怖的声音,如果在那时候不逃跑,她们就用手抓住他的头……做出种种事来。或者是名为违犯施设的黑点,或者是名为邪思惟的痣。对那样的喜悦,应观察它显著地坏灭。巴利
296.Paccayasampattinti paccayapāripūriṃ. Ime cattāroti sīlasaṃvaro santoso indriyasaṃvaro satisampajaññanti ime cattāro araññavāsassa sambhārā. Tiracchānagatehi vattabbataṃ āpajjati isisiṅgassa pituādayo viya. Vanacarakehīti vanacarakamātugāmehi. Bheravasaddaṃ sāventi, tāvatā apalāyantānaṃ hatthehi sīsaṃ…pe… karonti. Paṇṇattivītikkamasaṅkhātaṃ kāḷakaṃ vā. Micchāvitakkasaṅkhātaṃ tilakaṃ vā. Tanti pītiṃ vibhūtabhāvena upaṭṭhānato khayato sammasanto.
远离就是远离人群。因此说它是“空”的。而这种远离要以没有声音为特征,所以说“声音少、喧闹少”。具有住处性质的坐卧处,因为可以住进去,所以叫“住处坐卧处”。床、椅等,以及铺在上面的褥垫和枕头,因为和床椅相关联,所以叫“床椅坐卧处”。毛毯等因为要铺在地上,所以叫“铺设坐卧处”。树下等地方因为需要返回,又因为是经行等的场所,所以叫“场所坐卧处”。巴利
Vivittanti janavivittaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘suñña’’nti. Sā ca vivittatā nissaddabhāvena lakkhitabbāti āha ‘‘appasaddaṃ appanigghosa’’nti. Āvasathabhūtaṃ senāsanaṃ viharitabbaṭṭhena vihārasenāsanaṃ. Masārakādi mañcapīṭhaṃ tattha attharitabbaṃ bhisiupadhānañca mañcapīṭhasambandhito mañcapīṭhasenāsanaṃ. Cimilikādi bhūmiyaṃ santharitabbatāya santhatasenāsanaṃ. Rukkhamūlādi paṭikkamitabbaṭṭhānaṃ caṅkamanādīnaṃ okāsabhāvato okāsasenāsanaṃ.
说了“显示适合的”之后,为了阐明什么才是适合本身,就接着说了“于此……”等。“无覆”:就是没有覆盖——连瓦片盖顶都没有,甚至树枝也不曾遮蔽。巴利
‘‘Anucchavikaṃdassento’’ti vatvā tameva anucchavikabhāvaṃ vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘tattha hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Acchannanti iṭṭhakachadanādinā antamaso rukkhasākhāhipi na channaṃ.
“食后”是指吃完饭之后。“结跏趺坐”是指把双腿在下方交叠绑缚而坐。下半身的正直安放,仅凭“坐”这个词就已经说明了。在“身正直”中,“身”这个词指的是上半身,所以说“把上半身安放正直”。为了从具体形态和作用两方面说明这种正直安放,才说了“十八……”等内容。“不俯”就是不向前弯。“不堕落”就是不散失,不越过业处的道路。正因为如此,业处才能前后不断地获得殊胜,增长、兴旺。“近于口”是指在口的附近,也就是鼻尖或上唇。这里“遍”(pari-)这个词和“对向”(abhi-)意思相同,所以说“对向业处”,意思是阻止心向外攀取种种外境,只把业处放在前面。“周”(pari-)是摄持的意思,就像“导引”等词中的用法一样。“出离”的意思是从对治方面脱离出来,因此“已摄持的出离之念”,意思是:成就了全面把握、不忘失,舍弃了忘失的正念,安立了最上的念与正知。巴利
Bhattassapacchatoti bhattabhuñjanassa pacchato. Ūrubaddhāsananti ūrūnaṃ adhobandhanavasena nisajjaṃ. Heṭṭhimakāyassa anujukaṭṭhapanaṃ nisajjāvacaneneva bodhitanti. Ujuṃ kāyanti ettha kāya-saddo uparimakāyavisayoti āha ‘‘uparimaṃ sarīraṃ ujukaṃ ṭhapetvā’’ti. Taṃ pana ujukaṭṭhapanaṃ sarūpato payojanato ca dassetuṃ ‘‘aṭṭhārasā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Na paṇamantīti na oṇamanti. Na paripatatīti na vigacchati, vīthiṃ na vilaṅgheti. Tato eva pubbenāparaṃ visesappattiyā kammaṭṭhānaṃ vuddhiṃ phātiṃ upagacchati. Mukhasamīpeti mukhassa samīpe nāsikagge vā uttaroṭṭhe vā. Idha pari-saddo abhi-saddena samānatthoti āha ‘‘kammaṭṭhānābhimukha’’nti, bahiddhā puthuttārammaṇato nivāretvā kammaṭṭhānaṃyeva purakkhatvāti attho. Parīti pariggahaṭṭho ‘‘pariṇāyikā’’tiādīsu (dha. sa. 16) viya. Niyyānaṭṭho paṭipakkhato niggamanaṭṭho, tasmā pariggahitaniyyānasatinti sabbathā gahitāsammosaṃ pariccattasammosaṃ satiṃ katvā, paramaṃ satinepakkaṃ upaṭṭhapetvāti attho.
“依镇伏之力”在这里是指让不善法不生起、不现行,而不是靠对治把它彻底断除。说“已断除”,是就禅那还没证得这一点,说它类似已断除的状态。即便如此,这个心并不是像眼识那样在自性上就已离贪,而是靠修习的力量才离贪。因此说“不是像眼识那样”。同样的道理:眼识在自性上就离贪、无瞋,不是靠修习镇伏才这样;而这个心则是靠修习得到清净,所以无瞋、离昏沉睡眠、不掉举、无疑惑。这里说的“这两者”,是指正念与正知。巴利
Vikkhambhanavasenāti ettha vikkhambhanaṃ anuppādanaṃ appavattanaṃ na paṭipakkhena suppahīnatā. Pahīnattāti ca pahīnasadisataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ jhānassa anadhigatatā. Tathāpi nayidaṃ cakkhuviññāṇaṃ viya sabhāvato vigatābhijjhaṃ, atha kho bhāvanāvasena. Tenāha ‘‘na cakkhuviññāṇasadisenā’’ti. Eseva nayoti yathā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ sabhāvena vigatābhijjhaṃ abyāpannañca, na bhāvanāya vikkhambhitattā, na evamidaṃ. Idaṃ pana cittaṃ bhāvanāya parisodhitattā abyāpannaṃ vigatathinamiddhaṃ anuddhataṃ nibbicikicchañcāti attho. Idaṃ ubhayanti satisampajaññamāha.
297 “断除”和“舍弃”在这里的意思是:不让那些尚未生起的智慧生起来。这样一来,诸盖法就成了广大智慧、无上智慧以及某些有限智慧不能生起的原因,同时又会破坏另一类智慧的能力,所以说它们“使智慧变弱”。当这初禅在应当受调伏者的心相续中被建立起来时,智慧就在这里运行,所以叫“智足迹”;智慧在这里发生作用,所以叫“智行使”。巴利
297.Ucchinditvā pātentīti ettha ucchindanaṃ pātanañca tāsaṃ paññānaṃ anuppannānaṃ uppajjituṃ appadānameva. Iti mahaggatānuttarapaññānaṃ ekaccāya ca parittapaññāya anuppattihetubhūtā nīvaraṇā dhammā itarāya ca samatthataṃ vihanantiyevāti paññāya dubbalīkaraṇā vuttā. Idampi paṭhamajjhānaṃ veneyyasantāne patiṭṭhāpiyamānaṃ ñāṇaṃ pajjati etthāti ñāṇapadaṃ. Ñāṇaṃ vaḷañjeti etthāti ñāṇavaḷañjaṃ.
299 即使已经了知,也还没有达到确信,外道的智慧也有未曾涉足的领域。如果是这样,那么在并非他人共有的道智这一点上,为什么不说已经达到确信呢?因此说“即使在道的刹那”等。所谓“在三宝中达到确信”,就是依靠智慧,对佛陀的善自觉、法的善法性、僧的善行道,达到确信、决定。虽然在这里,初道就已经完全断除了疑惑,一切圣弟子都没有犹豫或疑惑,但是对于智慧达到极圆满的阿罗汉,他的智慧在自己的境界中会特别深入地渗透,而不还者等人则不是这样。因此,针对在三宝上以殊胜的智慧决定,才说“以最上道而在那里达到确信”。这里没有详细解释的内容,本来就很容易理解。巴利
299.Natāva niṭṭhaṃ gato bāhirakānaṃ ñāṇena akkantaṭṭhānānipi siyunti. Yadi evaṃ anaññasādhāraṇe maggañāṇapade kathaṃ na niṭṭhaṅgatoti āha ‘‘maggakkhaṇepī’’tiādi. Tīsu ratanesu niṭṭhaṃ gato hotīti buddhasubuddhataṃ dhammasudhammataṃ saṅghasuppaṭipattitañca ārabbha ñāṇena niṭṭhaṃ nicchayaṃ upagato hoti. Kāmañcettha paṭhamamaggeneva sabbaso vicikicchāya pahīnattā sabbassapi ariyasāvakassa kaṅkhā vā vimati vā natthi, tattha pana yathā paññāvepullappattassa arahato savisaye ñāṇaṃ savisesaṃ ogāhati, na tathā anāgāmiādīnanti ratanattaye sātisayaṃ ñāṇanicchayagamanaṃ sandhāya ‘‘aggamaggavasena tatthaniṭṭhāgamanaṃ vutta’’nti vuttaṃ. Yaṃ panettha avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyamevāti.
《小象迹喻经》注释中,关于隐含义理的阐明到此结束。巴利
Cūḷahatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanāya līnatthappakāsanā samattā.
第8章 大象足迹譬喻经的注释巴利
8. Mahāhatthipadopamasuttavaṇṇanā
300 这里说到“丛林”:凡是那种没有贪欲、不柔软、因为缺水而干硬粗糙的地面区域,就叫做“丛林”。不过,由于这类地方占多数,所以这里把整个地面区域都称为丛林;生于那片丛林之中,或者存在于那里的,就叫“丛林象”,也就是属于丛林的那些。这样一来,也把在河中行走的象一并收摄进来了。因为就像应当被统摄的事物一样,能统摄的事物也应当被“丛林”这个词所涵盖。说到“行走在地面上的”,这句话并不排除在水中行走的,因为它们(水中行者)的脚不可见。说到“诸有情”,这本是共通的说法,但由于紧接着“所生之足”一语,便只限定在特指之义上,所以说“有足有情”。在“已死去的”等语中,“gata”一词与“jāta”一词并无别义,所以说“所生之足即足”。说到“集合”:即总摄、或纳入。说到“以大性”:即由广大之体。巴利
300.Jaṅgalānanti ettha yo nipicchalena amuduko nirudakatāya thaddhalūkhabhūmippadeso, so ‘‘jaṅgalo’’ti vuccati. Tabbahulatāya pana idha sabbo bhūmippadeso jaṅgalo, tasmiṃ jaṅgale jātā, bhavāti vā jaṅgalā, tesaṃ jaṅgalānaṃ. Evañhi nadīcarānampi hatthīnaṃ saṅgaho kato hoti. Samodhātabbānaṃ viya hi samodhāyakānampi jaṅgalaggahaṇena gahetabbato. Pathavītalacārīnanti iminā jalacārino na nivatteti adissamānapādattā. Pāṇānanti sādhāraṇavacanampi ‘‘padajātānī’’ti saddantarasannidhānena visesaniviṭṭhameva hotīti āha ‘‘sapādakapāṇāna’’nti. ‘‘Muttagata’’ntiādīsu (ma. ni. 2.119; a. ni. 9.11) gata-saddo anatthantaro viya, jāta-saddo anatthantaroti āha ‘‘padajātānīti padānī’’ti. Samodhānanti samavarodhaṃ, antogamaṃ vā. Mahantattenāti vipulabhāvena.
“善法”是指没有过失、并且能带来快乐果报的法,不是仅仅没有过失而已。因为这里应当依照《善三法》里所说的方式来理解善法,而不是依照《巴希提咖经》里所说的方式。为什么说“摄有四种”呢?难道这里不是只指一种摄吗?不是的,因为如果不先把握义理,就只是抓住了尚未确定义理的字面。“摄”这个词,按照它自身的义理来说,确实有四种——这就是这里的意思。或者也可以说,义理本身还没有确定具体差别时,是以共相的方式被把握的,在“入于摄”这个地方,就成为可以用“摄”这个词来表达的,这并没有任何过失;只有在差别已经确定之后,它才可能只有一种,而不是在那之前。“同类摄”是指同一种类的摄,或者是对同一种类者的摄。不过在《界论注》里,只说是“生类摄”,那是因为“生”这个词是有所待的,当说“以生的摄”时,由于没有提及其他可以关联的对象,自然就理解为“以自身的生”的摄,所以才那样说。而在这里,就像在《色蕴注释》等中那样,为了清楚地显示出来,才说“同类摄”。“共生”是指在其中共同产生;以共生的摄为“共生摄”,也就是以共生处等方式来摄。当说“一切车兵”时,所有车战士因为以车作战这个行为而成为一类。当说“一切弓箭手”时,所有射箭者因为以弓射箭这个行为而成为一类,所以说“像这样,以行为来摄”。所谓“被色蕴所摄”,就是与色蕴成为一摄,只被算作色蕴本身,也就是已经进入把握之中,这就是意思。巴利
Kusalā dhammāti anavajjasukhavipākā dhammā, na anavajjamattadhammā. Kusalattike āgatanayena hi idha kusalā dhammā gahetabbā, na bāhitikasutte āgatanayena. Catubbidho saṅgahoti kasmā vuttaṃ, nanu ekavidhovettha saṅgaho adhippetoti? Na, atthaṃ aggahetvā aniddhāritatthassa saddasseva gahitattā. Saṅgaha-saddo tāva attano atthavasena catubbidhoti ayañhettha attho. Atthopi vā aniddhāritaviseso sāmaññena gahetabbataṃ patto ‘‘saṅgahaṃ gacchatī’’ti ettha saṅgaha-saddena vacanīyataṃ gatoti na koci doso, niddhārite visese tassa ekavidhatā siyā, na tato pubbeti. Sajātisaṅgahoti samānajātiyā, samānajātikānaṃ vā saṅgaho. Dhātukathāvaṇṇanāyaṃ pana ‘‘jātisaṅgaho’’icceva vuttaṃ, taṃ jāti-saddassa sāpekkhasaddattā jātiyā saṅgahoti vutte attano jātiyāti viññāyati sambandhārahassa aññassa avuttattāti katvā vuttaṃ. Idha pana rūpakaṇḍavaṇṇanāyaṃ (dha. sa. aṭṭha. 594) viya pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘sajātisaṅgaho’’icceva vuttaṃ. Sañjāyanti etthāti sañjāti, sañjātiyā saṅgaho sañjātisaṅgaho, sañjātidesavasena saṅgahoti attho. ‘‘Sabbe rathikā’’ti vutte sabbe rathayodhā rathena yujjhanakiriyāya ekasaṅgahoti. ‘‘Sabbe dhanuggahā’’ti vutte sabbe issāsā dhanunā vijjhanakiriyāya ekasaṅgahoti āha ‘‘evaṃ kiriyavasena saṅgaho’’ti. Rūpakkhandhena saṅgahitanti rūpakkhandhena ekasaṅgahaṃ rūpakkhandhoteva gaṇitaṃ, gahaṇaṃ gatanti attho.
它只随附一半的谛,因为从道谛和苦谛各取一部分来看就是这样。即使只被含摄在谛的一部分里,也仍然是被含摄在谛中,所以说“因为被含摄在诸谛中”。现在,为了阐明这个义理,从教法和世间两方面举出譬喻来说明,因此说了“如同……”等话。其中,“比丘们,这大约有一百五十条学处”这句话,是依据宣说那部经时已制定的学处而说的,那之后则有两百多条学处。由于被含摄在修学中,所以属于增上戒学。然而在这里,“即使只是在学戒,也是在修学三学”这种说法是不相应的。因为在那时,他舍断应舍断的,在应防护处成就防护,这对他来说就是增上戒学;他在其中内心不散乱,这对他来说就是增上心学;他在其中审察,这对他来说就是增上慧学。如此,这是说明那位良家子确实以各自可得的形态在修学三学,并不是仅凭修学之间的含摄关系。因此注释中说:“那种如实状态的防护,在这里就是增上戒学;那种如实状态的定,在这里就是增上心学;那种如实状态的慧,在这里就是增上慧学。这三学,他缘取那个所缘,以那个念、那个作意,去学习、修习、多修。”那么在这里,是否因为被含摄在诸谛中,就仅以“谛”这个词所指称的方式,被算在四谛之内呢?不是。因为即使在那种情况下,从直接义来说,也只有增上戒学可得,其余的是从引申义来说的,所以才说“因为被含摄在修学中”。巴利
Diyaḍḍhamevasaccaṃ bhajati maggasaccadukkhasaccekadesabhāvato. Saccekadesantogadhampi saccantogadhameva hotīti āha ‘‘saccānaṃ antogadhattā’’ti. Idāni tamatthaṃ sāsanato ca lokato ca upamaṃ āha ritvā dīpetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sādhikamidaṃ, bhikkhave, diyaḍḍhasikkhāpadasatanti idaṃ yasmiṃ kāle taṃ suttaṃ desitaṃ, tadā paññattasikkhāpadavasena vuttaṃ, tato paraṃ pana sādhikāni dvesatāni sikkhāpadānīti. Sikkhānaṃ antogadhattā adhisīlasikkhāya. Ettha ca ‘‘sīlaṃ sikkhantopi tisso sikkhā sikkhatī’’ti visamoyaṃ upaññāso. Tattha hi yo pahātabbaṃ pajahati, saṃvaritabbato saṃvaraṃ āpajjati, ayamassa adhisīlasikkhā. Yo tattha cetaso avikkhepo, ayamassa adhicittasikkhā. Yā tattha vīmaṃsā, ayamassa adhipaññāsikkhā. Iti so kulaputto sarūpato labbhamānā eva tisso sikkhā sikkhatīti dīpito, na sikkhānaṃ antogadhatāmattena. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘yo tathābhūtassa saṃvaro, ayamettha adhisīlasikkhā, yo tathābhūtassa samādhi, ayamettha adhicittasikkhā, yā tathābhūtassa paññā, ayaṃ adhipaññāsikkhā. Imā tisso sikkhā tasmiṃ ārammaṇe tāya satiyā tena manasikārena sikkhati āsevati bhāveti bahulīkarotī’’ti. Idha pana saccānaṃ antogadhattā sacca-saddābhidheyyatāmattena catūsu saccesu gaṇanantogadhā hontīti? Na, tatthāpi hi nippariyāyato adhisīlasikkhāva labbhati, itarā pariyāyatoti katvā ‘‘sikkhānaṃ antogadhattā’’ti vuttaṃ.
“被四圣谛所含摄”这种说法,是说没有脱离它们,而是就它们被包含在四圣谛之中这一点来说的。这样理解之后,就应当知道,前面用“就像一只象的足迹”等所展示的象足迹譬喻,也因此得以成立。进入一谛、二谛或三谛计数的法,不能只按善三法来理解,而应当按三法和二法中随各自情况出现的文句来理解。其中,进入一谛计数的法,应当看作无为法;进入二谛计数的法,是善法,也同样是不善法和无记法;进入三谛计数的法,是有为法。同样,对其他三法和二法的文句,也应当随各自情况分别解说这个义理。因此说“进入一……乃至……都成为进入”。因为一部分由于被总体所含摄,就像以共相统摄差别一样,通过合集而获得摄属。因此说“因为被诸谛所含摄”。说法的次第是:先列出圣谛,然后以解说苦谛的方式分别五取蕴。而在其中,又通过解释色蕴,首先分别内在的地界。这就是这段说法的次第。巴利
Catūsu ariyasaccesu saṅgahaṃ gacchantīti ca tato amuccitvā tasseva antogadhataṃ sandhāya vuttaṃ. Evañca katvā ‘‘yathā ca ekassa hatthipadassā’’tiādinā dassitā hatthipadopamā samatthitā daṭṭhabbā. Ekasmimpi dvīsupi tīsupi saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā dhammāti idaṃ na kusalattikavaseneva veditabbaṃ, atha kho tikadukesu yathārahaṃ labbhamānapadavasena veditabbaṃ. Tattha ekasmiṃ sacce gaṇanaṃ gato dhammo asaṅkhatadhammo daṭṭhabbo, dvīsu saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā kusalā dhammā, tathā akusalā dhammā, abyākatā ca dhammā, tīsu saccesu gaṇanaṃ gatā saṅkhatā dhammā, evaṃ aññesampi tikadukapadānaṃ vasena ayamattho yathārahaṃ vibhajitvā vattabbo. Tenāha ‘‘ekasmimpi…pe… gatāva hontī’’ti. Ekadeso hi samudāyantogadhattā viseso viya sāmaññena samūhena saṅgahaṃ labhati. Tenāha ‘‘saccānaṃ antogadhattā’’ti. Desanānukkamoti ariyasaccāni uddisitvā dukkhasaccaniddesavasena pañcannaṃ upādānakkhandhānaṃ vibhajanaṃ. Tattha ca rūpakkhandhaniddesavasenaādito ajjhattikāya pathavīdhātuyā vibhajananti. Ayaṃ imissā desanāya anukkamo.
301 这一段要用譬喻来说明,所以说“就像……”等等。其中,“善生”的意思是美好、结构良好、发育成熟。“薄皮”是指内膜。因为柔软,所以取腹部那一部分来说。“其余四部分”,是指在分成五份的部分中,其余那四份。“其余三部分”等,是指在最初分成四份的部分中,其余那三份。巴利
301. Taṃ panetaṃ upamāhi vibhāvetuṃ ‘‘yathā hī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha sujātanti sundaraṃ, susaṇṭhitaṃ supariṇatañcāti adhippāyo. Pesiyoti vilīve. Mudubhāvato kucchibhāgaṃ ādāya. Itare ca cattāro koṭṭhāseti pañcadhā bhinnakoṭṭhāsesu itare ca cattāro koṭṭhāse. Itare ca tayo koṭṭhāsetiādito catudhā bhinnakoṭṭhāsesu itare ca tayo koṭṭhāse.
用王子的譬喻来说明,就是用国王长子的譬喻来打比方。这是一种美称。从胸膛里由精进所产生的圣种而生的,就是胸生之子。从口而生的意思,是从口中流出的教法宣说而生,或者是从作为诸佛法身之口的圣法而生。正因如此,他就是法所生、法所化。因为被看作导师的法嗣,所以是法嗣。因此说不是物质上的继承者。所谓世尊之子等等说法,就是指世尊的儿子。由于具足大智慧等功德,能够殊胜地安住在次第修行的阶位中,能够如实、正确地宣说,所以有能力说法的人才这样说。巴利
Rājaputtūpamāyāti rañño jeṭṭhaputtaupamāya. Nti piḷandhanaṃ. Ure vāyāmajanitaariyajātiyā oraso. Mukhato jātoti mukhato niggatadhammadesanāya jāto, buddhānaṃ vā dhammakāyassa mukhabhūtaariyadhammato jāto. Tato eva dhammajo dhammanimmito. Satthu dhammadāyādasseva gahitattā dhammadāyādo. Tenāha ‘‘no āmisadāyādo’’ti. Nti ‘‘bhagavato putto’’tiādivacanaṃ. Mahāpaññatādiguṇehi sātisayaṃ anupubbabhāve ṭhitattā sammā yathābhūtaṃ vadamāno vattuṃ sakkonto vadeyya.
无怖畏的涅槃,以及导向涅槃之道。因为远离了贪等尘垢,善逝、正等正觉者宣说远离尘垢之法,为千余位比丘所亲近侍奉——应当这样联系起来理解。巴利
Akutobhayaṃ nibbānaṃ nibbānagāminiñca. Rāgarajādīnaṃ vigamena vigatarajaṃ dhammaṃ desentaṃ sugataṃ sammāsambuddhaṃ bhikkhūnaṃ parosahassaṃ payirupāsatīti yojanā.
说了“应当亲近、应当结交”之后,接着说明其中的理由:“有智慧的比丘是能给予帮助的人。”他们虽然是有智慧的人,但并不是寡闻少学,而是能以教诫和指导来给予帮助。前面的譬喻是专就长老而说的,后一个譬喻则是就世尊和比丘僧团两者而说的。巴利
‘‘Sevetha bhajathā’’ti vatvā tattha kāraṇamāha ‘‘paṇḍitā bhikkhū anuggāhakā’’ti. Paṇḍitāpi samānā na appassutā, atha kho ovādānusāsanīhi anuggāhakāti purimā upamā therasseva vasena udāhaṭā, dutiyā pana bhagavato bhikkhusaṅghassapi vasena udāhaṭā.
302 “内”是指属于有情相续范围内的。“内”和“各自的”这两个词,都是用来指各个别众生自身的法,所以说“这两者都只是自身所属的别名”。不过,因为属于自己相续,从可以被执取为“我”的角度来看,针对自我、为了自我而生起的,叫“内”;因为属于各个有情的相续,叫“各自的”。因此注释书《清净道论》中说:“因为在自身中生起,所以是‘内’;因为一再缘于自己而生起,所以是‘各自的’。”“硬”就是坚固。因为它以僵硬的状态作为俱生法的立足处,所以说“僵硬”。“粗”是指属于粗的本质,也就是粗的本质本身,这是它的含义。但因为粗的本质以粗涩的样貌呈现,所以说是“粗涩”。“执受”指的是身体中的八法。其中,由业所生的,从直接意义上叫“执受”,其他的则不是执受。为了说明在这里两者都因为渴爱等而成为被执取、被抓住、被邪执的对象,所以说了“身体中的……因为”等话。其中,“执取”是指深深陷入其中;“我的”是指被抓住;“我”是指被邪执。对于修习界业处的禅修者来说,在这里,也就是在这个界业处中。“三部分”是指三种部分。因为那些部分不是四部分。巴利
302.Ajjhattikāti sattasantānapariyāpannā. Ajjhattaṃ paccattanti padadvayenapi taṃtaṃpāṭipuggalikadhammā vuccantīti āha ‘‘ubhayampetaṃ niyakādhivacanamevā’’ti. Sasantatipariyāpannatāya pana attāti gahetabbabhāvūpagamanavasena attānaṃ adhikicca uddissa pavattaṃ ajjhattaṃ, taṃtaṃsattasantānapariyāpannatāya paccattaṃ. Tenāha aṭṭhakathāyaṃ (visuddhi. 1.307) ‘‘attani pavattattā ajjhattaṃ, attānaṃ paṭicca paṭicca pavattattā paccatta’’nti. Kakkhaḷanti kathinaṃ. Yasmā taṃ thaddhabhāvena sahajātānaṃ patiṭṭhā hoti, tasmā ‘‘thaddha’’nti vuttaṃ. Kharigatanti kharasabhāvesu gataṃ tappariyāpannaṃ, kharasabhāvamevāti attho. Yasmā pana kharasabhāvaṃ pharusākārena upaṭṭhānato pharusākāraṃ hoti, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘pharusa’’nti. Upādinnaṃ nāma sarīraṭṭhakaṃ. Tattha yaṃ kammasamuṭṭhānaṃ, taṃ nippariyāyato ‘‘upādinna’’nti vuccati, itaraṃ anupādinnaṃ. Tadubhayampi idha taṇhādīhi ādinnagahitaparāmaṭṭhavasena upādinnamevāti dassetuṃ ‘‘sarīraṭṭhakañhī’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Tattha ādinnanti abhiniviṭṭhaṃ. Mamanti gahitaṃ. Ahanti parāmaṭṭhaṃ. Dhātukammaṭṭhānikassāti catudhātuvavatthānavasena dhātukammaṭṭhānaṃ pariharantassa. Etthāti etasmiṃ dhātukammaṭṭhāne. Tīsu koṭṭhāsesūti tippakāresu koṭṭhāsesu. Na hi te tayo cattāro koṭṭhāsā.
所谓“所说种类”,就是指前面像“头发、体毛”等那样说过的那些种类。“种种自性”是说:虽然它们都有坚硬这一共同点,但因为是按各种成分分开来的,所以就头发等聚合体而言,各有各的不同自性。“爱着”指期求。“欲乐”指渴望。“渴求”指渴爱的希求。“遍缠”指渴爱的随眠缠缚。“执取”指欲取。“邪执”指以错误的方式去抓取,也就是错误的执著。这些爱着等并不强。既然这样,为什么在《分别论》里,外在的地界也被详细分别呢?因为那里是依照法来开示,所以以详细的方式展开教说;而在这里,因为是顺应随法的开示,所以按照上述方式简略地教说。巴利
Vuttappakārāti ‘‘kesā lomā’’tiādinā vuttappakārā. Nānāsabhāvatoti satipi kakkhaḷabhāvasāmaññe sasambhāravibhattito pana kesādisaṅghātagatanānāsabhāvato. Ālayoti apekkhā. Nikantīti nikāmanā. Patthanāti taṇhāpatthanā. Pariyuṭṭhānanti taṇhāpariyuṭṭhānaṃ. Gahaṇanti kāmupādānaṃ. Parāmāsoti parato āmasanā micchābhiniveso. Na balavā ālayādi. Yadi evaṃ kasmā vibhaṅge bāhirāpi pathavīdhātu vitthāreneva vibhattāti? Yathādhammadesanattā tattha vitthāreneva desanā pavattā, yathānulomadesanattā panettha vuttanayena desanā saṃkhittā.
把它合在一起显示,就是“集合起来显示”。那是指内在的地界。它容易被当成“这是我的”,而“这不是我的我”则容易被把握。因为当无我相已经成立时,在有为法中,苦相和无常相也就自然成立,因为它们与无我相不可分离。所谓“它扰乱”,就是表现出扰乱、怪异的行为。而从意义上说,那其实就是悸动,所以说“它悸动着”。所谓“对此”,是指对内在的地界。由于见到它只是界,所以无心的状态就变得明显。所谓“那两者”,是指那两种地界。巴利
Yojetvā dassetīti ekajjhaṃ katvā dasseti. Sāti ajjhattikā pathavīdhātu. Sukhapariggaho hoti ‘‘na me so attā’’ti. Siddhe hi anattalakkhaṇe dukkhalakkhaṇaṃ aniccalakkhaṇañca siddhameva hoti saṅkhatadhammesu tadavinābhāvatoti. Visūkāyatīti visūkaṃ virūpakiriyaṃ pavatteti. Sā pana atthato vipphandanamevāti āha ‘‘vipphandatī’’ti. Assāti ajjhattikāya pathavīdhātuyā. Acetanābhāvo pākaṭo hoti dhātumattatāya dassanato. Taṃ ubhayampīti taṃ pathavīdhātudvayampi.
比那个更殊胜:意思是比外在的大地更殊胜,也就是更轻细。它被激怒:就是被破坏。正在消融:就像盐在普通水里化掉一样,正在消失。随水而去:就是跟着水走,与水同一去向。因此说“就变成了水”。不存在本身就是无有性;或者说,不存在就是不成其为那样的法,那种状态就是无有性。灭:就是消失;这个法以坏灭为自性,所以叫灭法;它的状态就是灭法性,本质上就是坏灭。其余的词句也按同样方式理解。因此说“所有这些词句说的都是无常相”。不过,因为要说明坏灭的自性,所以从名称上确实说的是无常相,而其余的苦相、无我相在意义上也已经说了。为了说明这一点,就说“然而……”等等。巴利
Tato visesatarenāti tato bāhiramahāpathavito visesavantatarena, lahutarenāti attho. Kuppatīti luppati. Vilīyamānāti pakatiudake loṇaṃ viya vilayaṃ gacchantī. Udakānugatāti udakaṃ anugatā udakagatikā. Tenāha ‘‘udakameva hotī’’ti. Abhāvo eva abhāvatā, na bhavatīti vā abhāvo, tathāsabhāvo dhammo. Tassa bhāvo abhāvatā. Vayo vināso dhammo sabhāvo etassāti vayadhammo, tassa bhāvo vayadhammatā, atthato khayo eva. Sesapadesupi eseva nayo. Tenāha ‘‘sabbehipi imehi padehi aniccalakkhaṇameva vutta’’nti. Viddhaṃsanabhāvassa pana paveditabbattā kāmaṃ aniccalakkhaṇameva vuttaṃ sarūpato, itarānipi atthato vuttānevāti dassento āha ‘‘yaṃ panā’’tiādi.
“只住极短的时间”就是“只住一刹那”的意思,也就是“极短暂的住留”,意思是极其短暂的刹那存在。因此说“唯短暂住留者”。“由于住留的短暂”:那以单一心生起的活动为全部范围、以住留为特征的(法),由于与此不同的状态。因为仅凭一颗心生起的刹那,众生的寿命在究竟意义上就被限定。因此说“因为这个人……”等等。巴利
Mattaṃ khaṇamattaṃ tiṭṭhatīti mattaṭṭho, appamattaṭṭho mattaṭṭhako, atiittarakhaṇikoti attho. Tenāha ‘‘parittaṭṭhitikassā’’ti. Ṭhitiparittatāyāti ekacittapavattimattatāṭhānalakkhaṇassa itarabhāvena . Ekassa cittassa pavattikkhaṇamatteneva hi sattānaṃ paramatthato jīvanakkhaṇo paricchinno. Tenāha ‘‘ayaṃ hī’’tiādi.
命,就是命根。乐与苦,就是乐受和苦受。舍受其实也包含在乐与苦里面,因为它同样有可意和不可意这两种情况。自体,是指除了命、受、识之外,其余剩下的那些法。唯,是说纯粹以自体的方式存在,不掺杂常的想法。与同一心相应,就是与同一个心在一起,属于同一个心刹那。刹那迅速流转,意思是:正因为这样只存在于一个刹那,命等法的刹那才极其轻快、极其短暂地流转、消逝。这,指的是偈颂里所说的内容。巴利
Jīvitanti jīvitindriyaṃ. Sukhadukkhāti sukhadukkhā vedanā. Upekkhāpi hi sukhadukkhāsveva antogadhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhabhāvato. Attabhāvoti jīvitavedanāviññāṇāni ṭhapetvā avasiṭṭhadhammā vuttā. Kevalāti attaniccabhāvena avomissā. Ekacittasamāyuttāti ekena cittena sahitā ekacittakkhaṇikā. Lahuso vattate khaṇoti tāya eva ekakkhaṇikatāya lahuko atiittaro jīvitādīnaṃ khaṇo vattati vītivattatīti attho. Idanti gāthāvacanaṃ.
众生的命,只有在入出息能一次又一次地交替运行时才得以延续,不能交替运行时便不能延续,因此命系属于入出息。同样,命也只有在四大保持平衡时才能延续。因为当地界、水界等任何一界发生紊乱时,即使是一个力气很大的人,也会身体僵硬,或因严重腹泻等而身体湿烂腐臭,或被极度高烧所逼,或关节筋腱断裂,从而走向命终。命也只有在适当时候获得段食时才得以延续,得不到段食便会耗尽;而且只有在识持续运作时命才延续,识不运作时命便不延续。这里“命”一词中的“如是”一语,涵盖了系属于威仪、系属于冷热等情形。因为命只有在四种威仪保持平衡时才能延续,若其中某一种过度,寿行便会中断;命也只有在冷热平衡时才延续,被极寒或极热所压倒的人便会死亡。巴利
Yasmā sattānaṃ jīvitaṃ assāsapassāsānaṃ aparāparasañcaraṇaṃ labhamānameva pavattati, na alabhamānaṃ, tasmā assāsapassāsūpanibaddhaṃ. Tathā mahābhūtānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati. Pathavīdhātuyā hi āpodhātuādīnaṃ vā aññatarapakopena balasampannopi puriso patthaddhakāyo vā, atisārādivasena kilinnapūtikāyo vā, mahāḍāhapareto vā, sañchijjamānasandhibandhano vā hutvā jīvitakkhayaṃ pāpuṇāti. Kabaḷīkārāhārānaṃ yuttakāle labhantasseva jīvitaṃ pavattati, alabhantassa parikkhayaṃ gacchati, viññāṇe pavattamāneyeva ca jīvitaṃ pavattati, na tasmiṃ appavattamāne. Jīvitanti ettha iti-saddena iriyāpathūpanibaddhatāsītuṇhūpanibaddhatādīnaṃ saṅgaho. Catunnañhi iriyāpathānaṃ samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva jīvitaṃ pavattati, aññatarassa pana adhimattatāya āyusaṅkhārā upacchijjanti, sītuṇhānampi samavuttitaṃ labhamānameva pavattati, atisītena pana atiuṇhena vā abhibhūtassa vipajjatīti.
“由渴爱所执取的”这一说法,是通过指出它是缘所生,来显示它自身的坏灭性。因为苦随观能直接对治渴爱的执取,无常随观能直接对治慢的执取,无我随观能直接对治见的执取,由于这三种随观与这些执取正好相反,所以这些执取必定也会随之消失,因此说“不会成为”。这里只提到外地界的消失,是为了说明依此观察而生起的随观。巴利
Taṇhupādinnassāti iminā hi paccayuppannatākittanena sarasapabhaṅgutaṃyeva vibhāveti. Dukkhānupassanāya taṇhāggāhassa aniccānupassanāya mānaggāhassa anattānupassanāya diṭṭhiggāhassa ujuvipaccanīkabhāvato ekaṃseneva tīhi anupassanāhi gāhāpi vigacchantīti āha ‘‘noteva hotī’’ti. Ekaṃyeva āgataṃ bāhirāya pathavīdhātuyā antaradhānadassanapavattajotanāya.
“把握”是指对界的把握。“正在建立”是指开始教导、宣说的时候。“在耳门显示力量”是一个连接句。通过显示业处修行者的力量,实际上显示了业处本身的力量。“以言语撞击”这一说法,正是因为它在耳门显示了力量。所谓“力量”,是指通过显示内地界也像外地界一样没有心识,就像树木即使被辱骂、被击打也毫无反应,这就是力量。“以正现行、正生起的状态”:是指当时正在现行的状态。“以现行生起的状态”:当那不可意的声音所缘在耳门显现时,以作所缘之名义生起,所以说耳门的速行受是苦。因此说“以近依缘”。受等:这里所说的受以及想等。“受是无常”等。它们与触同地,不是前面所说的受。名为界的所缘:如已把握的、名为地界的所缘。跃入:观心以思惟无常、苦、无我的方式渗入。以此说明没有向外散乱。而“明净”:以此说明业处已入心路。“安住”:以此说明以越来越殊胜的状态而住立,因战胜敌对法而不动摇。“解脱”:以此说明从贪、慢、见的执取中特别解脱。然而在义注中以等起之义说了“获得胜解”。在耳门所缘显现:这是以根本遍知而见根本。在耳门,对触、注意等不如理作意,以触之意门,于可意所缘生贪,于不可意所缘生瞋,而在意门则“女人、男人”等染着等发生,其根本是五门速行,或者一切都是有分等。如是,以意门速行的根本而遍知。而来客暂时遍知则应知为唯五门速行的前所未有状态及他者状态。这里只是略说,详细解释已在念处注释中说过。巴利
Pariggahanti dhātupariggahaṇaṃ. Paṭṭhapentoti ārabhanto desento. Sotadvāre balaṃ dassetīti yojanā. Kammaṭṭhānikassa baladassanāpadesena kammaṭṭhānassa ānubhāvaṃ dasseti. Vācāya ghaṭṭanameva vuttaṃ sotadvāre baladassanabhāvato. Balanti ca bāhirāya viya ajjhattikāyapi pathavīdhātuyā acetanābhāvadassanena rukkhassa viya akkosantepi paharantepi nibbikāratā. Sampativattamānuppannabhāvenāti tadā paccuppannabhāvena. Samudācāruppannabhāvenāti āpāthagate tasmiṃ aniṭṭhe saddārammaṇe ārammaṇakaraṇasaṅkhātauppattivasena sotadvāre javanavedanā dukkhāti vacanato. Tathā hi ‘‘upanissayavasenā’’ti vuttaṃ. Vedanādayopīti ‘‘vedanā aniccā’’ti ettha vuttavedanā ceva saññādayo ca. Te hi phassena samānabhūmikā na pubbe vuttavedanā. Dhātusaṅkhātameva ārammaṇanti yathāpariggahitaṃ pathavīdhātusaṅkhātameva visayaṃ. Pakkhandatīti vipassanācittaṃ aniccantipi dukkhantipi anattātipi sammasanavasena anupavisati. Etena bahiddhāvikkhepābhāvamāha, pasīdatīti pana iminā kammaṭṭhānassa vīthipaṭipannataṃ. Santiṭṭhatīti iminā uparūpari visesāvahabhāvena avatthānaṃ paṭipakkhābhibhavena niccalabhāvato. Vimuccatīti iminā taṇhāmānadiṭṭhiggāhato visesena muccanaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana samuṭṭhānavasena attho vutto ‘‘adhimokkhaṃ labhatī’’ti. Sotadvāramhi ārammaṇe āpāthagateti idaṃ mūlapariññāya mūladassanaṃ. Sotadvārehi āvajjanavoṭṭhabbanānaṃ ayoniso āvajjayato voṭṭhabbanavasena iṭṭhe ārammaṇe lobho, aniṭṭhe ca paṭigho uppajjati, manodvāre pana ‘‘itthī, puriso’’ti rajjanādi hoti, tassa pañcadvārajavanaṃ mūlaṃ, sabbaṃ vā bhavaṅgādi. Evaṃ manodvārajavanassa mūlavasena pariññā. Āgantukatāvakālikapariññā pana pañcadvārajavanasseva apubbabhāvavasena itarabhāvavasena ca veditabbā. Ayamettha saṅkhepo, vitthāro pana satipaṭṭhānasaṃvaṇṇanāyaṃ vutto eva.
即使有人已经通过如实把握诸界而完成了把握,但由于无始以来的修习之力,若仍然生起不如理作意,当心到达确定时,便获得了确定的作用——得到一次或两次习行,但并不是成为习行缘。因为与舍俱的无因心确实不可能成为习行缘。如果它能成为,那么在《发趣论》善三法中的缘起分等处,就应该说“以非道缘而于习行有二,以习行缘而于非道有二”,但实际说的是“以非道缘而于习行有一,以习行缘而于非道有一”。这里说“一次或两次”,其中“一次”只是为了让言辞顺畅。因为在第二种无效转起中,确定心并非只转起一次:转起两次的情况说为“一次”,转起三次的情况说为“两次”。其中第二次和第三次的转起,就好像获得了习行一样。然而,“到达确定,获得一次或两次习行后,心便沉入有分”,这应该是就第二种无效转起而言的。而这种情况确实只是由于所缘的羸弱才发生,这在《阿毗达摩注》中已有明确规定。但在这里,由于犀利观智之力,不善不可能生起;因此,若是不如理作意的人,就可能生起不如理的确定,而非如理的确定;而且当面对广大或极大所缘时,速行也不会生起——这个道理应当经过审察后再来理解。巴利
Yāthāvato dhātūnaṃ pariggaṇhanavasena katapariggahassapi anādikālabhāvanāvasena ayoniso āvajjanaṃ sacepi uppajjati. Voṭṭhabbanaṃ patvāti voṭṭhabbanakiccataṃ patvā. Ekaṃ dve vāre āsevanaṃ labhitvā, na āsevanapaccayaṃ. Na hi upekkhāsahagatāhetukacittaṃ āsevanapaccayabhūtaṃ atthi. Yadi siyā, paṭṭhāne kusalattike paṭiccavārādīsu ‘‘na maggapaccayā āsevane dve, āsevanapaccayā na magge dve’’ti ca vattabbaṃ siyā, ‘‘na maggapaccayā āsevane ekaṃ (paṭṭhā. 1.1.221), āsevanapaccayā na magge eka’’nti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.152) ca pana vuttaṃ. Ekaṃ dve vāreti ettha ca ekaggahaṇaṃ vacanasiliṭṭhatāya vasena vuttaṃ. Na hi dutiye moghavāre ekavārameva voṭṭhabbanaṃ pavattati. Dvikkhattuṃ vā tassa pavattiṃ sandhāya ekavāraggahaṇaṃ, tikkhattuṃ pavattiṃ sandhāya dvevāraggahaṇaṃ. Tattha dutiyaṃ tatiyañca pavattamānaṃ laddhāsevanaṃ viya hoti. Yasmā pana ‘‘voṭṭhabbanaṃ patvā ekaṃ dve vāreāsevanaṃ labhitvā cittaṃ bhavaṅgameva otaratī’’ti idaṃ dutiyamoghavāravasena vuttaṃ bhaveyya. So ca ārammaṇadubbalatāya eva hotīti abhidhammaṭṭhakathāyaṃ niyamito. Idha pana tikkhānupassanānubhāvena akusaluppattiyā asambhavavasena ayonisova āvajjato ayoniso vavatthānaṃ siyā, na yoniso, tasmiñca pavatte mahati atimahati vā ārammaṇe javanaṃ na uppajjeyyāti ayamattho vicāretvā gahetabbo.
或者,即使承认对确定心可以作这两种区分,如果在随顺的受三法里的缘起分等处,确实说过“以习行缘,非于道有二法;以道缘,非于习行有二法”,那倒还可以成立,但并没有这样说。如果确定心也能成为习行缘,那么善法和不善法也应该能成为习行缘。因为对于确实应当获得习行缘的法,并没有不说过“此法就是习行缘”;可是确定心与善、不善之间的习行缘关系却被否定了——因为《发趣论》说:“善法缘生善法,非以习行缘。不善……非以习行缘。”如果说这只是根据不同感受来说的,那么也应该像《发趣论》中“转向对善蕴、不善蕴以无间缘为缘”那样,说出“以习行缘为缘”。如果说因为种类不同所以没说,那么就像欲界法对色界等不同地界的法,虽然地界不同,仍有习行缘关系一样,即使种类不同,也应当说;而且就像“转向对有因诸蕴以无间缘为缘”是依种类无别而说的,也应当说“以习行缘为缘”,但并没有这样说。因此,在受三法中,通过“以习行缘,非于道有一法;以道缘,非于习行有一法”这样的数目判定,由于确定心的习行缘性并不存在,这个无效的转起应当经过审察来理解。巴利
Etasseva vā satipi duvidhatāparikappane so ca yadi anulome vedanāttike paṭiccavārādīsu ‘‘āsevanapaccayā na magge dve, na maggapaccayā āsevane dve’’ti ca vuttaṃ siyā, (labbheyya), na ca vuttaṃ. Yadi pana voṭṭhabbanampi āsevanapaccayo siyā, kusalākusalānampi siyā. Na hi āsevanapaccayaṃ laddhuṃ yuttassa āsevanapaccayatāpi dhammo āsevanapaccayo hotīti avutto atthi, voṭṭhabbanassa pana kusalākusalānaṃ āsevanapaccayabhāvo avutto – ‘‘kusalaṃ dhammaṃ paṭicca kusalo dhammo uppajjati nāsevanapaccayā. Akusalaṃ…pe… nāsevanapaccayā’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.93-94) vacanato paṭikkhitto ca. Athāpi siyā asamānavedanānaṃ vaseneva vuttanti ca, evamapi yathā – ‘‘āvajjanā kusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ akusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’tipi vattabbaṃ siyā. Taṃ jātibhedā na vuttanti ce? Bhūmibhinnassa kāmāvacarassa rūpāvacarādīnaṃ āsevanapaccayabhāvo viya jātibhinnassapi bhaveyyāti vattabbo eva siyā, abhinnajātikassa ca vasena yathā – ‘‘āvajjanā sahetukānaṃ khandhānaṃ anantarapaccayena paccayo’’ti vuttaṃ, evaṃ ‘‘āsevanapaccayena paccayo’’tipi vattabbaṃ siyā, na ca vuttaṃ. Tasmā vedanāttikepi ‘‘āsevanapaccayā na magge ekaṃ, na maggapaccayā āsevane eka’’nti evaṃ gaṇanāya niddhāriyamānāya voṭṭhabbanassa āsevanapaccayattassa abhāvā ayaṃ moghavāro upaparikkhitvā gahetabbo.
不过,如果把它称为“确定”,是因为它从路心与果报相续的状态转起;如果把它称为“作意”,是因为它让与前一状态不同的速行生起,那么这两种叫法都可以成立。可是,如果真是这样,《发趣论》里就应该说“确定心对善蕴以无间缘为缘”等等,但论中并没有这样说,而只说“转向”。另外,当确定心缘取色等所缘而生起时,它无法成为随后四或五个速行的所缘前生,于是它站在速行的位置上,然后沉入有分。所谓“站在速行的位置上”,意思是它在速行生起的地方转起两次,并不是说它本身以速行的身份存在。这里说的“获得习行”,是指它像习行一样,所以被称为习行。因为它有广散的特性,所以会转起两次或三次,这就类似于习行。正因为它有广散性,才说它能令表色等生起。广散心虽然像速行,但由于不能多次转起,也不能稳固安立,所以严格来说并不具备习行的性质。因此,这里并不是说确定心具有习行的意义。不过,在注疏中,这只是像把果心说成道的异名一样,是一种权宜的说法。巴利
Voṭṭhabbanaṃ pana vīthivipākasantatiyā āvaṭṭanato āvajjanā, tato visadisassa javanassa karaṇato manasikāroti ca vattabbataṃ labheyya, evañca katvā paṭṭhāne ‘‘voṭṭhabbanaṃ kusalānaṃ khandhānaṃ anantarapaccayena paccayo’’tiādi na vuttaṃ, ‘‘āvajjanā’’icceva (paṭṭhā. 1.1.417) vuttaṃ, tampi voṭṭhabbanato paraṃ catunnaṃ pañcannaṃ vā javanānaṃ ārammaṇapurejātaṃ bhavituṃ asakkontaṃ rūpādiṃ ārabbha pavattamānaṃ voṭṭhabbanaṃ javanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvā bhavaṅgaṃ otarati. Javanaṭṭhāne ṭhatvāti ca javanassa uppajjanaṭṭhāne dvikkhattuṃ pavattitvāti attho, na javanabhāvenāti. Āsevanaṃ labhitvāti cettha āsevanaṃ viya āsevananti vuttovāyamattho. Vipphārikattā cassa dvikkhattuṃ vā tikkhattuṃ vā pavattiyeva cettha āsevanasadisatā. Vipphārikatāya hi viññattisamuṭṭhāpakatā cassa vuccati. Vipphārikampi javanaṃ viya anekakkhattuṃ appavattiyā asuppatiṭṭhitatāya ca na nippariyāyato āsevanabhāvena vattatīti na imassa āsevanatthaṃ vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhakathāyaṃ pana phalacittesu maggapariyāyo viya pariyāyavasena vuttaṃ.
这里说的“此人”是指:像“即使……”这样说的那种瑜伽行者,他通过让贪等烦恼连一次也不生起的方式,来修观业处。达到顶点就是到达最高处。因为不被对立面所压倒,观智清明,所以是锐利观行者。所缘已经被把握,因为以“我的速行是这样运行的”来判定有速行的存在与否,这本身就是业处;或者,以转向的方式舍弃那个所缘之后,当下就把握作为根本业处的所缘。至于“依第二种”,是指前面所说“另一个人以贪等令速行运行一次”那种不那么锐利的观行者,因为在这部经里说到“他的心只跃入界所缘”等等。正如《鹌鹑譬喻经》中所说:“当他为舍断所依、为舍弃所依而修行时,有时因为忘失正念,与所依相应的忆念和思惟就会现起。乌达夷,念的生起是迟缓的,但他很快就舍弃它、驱除它、灭掉它,使它彻底消失。”在那部经的注释中,先提出质问:“入流者等暂且不说,凡夫怎么舍弃呢?”然后解释说:“一个已发起观修的凡夫,因为忘失正念,烦恼突然生起时,他会生起悚惧,心想:‘像我这样的比丘竟然生起了烦恼!’于是振作精进,增长观,以道彻底断除烦恼。这样,他就叫作舍弃了。”因此说“他的心只跃入界所缘”等等,因为在这部经里出现了这样的说法。而在《根修习经》中,则应当依中等观行者的方式来理解这个意思。巴利
Ayanti ‘‘sacepī’’tiādinā vutto ekavārampi rāgādīnaṃ anuppādanavasena vipassanāya kammaṃ karonto yogāvacaro. Koṭippattoti matthakaṃ patto. Paṭipakkhehi anabhibhūtattā visadavipassanāñāṇatāya tikkhavipassako. Ārammaṇaṃ pariggahitameva hoti ‘‘evaṃ me javanaṃ javita’’nti sārammaṇassa javanassa hutvā abhāvavavatthāpanassa kammaṭṭhānabhāvato, tathā āvajjanavasena vā taṃ ārammaṇaṃ vissajjetvā tāvadeva mūlakammaṭṭhānabhūtaṃ ārammaṇaṃ pariggahitameva hoti. Dutiyassa pana vasenāti ‘‘aparassa rāgādivasena ekavāraṃ javanaṃ javatī’’tiādinā vuttassa nātitikkhavipassakassa vasena ‘‘tassa dhātārammaṇameva cittaṃ pakkhandatī’’tiādinā imasmiṃ sutte āgatattā. ‘‘Tamenaṃ upadhipahānāya paṭipannaṃ upadhipaṭinissaggāya kadāci karahaci satisammosā upadhipaṭisaṃyuttā sarasaṅkappā samudācaranti. Dandho udāyi satuppādo, atha kho naṃ khippameva pajahati vinodeti byantīkaroti anabhāvaṃ gametī’’ti laṭukikopame. Tassa hi aṭṭhakathāyaṃ ‘‘sotāpannādayo tāva pajahantu, puthujjano kathaṃ pajahatī’’ti codanaṃ paṭṭhapetvā ‘‘āraddhavipassako hi satisammosena sahasā kilese uppanne ‘mādisassa nāma bhikkhuno kileso uppanno’ti saṃvegaṃ katvā vīriyaṃ paggayha vipassanaṃ vaḍḍhetvā maggena kilese samugghāteti, iti so pajahati nāmā’’ti attho vutto. Tena vuttaṃ – ‘‘tassa dhātārammaṇameva cittaṃ pakkhandatītiādinā imasmiṃ sutte āgatattā’’tiādi. Indriyabhāvane ca majjhimassa vasena ayamattho veditabbo.
“以把握故”,就是依界的把握。当人遇到割截骨髓等不可意的所缘,比如辱骂等,就会在耳门感到疲惫;同样,遇到殴打捶击等不可意的所缘,就会在身门感到疲惫。巴利
Pariggahavasenāti dhātupariggahavasena. Mammacchedanādivasena pavattaakkosanādiṃ aniṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ patvā sotadvāre kilamati puggalo, tathā pothanapaharaṇādikaṃ aniṭṭhaṃ ārammaṇaṃ patvā kāyadvāre kilamati.
“现行”是指完全地向上活动。对于不可意的对象来说,所谓现行,就是以殴打、捶击等方式直接施加伤害,所以说“加害”,意思是恼害。其法性如此:就像被掌击等一碰就产生变化那样,它的本性就是这样。世尊说“诸比丘,即使有人用锯子……”等教导,是诸佛不共的独特之法,因此说“即使忆念世尊所说……乃至忆念锯喻教诫”。有人认为,那也只是教法本身而已。然而,即使在被锯割的人当中,也能不生嗔恨、毫无变异,这样忆念导师的教导,就是在忆念正行法相。比丘的功德:这里说的是证得圣法所成就的功德。这也是一切圣者的功德,因此忆念它,就是在忆念僧众。巴利
Samudācarantīti sabbaso uddhaṃ ācaranti. Tayidaṃ amanāpehi samudācaraṇaṃ nāma pothanapaharaṇādivasena upakkamanamevāti āha ‘‘upakkamantī’’ti, bādhantīti attho. Tathāsabhāvoti yathā pāṇippahārādīhi ghaṭṭitamatto vikāraṃ āpajjati, tathāsabhāvo. ‘‘Ubhatodaṇḍakena cepi, bhikkhave, kakacenā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.232) ovādadānaṃ nāma anaññasādhāraṇaṃ buddhānaṃyeva āveṇikanti āha ‘‘vuttaṃ kho panetaṃ bhagavatāti anussarantopi…pe… kakacūpamovādaṃ anussarantopī’’ti vuttaṃ. Tassapi pariyattidhammabhāvatoti keci . Yaṃ pana kakacokantakesupi manussesu appadussanaṃ nibbikāraṃ, taṃ satthusāsanaṃ anussarantopi sammāpaṭipattilakkhaṇaṃ dhammaṃ anussaratiyevāti evaṃ vā ettha attho veditabbo. Bhikkhuno guṇanti ariyadhammādhigamanasiddhaṃ guṇamāha. So ca sabbesampi ariyānaṃ guṇoti taṃ anussarantopi saṅghaṃ anussarati evāti vuttaṃ.
这里指的是“观舍”。所以,舍不能依止于善而安住,意思是:以观的力量,对于一切行所摄之法,都无法获得中舍。“六支舍”是指像六支舍那样,对可意和不可意的境,因为同样没有变异之相,所以称为六支舍。因此说“而此……”等。在六支舍的情况下,如果生起“我得到了利益,我善得利益”等欢喜心,这就把它安立在六支舍的层面。巴利
Vipassanupekkhā adhippetā, tasmā upekkhā kusalanissitā na saṇṭhātīti vipassanāvasena sabbasmimpi saṅkhāragate ajjhupekkhanaṃ na labhatīti attho. Chaḷaṅgupekkhāti chaḷaṅgupekkhā viya chaḷaṅgupekkhā iṭṭhāniṭṭhesu nibbikāratāsāmaññena . Tenāha ‘‘sā panesā’’tiādi. Chaḷaṅgupekkhāṭhāne ṭhapeti ‘‘lābhā vata me, suladdhaṃ vata me’’tiādinā attamanataṃ āpajjanto.
303 “水所成”:从粘结作用来说,是水;因为正好达到了水的本性,所以叫水所成,意思是说,它凭自己的本性就已经达到了水的状态。可是,那种被称为水界的湿润性,存在于一切水中,包括与组合物相关的地、水等。因此说“遍一切水的湿润相”,意思就是流动相。“激增”:这是指通常的激增,所以说“以暴流的方式增长”。因此说“这是它通常的激增”。为了说明另一种情况,就说“而在水劫之时……”等。“沉没”:这里的“沉没”指的是完全淹没,不只是向下沉,所以说“向上……中略……到达”。巴利
303.Āpogatanti ābandhanavasena āpo, tadeva āposabhāvaṃ gatattā āpogataṃ, sabhāveneva āpobhāvaṃ vā pattanti attho. Yasmā pana so āpobhāvasaṅkhāto allayūsabhāvo sasambhārapathavīsasambhāraudakādigate sabbasmimpi āpasmiṃ vijjati, tasmā vuttaṃ ‘‘sabbaāpesu gataṃ allayūsabhāvalakkhaṇa’’nti, dravabhāvalakkhaṇanti attho. ‘‘Pakuppatī’’ti pākatikapakopaṃ sandhāyāha ‘‘oghavasena vaḍḍhatī’’ti. Tenāha ‘‘ayamassa pākatiko pakopo’’ti. Itaraṃ pana dassetuṃ ‘‘āposaṃvaṭṭakāle panā’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Ogacchantīti ettha ogamananti pariyādānaṃ adhippetaṃ, na adhogamanamattanti āha ‘‘uddhane…pe… pāpuṇantī’’ti.
304 “遍一切火”:是指在一切以燃料等而有种种差别的火界部分中,已到达、已现起。就像“喜”就是“喜所成”,同样,“火”就是“火所成”,意思是仅仅以燃烧作用而现起而已。同样,“水所成”“风所成”也应这样理解,所以说“如前”等。“以一日疟等病类”:就是以一日疟等疾病的差别。“受暑热”:就是被暑热所压倒。“老化”:就是变成衰老。为了说明在这个身体中由火界而有的衰老过程应当依明显的衰老来理解,所以说“诸根损减”等。“皱纹白发等”:就是皱纹、白发的状态,以及四肢百节的松弛。“被激怒”:就是被扰动。据说把酥反复煎煮一百次,再投入冷水中取出,就叫做百洗酥。“热恼”:是超过身体正常体温的热性;“遍烧”:是由于身体燃烧而现起的猛烈大烧——这就是它们之间的差别。“食”:指吞咽。“啖”:指咀嚼。“尝”:指品尝。“正熟”:是依均衡的消化能力而说的。“不正熟”:也应依不均衡的消化能力来理解。“成为味等”:就是成为味、血、肉、脂、筋、骨、骨髓、精液的状态。“差别”:就是种种不同的、彼此不相像的状态。意思是:在所吞咽等食物的消化中产生味,缘于那个味而生起味界。同样,由味的消化而成为“血”等,这一切都应依此类推。巴利
304.Sabbatejesu gatanti indhanādivasena anekabhedesu sabbesu tejokoṭṭhāsesu gataṃ pavattaṃ. Yathā pīti eva pītigataṃ, evaṃ tejo eva tejogataṃ, tejanavasena pavattimattanti attho. Evaṃ āpogataṃ, vāyogatañca veditabbanti āha ‘‘purime’’tiādi. Ekāhikajarādibhāvenāti ekāhikādijarābhedena. Usumajātoti usmābhibhūto. Jīratīti jiṇṇo hoti. Tejodhātuvasena labbhamānā imasmiṃ kāye jarāpavatti pākaṭajarāvasena veditabbāti dassetuṃ ‘‘indriyavekallatta’’ntiādi vuttaṃ. Valipalitādibhāvanti valitapalitabhāvaṃ, aṅgapaccaṅgānaṃ sithilabhāvañca. Kuppitenāti khubhitena. Satakkhattuṃ tāpetvā tāpetvā sītūdake pakkhipitvā uddhaṭasappi satadhotasappīti vadanti. Sarīre pakatiusumaṃ atikkamitvā uṇhabhāvo santāpo, sarīrassa dahanavasena pavatto mahādāho paridāhoti ayameva tesaṃ viseso. Asitanti suttaṃ. Khāyitanti khāditaṃ. Sāyitanti assāditaṃ. Sammā paripākaṃ gacchatīti samavepākiniyā gahaṇiyā vasena vuttaṃ. Asammāparipākopi visamapākiniyā gahaṇiyā vasena veditabbo. Rasādibhāvenāti rasarudhiramaṃsamedanhāruaṭṭhiaṭṭhimiñjasukkabhāvena. Vivekanti puthubhāvaṃ aññamaññaṃ visadisabhāvaṃ. Asitādibhedassa āhārassa pariṇāme raso hoti, taṃ paṭicca rasadhātu uppajjatīti attho. Evaṃ rasassa pariṇāme ‘‘rudhira’’ntiādinā sabbaṃ netabbaṃ.
青林就是青翠本身,加“anta”这个词只是把词补足,就像“林野”“经”那样。刮皮就是刮下皮之后丢掉的碎屑。巴利
Haritantanti haritameva, anta-saddena padavaḍḍhanaṃ kataṃ yathā ‘‘vanantaṃ suttanta’’nti. Cammanillekhanaṃ cammaṃ likhitvā chaḍḍitakasaṭaṃ.
305 嗳气、打嗝等:这里的“等”字,应当理解为涵盖了能引起呕吐、喷嚏等的气。“大小便等”:通过这里的“等”字,可以知道还包括排出胆汁、痰、唾液等的风,以及热气。虽然“kucchi”这个词是腹部的同义词,但因为“koṭṭha”指的是内部,所以这里用“kucchi”来指称腹内剩余的部分,因此说“腹中的风,即肠外的风”。“屈伸等”:通过“等”字,涵盖了瞻视、回顾、抬举等一切身体动作。“水由此流出”(ossavanaṃ),即覆障之处。“此处”就是指这个位置。巴利
305.Uggārahikkārādīti ettha ādi-saddena uddekakhīpanādipavattakavātānaṃ saṅgaho daṭṭhabbo. Uccārapassāvādīti ādi-saddena pittasemhalasikādinīharaṇavātassa ceva usumavātassa ca saṅgaho veditabbo. Yadipi kucchi-saddo udarapariyāyo, koṭṭha-saddena pana abbhantarassa vuccamānattā tadavasiṭṭho udarapadeso idha kucchi-saddena vuccatīti āha ‘‘kucchisayā vātāti antānaṃ bahivātā’’ti. Samiñjanapasāraṇādīnīti ādi-saddena ālokanavilokanauddharaṇādikā sabbā kāyikakiriyā saṅgahitā. Avasavati udakaṃ etasmāti ossavanaṃ, chadananto. Idhāti imasmiṃ ṭhāne.
306 “无有情性”就是无我所作。因为所显示的四大,只是无我所的界,纯粹只是界,没有有情、没有命者,以此来显示这个含义。“被围绕”就是以被围绕的状态而住,被围绕。因此说“这些”等语,意思是像木材等依靠特定的组合而被安放。否则,就不能称为“屋”。因此说“但就木材等”等语。为了把经文中“贤友,譬如”等语所说明的含义清楚地显示出来,而说出“如同木材等”等语。巴利
306.Nissattabhāvanti anattakataṃ. Yathādassitā hi catasso dhātuyo anattaniyaṃ kevalaṃ dhātumattā nissattanijjīvāti imamatthaṃ dasseti. Parivāritoti parivāritabhāvena ṭhito parivuto. Tenāha ‘‘etānī’’tiādi, kaṭṭhādīni sannivesavisesavasena ṭhapitānīti adhippāyo. Aññathā agārasamaññāya bhāvato. Tenāha ‘‘kaṭṭhādīsu panā’’tiādi. Yadatthaṃ pāḷiyaṃ ‘‘seyyathāpi, āvuso’’tiādi āraddhaṃ, tamatthaṃ pākaṭaṃ katvā dassetuṃ ‘‘yathā kaṭṭhādīnī’’tiādi vuttaṃ.
前面确实已经用“只是这个身体”等说法,不加区分、只就一部分提到了所造色,但并没有把受等作为蕴来摄受宣说,同样也没有把渴爱作为集谛来宣说。而其余诸谛则完全没有宣说。因此他说“前面……没有宣说”。“当眼净色灭时”,就是眼净色坏灭了。“受损”,就是被先前的虫等所损毁。“被障”,就是没有脓等产生,只是被遮蔽。“相应的”,就是与它相符,意思是适合眼识生起。当色所缘出现在眼前时,所生起的作意也依止于心所依处;有眼时它才存在,没有眼时就不存在,所以说“缘眼而生的作意”。“有分、转向”,不仅对所缘缘如此,对净色缘也是如此,所以说“缘眼与色”。“Nti”指眼门中唯作意界之心。“系于其他所缘者”,就是专心于其他所缘的人。“与他们相应者”,就是与那些眼、色及其转向相应。巴利
Kāmaṃ heṭṭhā ‘‘mattaṭṭhakassa kāyassā’’tiādinā (ma. ni. 1.302) avibhāgena ekadesena ca upādārūpampi kathitaṃ, tathā vedanādayo khandhabhāvena pariggahetvā na kathitā, tathā taṇhāpi samudayasaccabhāvena. Itarāni pana saccāni sabbena sabbaṃ na kathitāni. Tenevāha ‘‘heṭṭhā…pe… na kathitānī’’ti. Cakkhupasāde niruddheti cakkhupasāde vinaṭṭhe. Upahateti pubbakimiādīhi upaddute. Palibuddheti pubbādiuppattiyā vinā paṭicchādite. Tajjoti tassānurūpo, cakkhuviññāṇuppattiyā anurūpoti attho. Cakkhussa rūpārammaṇe āpāthagate uppajjanamanasikāro hadayasannissayopi cakkhumhi sati hoti, asati na hotīti katvā ‘‘cakkhuṃ paṭicca uppajjanamanasikāro’’ti vutto. Bhavaṅgāvaṭṭanaṃ tassa yathā ārammaṇapaccaye, evaṃ pasādapaccayepi hotīti vuttaṃ ‘‘cakkhuñca rūpe ca paṭiccā’’ti. Nti cakkhudvāre kiriyamanodhātucittaṃ. Aññavihitassāti aññārammaṇapasutassa. Tadanurūpassāti tesaṃ cakkhurūpatadābhogānaṃ anurūpassa.
这段显示四谛:从自相和从义理推知两方面来说明。所谓“成为那样”或“达到那样”,就是“如实者”,意思是像眼识生起那样、具足缘相的状态。“三因所生色”,就是时节、业、食所生的色。这里虽然当时也有有分、转向等心所生的色,但只是就眼识没有生起色这一点来说的。“被摄入”,就像城市归属于王国一样,是在色蕴中被收摄、被归属。因为说的是“如实者”,所以受等只是与眼识相应的,识也只是眼识本身。“行”只是指思,因为行蕴以思为主导。其中,触、命根、作意、心住也同样是行蕴之法。统合为一类,就是“五蕴”的合计。和合,就是各自依缘而聚合。聚集,就是互相作为缘而结合、聚合在一起。巴利
Cattāri saccāni dasseti sarūpato atthāpattito cāti adhippāyo. Tappakāro bhūto, tappakāraṃ vā patto tathābhūto, tassa, yathā cakkhuviññāṇaṃ uppajjati, tādisassa paccayākārasamavetassāti attho. Tisamuṭṭhānarūpanti utukammāhārasamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ. Idañca satipi tadā bhavaṅgāvaṭṭanacittasamuṭṭhānarūpe kevalaṃ cakkhuviññāṇasamuṭṭhitarūpassa abhāvamattaṃ gahetvā vuttaṃ. Saṅgahaṃ gacchatīti nagaraṃ viya rajje rūpakkhandhe saṅgahetabbataṃ gahetabbataṃ gacchati. ‘‘Tathābhūtassā’’ti vuttattā vedanādayo cakkhuviññāṇasampayuttāva, viññāṇampi cakkhuviññāṇameva. Saṅkhārāti cetanāva vuttā cetanāpadhānattā saṅkhārakkhandhassāti adhippāyo. Tattha pana phassajīvitindriyamanasikāracittaṭṭhitiyopi saṅkhārakkhandhadhammāva. Ekato saṅgaho ‘‘pañcakkhandhā’’ti ekato gaṇanā. Samāgamoti yathāsakaṃ paccayavasena samodhānaṃ. Samavāyoti aññamaññassa paccayabhāvena samavetatāya samuditabhāvo.
依缘而生起的法,是依靠这个因而生起的,所以叫“缘起”,也就是缘的作用方式。观察缘法的人,也能观察到缘所生起的法;观察那些缘所生起的法的人,也能观察到缘法,所以说“凡缘起”等等。以欲的方式,就是渴爱的方式。以执著的方式,就是期待的方式。以随顺的方式,就是染著的方式。深入,是指像进入所缘、像吞下去、像确定下来那样,以坚固执取的方式。欲贪在这里被调伏、被断除,所以叫“欲贪调伏”,也叫欲贪的断除,这称为涅槃。引取,是指经典中虽然没有直接按自相说出来,但可以按意义引出来,以归纳的方式把握。为了说明引取的方法,他说“在这些中”等等。在这三处,就是按前面所说的乐、苦等三个方面,也就是三个现观之处。见,是指由遍知现观等所生起的正见,也就是如实知见。同样,思惟等也应当按各自的情况这样理解。修习通达,是指依修习而通达,不是仅仅把所缘作为对象而已。此道,是指这条八支圣道,它由通达四圣谛而转起。到此为止,就这样在一个眼门中,通过依处摄持的方式,把四谛业处推到顶点,世尊的教法就已经被实行,成为广大、圆满。巴利
Paccayuppannadhammo paṭicca samuppajjati etasmāti paṭiccasamuppādo, paccayākāro. Paccayadhamme passantopi paccayuppannadhamme passati, te passantopi paccayadhamme passatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘yo paṭiccasamuppāda’’ntiādi. Chandakaraṇavasenāti taṇhāyanavasena. Ālayakaraṇavasenāti apekkhākaraṇavasena. Anunayakaraṇavasenāti anurajjanavasena. Ajjhogāhitvāti ārammaṇaṃ anupavisitvā viya gilitvā viya niṭṭhapetvā viya daḷhaggahaṇavasena. Chandarāgo vinayati pahīyati etthāti chandarāgavinayo chandarāgapahānañcāti vuccati nibbānaṃ. Āharitvāti pāḷiyaṃ sarūpato anāgatampi atthato ānetvā saṅgaṇhanavasena gahetabbaṃ. Āharaṇavidhiṃ pana dassento ‘‘yā imesū’’tiādimāha. Imesu tīsu ṭhānesūti yathāvuttesu sukhadukkhādīsu tīsu abhisamayaṭṭhānesu. Diṭṭhīti pariññābhisamayādivasena pavattā sammādiṭṭhi yāthāvadassanaṃ. Evaṃ saṅkappādayopi yathārahaṃ veditabbā. Bhāvanāpaṭivedhoti bhāvanāvasena paṭivedho, na ārammaṇakaraṇamattena. Ayaṃ maggoti ayaṃ catunnaṃ ariyasaccānaṃ paṭivijjhanavasena pavatto aṭṭhaṅgiko maggo. Ettāvatāpīti evaṃ ekasmiṃ cakkhudvāre vatthu pariggahamukhenapi catusaccakammaṭṭhānassa matthakaṃ pāpanena bahuṃ vipulaṃ paripuṇṇameva bhagavato sāsanaṃ kataṃ anuṭṭhitaṃ hoti.
有分心生起之后又灭去,它本身就是转向心的缘,所以说“即使它已经灭去”。说“只是处于微弱状态”,是就那些被深重睡眠压倒的人来说的;但对于被昏沉睡眠控制的人,有分心有时也可能成为转向的缘。说“就在有分时”,是指在有分心自身生起的那个时候,对于禅那熟练、业处熟练、经典熟练的人,因为对这些已经非常熟练,即使没有作意,意门也会自行运转。就像一个人因为对经典极其熟练,在仿佛不间断地诵念时,由于心跑到别处去了,不会审察“已经诵了这么多经文,还剩这么多”。说“四因所生”是指一切四因所生色,不是像前面那样只是三因所生,这是意趣。因为触和思在前、因为粗显,所以只取触和思为行蕴,并非因为其他(心所)不存在。说“只简略地把握”是指没有将前面所指示的意义在下面毫无遗漏地说明,唯以说明一部分的方式而解说,从而触及教法;在此处——于“朋友,内眼”等处,以六门方式解说前所指示的意义之处;前文缺略说的——“所造色,四种无色蕴,上三圣谛”等在解释中被略去的一切义理;依彼彼门——依眼门等各各门类。以四谛而开始的教法,也以四谛而结束,所以说“以随顺连贯而终结经”。巴利
Uppajjitvā niruddhameva bhavaṅgacittaṃ āvajjanacittassa paccayo bhavatīti vuttaṃ ‘‘taṃ niruddhampī’’ti. Mandathāmagatamevāti mahatiyā niddāya abhibhūtassa vasena vuttaṃ, kapimiddhaparetassa pana bhavaṅgacittaṃ kadāci āvajjanassa paccayo bhaveyyāti. Bhavaṅgasamayenevāti bhavaṅgasseva pavattanasamayena paguṇajjhānapaguṇakammaṭṭhānapaguṇaganthesu tesaṃ paguṇabhāveneva ābhogena vināpi manasikāro pavattati. Tathā hi paguṇaṃ ganthaṃ paguṇabhāveneva nirantaraṃ viya ajjhayamāne aññavihitatāya ‘‘ettako gantho gato, ettako avasiṭṭho’’ti sallakkhaṇā na hoti. Catusamuṭṭhānampīti sabbaṃ catusamuṭṭhānarūpaṃ, na pubbe viya tisamuṭṭhānamevāti adhippāyo. Pubbaṅgamattā oḷārikattā ca phassacetanāva saṅkhārakkhandhoti gahitā, na aññesaṃ abhāvā. Ekadesameva sammasantoti yathāuddiṭṭhaṃ atthaṃ heṭṭhā anavasesato aniddisitvā ekadesameva niddisanavasena desanāya āmasanto. Imasmiṃ ṭhāneti yathāuddiṭṭhassa atthassa ‘‘ajjhattikañceva, āvuso, cakkhu’’ntiādinā (ma. ni. 1.306) chadvāravasena niddisanaṭṭhāne. Heṭṭhā parihīnadesananti – ‘‘yaṃ upādārūpaṃ cattāro arūpino khandhā upari tīṇi ariyasaccānī’’ti niddesavasena parihīnaṃ atthajātaṃ sabbaṃ. Taṃtaṃdvāravasenāti cakkhudvārādikaṃ taṃtaṃdvāravasena. Catusaccavasena āraddhā desanā catusacceneva pariyosāpitāti āha ‘‘yathānusandhināva suttantaṃ niṭṭhapesī’’ti.
《大心材喻经》的注释巴利
9. Mahāsāropamasuttavaṇṇanā
307 “不久离去”是指离去不久,离去之后没过多久。“仅以其特征”是指只凭剃发、披袈裟等自己原先的外在特征。“分别生起”是指在因行为不端和邪见而被执行举罪羯磨之后,变得与外道相似,单独存在。“良家子”只是从出身来说才叫良家子。“未混杂”是指没有掺杂,没有种姓混杂。这里是以生为开头来讲生所依的苦,所以说“陷入”,意思是生已经进入其中。因为有情从出生那一刻起,就好像被由生所引起的苦从内部侵入而受逼迫。对老等也是如此。“四种资具可获得”是指利得,即四种资具可得,被妥善准备、妥善整治。“誉说”是指称赞功德。“不为人知”是指由于未被尊崇而不为人知。这是为了显示利养等不会产生。因此说“连少量食物、衣物也得不到”。“少威势”是指少威力。这种少威势通过缺乏优越成就和缺乏眷属成就而显现出来。其中,为了显示没有眷属成就,说“随从极少”。巴利
307.Nacirapakkanteti na ciraṃ pakkante, pakkantassa sato na cirasseva. Saliṅgenevāti muṇḍiyakāsāyaggahaṇādinā attano purimaliṅgeneva. Pāṭiyekke jāteti vipannācāradiṭṭhitāya pakāsanīyakammakaraṇato paraṃ aññatitthiyasadise visuṃ bhūte. Kulaputtoti jātimattena kulaputto. Asambhinnāyāti sambhedarahitāya, jātisaṅkaravirahitāyāti atto. Jātisīsena idha jātivatthukaṃ dukkhaṃ vuttanti āha ‘‘otiṇṇoti yassa jāti anto anupaviṭṭhā’’ti. Jāto hi satto jātakālato paṭṭhāya jātinimittena dukkhena anto anupaviṭṭho viya vibādhīyati. Jarāyātiādīsupi eseva nayo. Cattāro paccayā labbhantīti lābhā, catunnaṃ paccayānaṃ labbhamānānaṃ sukatabhāvo suṭṭhu abhisaṅkhatabhāvo. Vaṇṇabhaṇananti guṇakittanaṃ. Apaññātāti sambhāvanāvasena na paññātā. Lābhādinibbattiyābhāvadassanañhetaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘ghāsacchādanamattampi na labhantī’’ti. Appesakkhāti appānubhāvā. Sā pana appesakkhatā adhipateyyasampattiyā ca parivārasampattiyā ca abhāvena pākaṭā hoti. Tattha parivārasampattiyā abhāvaṃ dassento ‘‘appaparivārā’’ti āha.
有些人因为不懂,或者因为想得到别的利益,就把不是心材的东西当成心材来做,所以为了区别这一点,才说“用心材做的心材之物”,为了说明这个,就说了“轴、轮、轭、犁等”。所谓“梵行”,是指统摄三学的教法梵行。把大树拿来作比喻:道果是心材,智见是肤材,定是树皮,戒是外皮,而四种资具因为本性动摇不定,所以叫枝叶。所谓“因此”,就是通过产生利养、恭敬、名闻。所谓“我得心材了”,意思是说,在这教法里应当证得的心材,因为有了这些利养等,他就以为自己已经得到了,于是停下来,觉得该做的已经做完了。巴利
Sārenapi keci ajānanena aññālābhena vā asārabhūtampi kattabbaṃ karontīti tato visesanatthaṃ ‘‘sārena sārakaraṇīya’’nti vuttanti taṃ dassento ‘‘akkhacakkayuganaṅgalādika’’nti āha. Brahmacariyassāti sikkhāttayasaṅgahassa sāsanabrahmacariyassa. Mahārukkhassa maggaphalasārassa ñāṇadassanapheggukassa samādhitacassa sīlapapaṭikassa cañcalasabhāvā saṃsappacārīti ca cattāro paccayā sākhāpalāsaṃ nāma. Tenevāti lābhasakkārasilokanibbattaneneva. Sāro me pattoti imasmiṃ sāsane adhigantabbasāro nāma iminā lābhādinibbattanena anuppattoti vosānaṃ niṭṭhitakiccaṃ āpanno.
310 如实知见:就是属于智的见,以现证对象的方式生起的神通智。微细色:指天界众生等的色,或者其他本性微细的色。因此说“乃至……而住”,因为这里是以最殊胜的说明方式,把天眼通称为“如实知见”。巴利
310.Ñāṇadassananti ñāṇabhūtaṃ dassanaṃ visayassa sacchikaraṇavasena pavattaṃ abhiññāñāṇaṃ. Sukhumaṃ rūpanti devādīnaṃ, aññampi vā sukhumasabhāvaṃ rūpaṃ. Tenāha ‘‘antamaso…pe… viharantī’’ti, dibbacakkhu hi idha ukkaṭṭhaniddesena ‘‘ñāṇadassana’’nti gahitaṃ.
311 “成就非时解脱”这一句里,为了用经文本身说明所指的是什么非时解脱,所以说了“什么是非时解脱”等话。因为八等至既有入定的时节,也有非时节;但通过道而解脱的人,解脱并没有时节或非时节的分别。如果有人信心强,观也已经生起,那么他在行走、站立、坐着、吃饭时,不能说不可能证得道果。因此,通过道而解脱的人,没有时节或非时节的区别,这就是非时解脱。所以经文说“因为是世间等至……”等等。巴利
311.Asamayavimokkhaṃārādhetīti ettha adhippetaṃ asamayavimokkhaṃ pāḷiyā eva dassetuṃ ‘‘katamo asamayavimokkho’’tiādi vuttaṃ. Aṭṭhannañhi samāpajjanasamayopi atthi asamayopi, maggavimokkhena pana vimuccanassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthi. Yassa saddhā balavatī, vipassanā ca āraddhā, tassa gacchantassa tiṭṭhantassa nisīdantassa bhuñjantassa ca maggaphalapaṭivedho nāma na hotīti na vattabbaṃ, iti maggavimokkhena vimuccantassa samayo vā asamayo vā natthīti so asamayavimokkho. Tenāha ‘‘lokiyasamāpattiyo hī’’tiādi.
不愤怒,也不坏灭,所以叫“不动”,意思是任何时候都不会退失。因为一切烦恼都止息了,心得到解脱,所以叫“心解脱”。因此说“阿拉汉果解脱”。“这是它的目的”,意思是“为了这个目的”,指的是教法梵行,这是它的最高终点。就像开头用心材的比喻那样,用果来结束开示,所以说“随顺连结而结束开示”。这里在意义上没有详细展开的部分,都很容易理解。巴利
Na kuppati, na nassatīti akuppā, kadācipi aparihānasabhāvā. Sabbasaṃkilesehi paṭippassaddhivasena cetaso vimuttīti cetovimutti. Tenāha ‘‘arahattaphalavimuttī’’ti. Ayamattho payojanaṃ etassāti etadatthaṃ, sāsanabrahmacariyaṃ, tassa esā paramakoṭi. Yathāraddhassa sāropamena phalena desanā niṭṭhāpitāti āha ‘‘yathānusandhināva desanaṃ niṭṭhapesī’’ti. Yaṃ panettha atthato avibhattaṃ, taṃ suviññeyyameva.
《小心材喻经》的注释巴利
10. Cūḷasāropamasuttavaṇṇanā
312 “黄褐色界”是指本质是黄褐色、肤色是黄褐色,或者眼睛是黄褐色,这就是它的意思。被称为出家大众的僧团,并不是从戒等功德能被摄受的意义上说的。他们有僧团作为随从,所以叫“有僧团”。那个他,就是那位被称为出家大众集合的人本身。“以行持修学的方式”,是指按照自己构想出来的裸形戒等行持来教导。“被施设”,是依照各自所受的戒行以及所认定获得的成就而被施设。“执持邪见者”,就是生起那种邪见的人。“对于大众”,是指对于凡夫。而他连圣教的成就都没有,何况证得呢?所以肯定只是盲目的凡夫,因此说“对于未闻教导的盲目愚痴凡夫”。因为智者不会对不可信的东西生起信心。“吉祥奴”,是在吉祥事务中做奴仆该做的事的奴仆。巴利
312.Piṅgaladhātukoti piṅgalasabhāvo piṅgalacchaviko, piṅgalakkhoti vā attho. Pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto saṅgho, na sīlādiguṇehi saṅgahitabbabhāvena. Saṅgho etesaṃ atthi parivārabhūtoti saṅghino. Svevāti so eva pabbajitasamūhasaṅkhāto. Ācārasikkhāpanavasenāti attanā parikappitaacelavatādiācārasikkhāpanavasena. Paññātāti yathāsakaṃ samādinnavatavasena ceva viññātaladdhivasena ca paññātā. Laddhikarāti tassā micchādiṭṭhiyā uppādakā. Bahujanassāti puthujanassa. Tassa pana āgamasampadāpi nāma natthi, kuto adhigamoti ekaṃsato andhaputhujjano evāti āha ‘‘assutavato andhabālaputhujjanassā’’ti. Na hi viññū appasādanīye pasīdanti. Maṅgalesu kātabbadāsakiccakaro dāso maṅgaladāso.
把线拉开、已经织好的布,叫做“张线织成”。缠缚烦恼,就是在轮回中把人绑住的烦恼。所谓“以这样说”,就是依这样宣称,或者依这样执取之见。“能导出”的意思是:具有导向出离、伴随神变、且无可指责的性质。“若非能导出”是接上文来说的。那些沙门、婆罗门自称遍知,事实却并非如此;因为不实,所以说明他们并非能导出,就显出那位婆罗门毫无利益可得。因此说“通过说明他们并非能导出,而指出其毫无利益”。巴利
Tantāvutānanti tante pasāretvā vītānaṃ. Gaṇṭhanakilesoti saṃsāre bandhanakileso. Evaṃ vāditāyāti evaṃ paṭiññatāya, evaṃ diṭṭhitāya vā. Niyyānikāti niyyānagatisappāṭihīrakā anupārambhabhūtattāti adhippāyo. No ce niyyānikāti ānetvā yojanā. Tesaṃ sabbaññupaṭiññāya abhūtattā tassā abhūtabhāvakathanena tassa brāhmaṇassa na kāci atthasiddhīti āha ‘‘nesaṃ aniyyānikabhāvakathanena atthābhāvato’’ti.
318 他的内心倾向沉没在低劣的世间利养里,而不是朝向涅槃。这就是“志向沉没者”。因为对学处没有深切的恭敬,他就让教法变得松弛,然后还去执取它。巴利
318. Nihīnalokāmise līno ajjhāsayo etassa, na pana nibbāneti. Līnajjhāsayo. Sāsanaṃ sithilaṃ katvā gaṇhāti sikkhāya na tibbagāravattā.
323 “下面”指的是紧挨在前面的那部经,也就是《大核心喻经》。初禅等法是观的基础,意思是它们是观的立足处。“在此”指的是在这部《小核心喻经》里所说的。“灭尽定的基础”是指不还果者和阿罗汉能够进入灭尽定。所以说“因此”,是因为它们是灭尽定的基础。应当知道,初禅等法比智见更为殊胜。巴利
323.Heṭṭhāti anantarātītasutte mahāsāropame. Paṭhamajjhānādidhammā vipassanāpādakāti vipassanāya padaṭṭhānabhūtā. Idhāti imasmiṃ cūḷasāropame āgatā. Nirodhapādakāti anāgāmino, arahanto vā nirodhasamāpattiṃ samāpajjituṃ samatthā. Tasmāti nirodhapādakattā. Paṭhamajjhānādidhammā ñāṇadassanato uttaritarāti veditabbā.